BR112020019771A2 - METHOD FOR SMOKE EVACUATION FOR CENTRAL SURGICAL CONTROLLER - Google Patents

Abstract

smoke evacuation method for central surgical controller. the present invention relates to a method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site. the method comprises communicatively connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, where the central surgical controller comprises a central surgical controller enclosure, and where the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the central surgical controller casing. the method further comprises removing a particulate from the surgical site and transferring it to the particulate evacuation module, analyzing the removed particulate and modifying an operation of the particulate evacuation module based on the analysis of the removed particulate.

Description

Invention Patent Descriptive Report for "METHOD

FOR SMOKE EVACUATION TO CENTRAL SURGICAL CONTROLLER ". CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED ORDERS

[001] The present application claims priority under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 773,778, entitled METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE

CONTROL SCHEMES FOR SURGICAL NETWORK CONTROL AND INTERACTION, filed on November 30, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 773,728, entitled METHOD FOR

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS FOR SURGICAL NETWORK OR SURGICAL NETWORK CONNECTED DEVICE CAPABLE OF

ADJUSTING FUNCTION BASED ON A SENSED SITUATION OR USAGE, filed on November 30, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 773,741, entitled METHOD FOR FACILITY DATA COLLECTION AND INTERPRETATION, filed on November 30, 2018, and the application US Provisional Patent No. 62 / 773,742, entitled METHOD FOR CIRCULAR STAPLER

CONTROL ALGORITHM ADJUSTMENT BASED ON SITUATIONAL AWARENESS, filed on November 30, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[002] The present application claims priority under title 35 of the USC (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 750,529, entitled METHOD FOR OPERATING A POWERED ARTICULATING MULTI-CLIP APPLIER, filed on October 25, 2018, from provisional patent application no. 62 / 750,539, entitled SURGICAL CLIP APPLIER, filed on October 25, 2018, and from provisional patent application no. 62 / 750,555, entitled SURGICAL CLIP APPLIER, filed on October 25, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[003] The present application also claims priority under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,183, entitled CONTROL FOR A SURGICAL

NETWORK OR SURGICAL NETWORK CONNECTED DEVICE THAT

ADJUSTS ITS FUNCTION BASED ON A SENSED SITUATION OR USAGE, filed on September 10, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,177, entitled AUTOMATED DATA SCALING, ALIGNMENT, AND ORGANIZING BASED ON PREDEFINED

PARAMETERS WITHIN A SURGICAL NETWORK BEFORE TRANSMISSION, filed on September 10, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,176, entitled INDIRECT COMMAND

AND CONTROL OF A FIRST OPERATING ROOM SYSTEM THROUGH THE USE OF A SECOND OPERATING ROOM SYSTEM WITHIN A

STERILE FIELD WHERE THE SECOND OPERATING ROOM SYSTEM HAS PRIMARY AND SECONDARY OPERATING MODES, filed on September 10, 2018, from US provisional patent application 62 / 729,185, entitled POWERED STAPLING DEVICE THAT IS CAPABLE OF ADJUSTING FORCE, ADVANCEMENT SPEED, AND

OVERALL STROKE OF CUTTING MEMBER OF THE DEVICE BASED ON SENSED PARAMETER OF FIRING OR CLAMPING, filed on September 10, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,184, entitled POWERED SURGICAL TOOL WITH A

PREDEFINED ADJUSTABLE CONTROL ALGORITHM FOR

CONTROLLING AT LEAST ONE END EFFECTOR PARAMETER AND A MEANS FOR LIMITING THE ADJUSTMENT, filed on September 10, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,182, entitled SENSING THE PATIENT POSITION AND CONTACT UTILIZING THE MONO-POLAR RETURN PAD ELECTRODE TO

PROVIDE SITUATIONAL AWARENESS TO THE HUB, filed on September 10, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,191, entitled SURGICAL NETWORK RECOMMENDATIONS

FROM REAL TIME ANALYSIS OF PROCEDURE VARIABLES

AGAINST A BASELINE HIGHLIGHTING DIFFERENCES FROM THE OPTIMAL SOLUTION, filed on September 10, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,195, entitled ULTRASONIC

ENERGY DEVICE WHICH VARIES PRESSURE APPLIED BY CLAMP

ARM TO PROVIDE THRESHOLD CONTROL PRESSURE AT A CUT PROGRESSION LOCATION, filed on September 10, 2018, and US provisional patent application No. 62 / 729,186, entitled WIRELESS

PAIRING OF A SURGICAL DEVICE WITH ANOTHER DEVICE WITHIN

A STERILE SURGICAL FIELD BASED ON THE USAGE AND SITUATIONAL AWARENESS OF DEVICES, filed on September 10, 2018, the description of each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference.

[004] The present application also claims priority under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 721,995, entitled CONTROLLING

AN ULTRASONIC SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO TISSUE LOCATION, filed on August 23, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 721,998, entitled SITUATIONAL AWARENESS OF ELECTROSURGICAL SYSTEMS, filed on August 23, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 721,999, entitled INTERRUPTION OF ENERGY DUE TO INADVERTENT CAPACITIVE COUPLING, filed on August 23, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 721,994, entitled BIPOLAR COMBINATION DEVICE THAT

AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTS PRESSURE BASED ON ENERGY MODALITY, filed on August 23, 2018, and US provisional patent application No. 62 / 721,996, entitled RADIO FREQUENCY

ENERGY DEVICE FOR DELIVERING COMBINED ELECTRICAL SIGNALS, filed on August 23, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[005] This application also claims priority under title 35 of the USC (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 692,747, entitled SMART ACTIVATION OF AN ENERGY DEVICE BY ANOTHER DEVICE, filed on June 30, 2018, US provisional patent application No. 62 / 692,748, entitled SMART ENERGY ARCHITECTURE, filed on June 30, 2018, and US provisional patent application No. 62 / 692,768, entitled SMART ENERGY DEVICES , filed on June 30, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[006] The present application also claims priority under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 691,228, entitled METHOD OF USING

REINFORCED FLEX CIRCUITS WITH MULTIPLE SENSORS WITH ELECTROSURGICAL DEVICES, filed on June 28, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 691,227, entitled

CONTROLLING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO SENSED CLOSURE PARAMETERS, filed on June 28, 2018, from US provisional patent application 62 / 691.230, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE ELECTRODE, filed on June 28, 2018, of the patent application US Provisional Application No. 62 / 691,219, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND MOTOR CONTROL, filed on June 28, 2018, from US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 691,257, entitled

COMMUNICATION OF SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM

PARAMETERS TO HUB OR CLOUD IN SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on June 28, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 691,262, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SYSTEM WITH A

COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A FILTER AND A SMOKE EVACUATION DEVICE, filed on June 28, 2018, and US provisional patent application No. 62 / 691,251, entitled DUAL IN-SERIES LARGE AND SMALL DROPLET FILTERS, filed on 28 June 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein as a reference in its entirety.

[007] The present application claims priority under title 35 of the USC (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 665,129, entitled SURGICAL SUTURING SYSTEMS, filed on May 1, 2018 , of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 665,139, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING CONTROL SYSTEMS, filed on May 1, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 665,177, entitled

SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING HANDLE ARRANGEMENTS, filed on May 1, 2018, of US provisional patent application 62 / 665,128, entitled MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, filed on May 1, 2018, of US provisional patent application 62 /665,192, entitled SURGICAL DISSECTORS, filed on May 1, 2018, and US provisional patent application No. 62 / 665,134, entitled SURGICAL CLIP APPLIER, filed on May 1, 2018, with a description of each of them hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[008] The present application also claims priority under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 659,900, entitled METHOD OF HUB

COMMUNICATION, filed on April 19, 2018, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[009] The present application also claims priority under title 35 of the USC (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 650,898, filed on March 30, 2018, entitled CAPACITIVE COUPLED RETURN PATH PAD WITH SEPARABLE ARRAY ELEMENTS, from US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 650,887, entitled SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH OPTIMIZED SENSING CAPABILITIES, filed on March 30, 2018, from US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 650,882, entitled

SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on March 30, 2018, and of provisional US patent application 62 / 650,877, entitled SURGICAL SMOKE EVACUATION SENSING AND CONTROLS, filed on March 30, 2018, with the description of each one of them incorporated here by way of reference in its entirety.

[0010] This application also claims priority benefit under title 35 of the U.S.C. (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 649,302, entitled

INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH ENCRYPTED COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES, filed on March 28, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 649,294, entitled

DATA STRIPPING METHOD TO INTERROGATE PATIENT RECORDS AND CREATE ANONYMIZED RECORD, filed on March 28, 2018, of US provisional patent application 62 / 649,300, entitled SURGICAL HUB SITUATIONAL AWARENESS, filed on March 28, 2018, of the patent application provisional US No. 62 / 649,309, entitled SURGICAL HUB SPATIAL

AWARENESS TO DETERMINE DEVICES IN OPERATING

THEATER, filed on March 28, 2018, from US provisional patent application No. 62 / 649,310, entitled COMPUTER IMPLEMENTED INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS, filed on March 28, 2018, from US provisional patent application 62 / 649,291, entitled USE OF LASER LIGHT AND RED-GREEN-

BLUE COLORATION TO DETERMINE PROPERTIES OF BACK SCATTERED LIGHT, filed on March 28, 2018, of US provisional patent application 62 / 649,296, entitled ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL DEVICES, filed on March 28, 2018, of the application for US Provisional Patent No. 62 / 649,333, entitled CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR CUSTOMIZATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS TO A USER, filed on March 28, 2018, from US Provisional Patent Application 62 / 649,327, entitled CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS

FOR SECURITY AND AUTHENTICATION TRENDS AND REACTIVE MEASURES, filed on March 28, 2018, of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 649,315, entitled DATA HANDLING AND PRIORITIZATION IN A CLOUD ANALYTICS NETWORK, filed on March 28, 2018, of the application US Provisional Patent No. 62 / 649,313, entitled CLOUD INTERFACE FOR COUPLED SURGICAL DEVICES, filed on March 28, 2018, from US Provisional Patent Application 62 / 649,320, entitled DRIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS, filed at March 28, 2018, US provisional patent application No. 62 / 649,307, entitled AUTOMATIC TOOL ADJUSTMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS, filed on March 28, 2018, and US provisional patent application 62 / 649,323, entitled SENSING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS, filed on March 28, 2018, the description of each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0011] The present application claims priority under title 35 of the USC (United States Code) § 119 (e) of US provisional patent application No. 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28 2017, US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 611,340, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS", filed on December 28, 2017, and US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 611,339, entitled "ROBOT ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORM ", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

[0012] The present description refers to methods for surgical systems and their evacuators. Surgical smoke evacuators are configured to evacuate smoke, as well as fluids and / or particulates, from a surgical site. For example, during a surgical procedure involving an energy device, smoke can be generated at the surgical site.

SUMMARY

[0013] In one aspect, the present description provides a method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site. The method comprises communicatively connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises a housing of the central surgical controller, and in which the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the casing of the central surgical controller; removing particulate from the surgical site and transferring it to the particulate evacuation module; analyze the removed particulate; and modifying a particulate evacuation module operation based on the analysis of the removed particulate.

[0014] In another aspect, the present description provides a method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site, the method comprising: connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises an enclosure the central surgical controller, and where the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the central surgical controller enclosure; activate a surgical instrument within the surgical site; drain a particulate from the surgical site and transfer it to the particulate evacuation module; analyze the particulate; and modify an operational parameter of the particulate evacuation module based on the analysis of the particulate.

[0015] In another aspect, the present description provides a method for evacuating smoke from a surgical site, the method comprising: connecting a smoke evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises an enclosure the central surgical controller, and in which the smoke evacuation module is configured to be received within the central surgical controller enclosure; insert a component of the smoke evacuation module into the surgical site; removing smoke from the surgical site; analyze the smoke removed; and modifying a smoke evacuation module operation based on the analysis of the removed smoke.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0016] The features of various aspects are presented with particularity in the attached claims. The various aspects, however, with regard to both the organization and the methods of operation, together with additional objects and advantages of the same, can be better understood in reference to the description presented below, considered together with the attached drawings, as follows.

[0017] Figure 1 is a perspective view of an evacuator cabinet for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0018] Figure 2 is a perspective view of an electrosurgical surgical evacuation tool, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0019] Figure 3 is an elevation view of a surgical evacuation tool releasably attached to an electrosurgical pen, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0020] Figure 4 is a schematic diagram showing the internal components in an evacuator cabinet for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0021] Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of an electrosurgical system that includes a smoke evacuator, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0022] Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0023] Figure 7 is a perspective view of a surgical system that includes a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0024] Figure 8 is a perspective view of an evacuator cabinet of the surgical evacuation system of Figure 7, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0025] Figure 9 is a cross-sectional elevation view of a socket in the evacuation cabinet of Figure 8, along the plane indicated in Figure 8, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0026] Figure 10 is a perspective view of a filter for an evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0027] Figure 11 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the filter of Figure 10, taken along a central longitudinal plane of the filter, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0028] Figure 12 illustrates a pump for a surgical evacuation system, like the surgical evacuation system of Figure 7, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0029] Figure 13 is a perspective view of a portion of a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0030] Figure 14 is a front perspective view of a fluid collector of the surgical evacuation system of Figure 13, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0031] Figure 15 is a rear perspective view of the fluid collector of Figure 14, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0032] Figure 16 is a cross-sectional elevation view of the fluid collector of Figure 14, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0033] Figure 17 is a cross-sectional elevation view of the fluid collector of Figure 14 with portions removed for clarity that illustrates liquid captured inside the fluid collector and smoke flowing through the fluid collector, according to at least an aspect of the present description.

[0034] Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of an evacuation cabinet for an evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0035] Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of an evacuation cabinet from another evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0036] Figure 20 illustrates a smoke evacuation system in communication with several other modules and devices, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0037] Figure 21 shows a flow diagram exemplifying the interconnectivity between the central surgical controller, the cloud, the smoke evacuation module and / or several other modules A, B and C, in accordance with at least one aspect of this description.

[0038] Figure 22 illustrates a smoke evacuation system in communication with several other modules and devices, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0039] Figure 23 illustrates an aspect of a segmented control circuit, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0040] Figure 24 shows a method for operating a portion of the smoke evacuation module control circuit in order to energize the segmented control circuit in stages, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0041] Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of a smoke evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0042] Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of a filter communication circuit of the smoke evacuation system of Figure 25, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0043] Figure 27 is a schematic diagram of a filtration device for the smoke evacuation system of Figure 25, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0044] Figure 28 is a schematic diagram of an evacuation system cabinet, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0045] Figure 29 illustrates an electrosurgical system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0046] Figure 30 illustrates a return block of the electrosurgical system of Figure 29, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0047] Figure 31 illustrates a plurality of electrodes of the return block of Figure 30, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0048] Figure 32 illustrates an array of detection devices for the return block of Figure 30, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0049] Figure 33 illustrates a method for simultaneously applying a nerve stimulation signal and electrosurgical energy to a patient, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0050] Figure 34 is a block diagram of an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0051] Figure 35 is a surgical system being used to perform a surgical procedure in an operating room, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0052] Figure 36 is a central surgical controller paired with a visualization system, a robotic system and an intelligent instrument, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0053] Figure 37 is a partial perspective view of a central surgical controller housing and a combined generator module slidably received in a central surgical controller housing drawer, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0054] Figure 38 is a perspective view of a generator module combined with bipolar, ultrasonic and monopolar contacts and a smoke evacuation component, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0055] Figure 39 illustrates different power bus connectors for a plurality of side coupling ports of a side modular cabinet configured to receive a plurality of modules, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0056] Figure 40 illustrates a vertical modular cabinet configured to receive a plurality of modules, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0057] Figure 41 illustrates a surgical data network comprising a central modular communication controller configured to connect modular devices located in one or more operating rooms of a healthcare facility, or any environment in a utility facility. specially equipped for surgical operations, to the cloud, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0058] Figure 42 illustrates an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0059] Figure 43 illustrates a central surgical controller that comprises a plurality of modules coupled to the modular control tower, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0060] Figure 44 illustrates an aspect of a universal serial bus (USB) network central controller device, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0061] Figure 45 illustrates a logical diagram of a control system for an instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0062] Figure 46 illustrates a control circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0063] Figure 47 illustrates a combinational logic circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0064] Figure 48 illustrates a sequential logic circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0065] Figure 49 illustrates an instrument or surgical tool that comprises a plurality of motors that can be activated to perform various functions, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0066] Figure 50 is a schematic diagram of a robotic surgical instrument configured to operate a surgical tool described therein, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0067] Figure 51 illustrates a block diagram of a surgical instrument programmed to control the distal translation of the displacement member, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0068] Figure 52 is a schematic diagram of a surgical instrument configured to control various functions, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0069] Figure 53 is a simplified block diagram of a generator configured to provide adjustment without inductor, among other benefits, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0070] Figure 54 illustrates an example of a generator, which is a form of the generator of Figure 53, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0071] Figure 55 is a timeline representing the situational recognition of a central surgical controller, in accordance with an aspect of the present description.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[0072] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on December 4, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by way of reference in its entirety: • Attorney document number 3 entitled METHOD OF HUB COMMUNICATION, PROCESSING, DISPLAY, AND CLOUD ANALYTICS; • Attorney document number END8538USNP / 170751M, entitled METHOD OF COMPRESSING

TISSUE WITHIN A STAPLING DEVICE AND SIMULTANEOUSLY DISPLAYING THE LOCATION OF THE TISSUE WITHIN THE JAWS; • Attorney document number END8539USNP / 170752M, entitled METHOD OF USING REINFORCED FLEXIBLE CIRCUITS

WITH MULTIPLE SENSORS TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE OF RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES; • Attorney document number END8540USNP / 170753M, entitled METHOD OF SENSING PARTICULATE FROM SMOKE EVACUATED FROM A PATIENT,

ADJUSTING THE PUMP SPEED BASED ON THE SENSED INFORMATION, AND COMMUNICATING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM TO THE HUB; • Attorney document number END8558USNP1 / 180138-1M, entitled METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SMART ENERGY DEVICES; • Attorney document number END8559USNP1 / 180141- 1M, entitled METHOD FOR SMART ENERGY DEVICE INFRASTRUCTURE; • Attorney document number END9011USNP1 / 180510-1M, entitled METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES FOR SURGICAL NETWORK CONTROL AND INTERACTION; • Attorney document number END9015USNP1 / 180514- 1M, entitled METHOD FOR SITUATIONAL AWARENESS FOR

SURGICAL NETWORK OR SURGICAL NETWORK CONNECTED

DEVICE CAPABLE OF ADJUSTING FUNCTION BASED ON A SENSED SITUATION OR USAGE; • Attorney document number END9017USNP1 / 180516-1M, entitled METHOD FOR FACILITY DATA COLLECTION AND INTERPRETATION; and • Attorney document number END9033USNP1 / 180520-1M, entitled METHOD FOR CIRCULAR STAPLER CONTROL ALGORITHM ADJUSTMENT BASED ON SITUATIONAL AWARENESS.

[0073] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on November 6, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference in its entirety: • US patent application No. 16 / 182,224, entitled SURGICAL NETWORK, INSTRUMENT, AND CLOUD RESPONSES

BASED ON VALIDATION OF RECEIVED DATASET AND

AUTHENTICATION OF ITS SOURCE AND INTEGRITY; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,230, entitled SURGICAL

SYSTEM FOR PRESENTING INFORMATION INTERPRETED FROM EXTERNAL DATA; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,233, entitled SURGICAL

SYSTEMS WITH AUTONOMOUSLY ADJUSTABLE CONTROL PROGRAMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,239, entitled

ADJUSTMENT OF DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAMS BASED ON STRATIFIED CONTEXTUAL DATA IN ADDITION TO THE DATA; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,243, entitled

SURGICAL HUB AND MODULAR DEVICE RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT BASED ON SITUATIONAL AWARENESS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,248, entitled

DETECTION AND ESCALATION OF SECURITY RESPONSES OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS TO INCREASING SEVERITY THREATS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,251, entitled INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,260, entitled AUTOMATED DATA SCALING, ALIGNMENT, AND ORGANIZING

BASED ON PREDEFINED PARAMETERS WITHIN SURGICAL NETWORKS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,267, entitled SENSING

THE PATIENT POSITION AND CONTACT UTILIZING THE MONO

POLAR RETURN PAD ELECTRODE TO PROVIDE SITUATIONAL AWARENESS TO THE HUB; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,249, entitled

POWERED SURGICAL TOOL WITH PREDEFINED ADJUSTABLE CONTROL ALGORITHM FOR CONTROLLING END EFFECTOR PARAMETER;

• US patent application No. 16 / 182,246, entitled ADJUSTMENTS BASED ON AIRBORNE PARTICLE PROPERTIES; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,256, entitled

ADJUSTMENT OF A SURGICAL DEVICE FUNCTION BASED ON SITUATIONAL AWARENESS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,242, entitled REAL-

TIME ANALYSIS OF COMPREHENSIVE COST OF ALL INSTRUMENTATION USED IN SURGERY UTILIZING DATA

FLUIDITY TO TRACK INSTRUMENTS THROUGH STOCKING AND IN-HOUSE PROCESSES; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,255, entitled USAGE AND TECHNIQUE ANALYSIS OF SURGEON / STAFF

PERFORMANCE AGAINST A BASELINE TO OPTIMIZE DEVICE

UTILIZATION AND PERFORMANCE FOR BOTH CURRENT AND FUTURE PROCEDURES; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,269, entitled IMAGE

CAPTURING OF THE AREAS OUTSIDE THE ABDOMEN TO

IMPROVE PLACEMENT AND CONTROL OF A SURGICAL DEVICE IN USE; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,278, entitled

COMMUNICATION OF DATA WHERE A SURGICAL NETWORK IS

USING CONTEXT OF THE DATA AND REQUIREMENTS OF A RECEIVING SYSTEM / USER TO INFLUENCE INCLUSION OR LINKAGE OF DATA AND METADATA TO ESTABLISH CONTINUITY; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,290, entitled SURGICAL

NETWORK RECOMMENDATIONS FROM REAL TIME ANALYSIS OF

PROCEDURE VARIABLES AGAINST A BASELINE HIGHLIGHTING DIFFERENCES FROM THE OPTIMAL SOLUTION; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,232, entitled CONTROL OF A SURGICAL SYSTEM THROUGH A SURGICAL BARRIER;

• US patent application No. 16 / 182,227, entitled SURGICAL

NETWORK DETERMINATION OF PRIORITIZATION OF COMMUNICATION, INTERACTION, OR PROCESSING BASED ON SYSTEM OR DEVICE NEEDS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,231, entitled

WIRELESS PAIRING OF A SURGICAL DEVICE WITH ANOTHER

DEVICE WITHIN A STERILE SURGICAL FIELD BASED ON THE USAGE AND SITUATIONAL AWARENESS OF DEVICES; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,229, entitled

ADJUSTMENT OF STAPLE HEIGHT OF AT LEAST ONE ROW OF

STAPLES BASED ON THE SENSED TISSUE THICKNESS OR FORCE IN CLOSING; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,234, entitled

STAPLING DEVICE WITH BOTH COMPULSORY AND

DISCRETIONARY LOCKOUTS BASED ON SENSED PARAMETERS; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,240, entitled POWERED STAPLING DEVICE CONFIGURED TO ADJUST FORCE, ADVANCEMENT SPEED, AND OVERALL STROKE OF CUTTING

MEMBER BASED ON SENSED PARAMETER OF FIRING OR CLAMPING; • US patent application No. 16 / 182,235, entitled VARIATION

OF RADIO FREQUENCY AND ULTRASONIC POWER LEVEL IN COOPERATION WITH VARYING CLAMP ARM PRESSURE TO

ACHIEVE PREDEFINED HEAT FLUX OR POWER APPLIED TO TISSUE; and • US patent application No. 16 / 182,238, entitled

ULTRASONIC ENERGY DEVICE WHICH VARIES PRESSURE APPLIED BY CLAMP ARM TO PROVIDE THRESHOLD CONTROL PRESSURE AT A CUT PROGRESSION LOCATION.

[0074] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications that were filed on October 26, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: • US patent application No. 16 /172,303, entitled METHOD FOR OPERATING A POWERED ARTICULATING MULTI-CLIP APPLIER; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,130, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING INTERCHANGEABLE CLIP RELOADS; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,066, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING A MOVABLE CLIP MAGAZINE; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,078, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING A ROTATABLE CLIP MAGAZINE; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,087, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING CLIP ADVANCING SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,094, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING A CLIP CRIMPING SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,128, entitled CLIP

APPLIER COMPRISING A RECIPROCATING CLIP ADVANCING MEMBER; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,168, entitled CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING A MOTOR CONTROLLER; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,164 entitled SURGICAL SYSTEM COMPRISING A SURGICAL TOOL AND A SURGICAL HUB; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,328, entitled METHOD

OF HUB COMMUNICATION WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,280, entitled METHOD

FOR PRODUCING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SMART ELECTRICAL SYSTEM;

• US patent application No. 16 / 172,219, entitled METHOD

OF HUB COMMUNICATION WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,248, entitled METHOD

OF HUB COMMUNICATION WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 172,198, entitled METHOD

OF HUB COMMUNICATION WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS; and • US patent application No. 16 / 172,155, entitled METHOD

OF HUB COMMUNICATION WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS.

[0075] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on August 28, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: • US patent application No. 16 / 115,214, entitled

ESTIMATING STATE OF ULTRASONIC END EFFECTOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR; • U patent application, No. 16 / 115,205, entitled

TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF ULTRASONIC END EFFECTOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,233, entitled RADIO

FREQUENCY ENERGY DEVICE FOR DELIVERING COMBINED ELECTRICAL SIGNALS; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,208, entitled

CONTROLLING AN ULTRASONIC SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO TISSUE LOCATION; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,220, entitled

CONTROLLING ACTIVATION OF AN ULTRASONIC SURGICAL

INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO THE PRESENCE OF TISSUE; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,232, entitled

DETERMINING TISSUE COMPOSITION VIA AN ULTRASONIC SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,239, entitled

DETERMINING THE STATE OF AN ULTRASONIC

ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEM ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY SHIFT; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,247, entitled DETERMINING THE STATE OF AN ULTRASONIC END EFFECTOR; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,211, entitled SITUATIONAL AWARENESS OF ELECTROSURGICAL SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,226, entitled

MECHANISMS FOR CONTROLLING DIFFERENT

ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS OF AN ELECTROSURGICAL INSTRUMENT; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,240, entitled DETECTION OF END EFFECTOR EMERSION IN LIQUID; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,249, entitled

INTERRUPTION OF ENERGY DUE TO INADVERTENT CAPACITIVE COUPLING; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,256, entitled INCREASING RADIO FREQUENCY TO CREATE PAD-LESS MONOPOLAR LOOP; • US patent application No. 16 / 115,223, entitled BIPOLAR

COMBINATION DEVICE THAT AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTS PRESSURE BASED ON ENERGY MODALITY; and • US patent application No. 16 / 115,238, entitled ACTIVATION OF ENERGY DEVICES.

[0076] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on August 24, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by way of reference in its entirety: • US patent application No. 16 /112.129, entitled SURGICAL

SUTURING INSTRUMENT CONFIGURED TO MANIPULATE TISSUE USING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL POWER; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,155, entitled SURGICAL

SUTURING INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CAPTURE WIDTH WHICH IS LARGER THAN TROCAR DIAMETER; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,168, entitled SURGICAL SUTURING INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A NON-CIRCULAR NEEDLE; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,180, entitled

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTPUT CONTROL BASED ON MECHANICAL FORCES; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,193, entitled REACTIVE ALGORITHM FOR SURGICAL SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,099, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING at ADAPTIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,112, entitled CONTROL

SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR A MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,119, entitled

ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAMS FOR A SURGICAL SYSTEM COMPRISING MORE THAN ONE TYPE OF CARTRIDGE; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,097, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING BATTERY ARRANGEMENT; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,109, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING HANDLE ARRANGEMENTS; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,114, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING FEEDBACK MECHANISMS;

• US patent application No. 16 / 112,117, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING LOCKOUT MECHANISMS; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,095, entitled SURGICAL

INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING A LOCKABLE END EFFECTOR SOCKET; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,121, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING A SHIFTING MECHANISM; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,151, entitled SURGICAL

INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING A SYSTEM FOR ARTICULATION AND ROTATION COMPENSATION; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,154, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING A BIASED SHIFTING MECHANISM; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,226, entitled SURGICAL

INSTRUMENTS COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION DRIVE THAT PROVIDES FOR HIGH ARTICULATION ANGLES; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,062, entitled SURGICAL DISSECTORS AND MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,098, entitled SURGICAL

DISSECTORS CONFIGURED TO APPLY MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENERGY; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,237, entitled SURGICAL

CLIP APPLIER CONFIGURED TO STORE CLIPS IN A STORED STATE; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,245, entitled SURGICAL

CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING AN EMPTY CLIP CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,249, entitled SURGICAL

CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING AN AUTOMATIC CLIP FEEDING SYSTEM; • US patent application No. 16 / 112,253, entitled SURGICAL

CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING ADAPTIVE FIRING CONTROL; and • US patent application No. 16 / 112,257, entitled SURGICAL

CLIP APPLIER COMPRISING ADAPTIVE CONTROL IN RESPONSE TO A STRAIN GAUGE CIRCUIT.

[0077] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on June 29, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: • US patent application No. 16 /024.090, entitled CAPACITIVE

COUPLED RETURN PATH PAD WITH SEPARABLE ARRAY ELEMENTS; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,057, entitled

CONTROLLING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO SENSED CLOSURE PARAMETERS; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,067, entitled SYSTEMS

FOR ADJUSTING END EFFECTOR PARAMETERS BASED ON PERIOPERATIVE INFORMATION; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,075, entitled SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR SMART POWERED SURGICAL STAPLING; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,083, entitled SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR SMART POWERED SURGICAL STAPLING; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,094, entitled SURGICAL

SYSTEMS FOR DETECTING END EFFECTOR TISSUE DISTRIBUTION IRREGULARITIES; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,138, entitled SYSTEMS

FOR DETECTING PROXIMITY OF SURGICAL END EFFECTOR TO CANCEROUS TISSUE; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,150, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CARTRIDGE SENSOR ASSEMBLIES; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,160, entitled VARIABLE

OUTPUT CARTRIDGE SENSOR ASSEMBLY; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,124, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE ELECTRODE; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,132, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE CIRCUIT; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,141, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH A TISSUE MARKING ASSEMBLY; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,162, entitled SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH PRIORITIZED DATA TRANSMISSION CAPABILITIES; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,066, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND MOTOR CONTROL; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,096, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSOR ARRANGEMENTS; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,116, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION FLOW PATHS; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,149, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND GENERATOR CONTROL; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,180, entitled SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND DISPLAY; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,245, entitled

COMMUNICATION OF SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM

PARAMETERS TO HUB OR CLOUD IN SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,258, entitled SMOKE

EVACUATION SYSTEM INCLUDING A SEGMENTED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM; • US patent application No. 16 / 024,265, entitled

SURGICAL EVACUATION SYSTEM WITH A COMMUNICATION

CIRCUIT FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A FILTER AND A SMOKE EVACUATION DEVICE; and

• US patent application No. 16 / 024,273, entitled DUAL IN- SERIES LARGE AND SMALL DROPLET FILTERS.

[0078] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on March 29, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by way of reference in its entirety: • US patent application No. 15 /940,641, entitled

INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH ENCRYPTED COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,648, entitled

INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH CONDITION HANDLING OF DEVICES AND DATA CAPABILITIES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,656, entitled SURGICAL

HUB COORDINATION OF CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION OF OPERATING ROOM DEVICES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,666, entitled SPATIAL AWARENESS OF SURGICAL HUBS IN OPERATING ROOMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,670, entitled

COOPERATIVE UTILIZATION OF DATA DERIVED FROM SECONDARY SOURCES BY INTELLIGENT SURGICAL HUBS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,677, entitled SURGICAL HUB CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,632, entitled DATA

STRIPPING METHOD TO INTERROGATE PATIENT RECORDS AND CREATE ANONYMIZED RECORD; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,640, entitled

COMMUNICATION HUB AND STORAGE DEVICE FOR STORING

PARAMETERS AND STATUS OF A SURGICAL DEVICE TO BE SHARED WITH CLOUD BASED ANALYTICS SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,645, entitled SELF

DESCRIBING DATA PACKETS GENERATED AT AN ISSUING INSTRUMENT; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,649, entitled DATA

PAIRING TO INTERCONNECT A DEVICE MEASURED PARAMETER WITH AN OUTCOME; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,654, entitled SURGICAL HUB SITUATIONAL AWARENESS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,663, entitled SURGICAL SYSTEM DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,668, entitled AGGREGATION AND REPORTING OF SURGICAL HUB DATA; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,671, entitled SURGICAL

HUB SPATIAL AWARENESS TO DETERMINE DEVICES IN OPERATING THEATER; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,686, entitled DISPLAY OF

ALIGNMENT OF STAPLE CARTRIDGE TO PRIOR LINEAR STAPLE LINE; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,700, entitled STERILE FIELD INTERACTIVE CONTROL DISPLAYS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,629, entitled COMPUTER IMPLEMENTED INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,704, entitled USE OF LASER LIGHT AND RED-GREEN-BLUE COLORATION TO DETERMINE PROPERTIES OF BACK SCATTERED LIGHT; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,722, entitled

CHARACTERIZATION OF TISSUE IRREGULARITIES THROUGH THE USE OF MONO-CHROMATIC LIGHT REFRACTIVITY; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,742, entitled DUAL CMOS ARRAY IMAGING; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,636, entitled

ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL DEVICES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,653, entitled

ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL HUBS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,660, entitled CLOUD-

BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR CUSTOMIZATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS TO A USER; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,679, entitled CLOUD-

BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR LINKING OF LOCAL USAGE

TRENDS WITH THE RESOURCE ACQUISITION BEHAVIORS OF LARGER DATA SET; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,694, entitled CLOUD-

BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR MEDICAL FACILITY SEGMENTED INDIVIDUALIZATION OF INSTRUMENT FUNCTION; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,634, entitled CLOUD-

BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR SECURITY AND AUTHENTICATION TRENDS AND REACTIVE MEASURES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,706, entitled DATA

HANDLING AND PRIORITIZATION IN A CLOUD ANALYTICS NETWORK; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,675, entitled CLOUD INTERFACE FOR COUPLED SURGICAL DEVICES; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,627, entitled DRIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,637, entitled COMMUNICATION ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,642, entitled CONTROLS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS;

• US patent application No. 15 / 940,676, entitled AUTOMATIC TOOL ADJUSTMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,680, entitled CONTROLLERS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,683, entitled COOPERATIVE SURGICAL ACTIONS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; • US patent application No. 15 / 940,690, entitled DISPLAY ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS; and • US patent application No. 15 / 940,711, entitled SENSING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS.

[0079] The applicant for the present application holds the following provisional US patent applications, filed on March 8, 2018, the description of each of which is incorporated herein by way of reference in its entirety: • provisional US patent application n ° 62 / 640,417, entitled

TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN ULTRASONIC DEVICE AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR; and • US provisional patent application No. 62 / 640,415, entitled

ESTIMATING STATE OF ULTRASONIC END EFFECTOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR.

[0080] Before explaining in detail the various aspects of surgical instruments and generators, it should be noted that the illustrative examples are not limited, in terms of application or use, to the details of construction and arrangement of parts illustrated in the drawings and description attached. Illustrative examples can be implemented or incorporated into other aspects, variations and modifications, and can be practiced or performed in a variety of ways. Furthermore, except where otherwise indicated, the terms and expressions used in the present invention were chosen for the purpose of describing illustrative examples for the convenience of the reader and not for the purpose of limiting it. In addition, it should be understood that one or more of the aspects, expressions of aspects, and / or examples described below can be combined with any one or more of the other aspects, expressions of aspects and / or examples described below. Smoke evacuation and energy devices

[0081] The present description refers to energy devices and intelligent surgical evacuation systems for evacuating smoke and / or other fluids and / or particulates from a surgical site. During a surgical procedure that uses one or more energy devices, smoke is often generated. Energy devices use energy to affect tissue. In a power device, power is supplied by a generator. Energy devices include devices with electrodes for contact with tissue, such as an electrosurgical device equipped with electrodes that operate on one or more radio frequencies (RF), and devices with vibrating surfaces, such as an ultrasonic device provided with an ultrasonic blade. For an electrosurgical device, a generator is configured to generate oscillating electrical currents to energize the electrodes. For an ultrasonic device, a generator is configured to generate ultrasonic vibrations to energize the ultrasonic sheet. The present description describes generators in more detail.

[0082] Ultrasonic energy can be used for coagulation and tissue cutting. Ultrasonic energy coagulates and cuts the tissue by vibrating an energy application surface (for example, an ultrasonic sheet) in contact with the tissue. The ultrasonic blade can be coupled to a waveguide that transmits vibrational energy from an ultrasonic transducer, which generates mechanical vibrations and is powered by a generator. Vibrating at high frequencies (for example, 55,500 times per second), the ultrasonic blade generates heat and friction between the blade and the tissue, that is, at the blade-tissue interface, and this denatures the proteins in the tissue to form a sticky clot. The pressure exerted on the tissue by the surface of the slide flattens blood vessels and allows the clot to form a hemostatic seal. The precision of cutting and coagulation can be controlled by the doctor's technique and by adjusting the energy level, blade edge, tissue traction and blade pressure, for example.

[0083] Ultrasonic surgical instruments are finding increasingly widespread applications in surgical procedures due to the unique performance characteristics of these instruments. Depending on specific instrument configurations and specific operating parameters, ultrasonic surgical instruments can substantially provide both coagulation cut and hemostasis, which can, desirably, minimize trauma to the patient. The cutting action is typically performed by an end actuator, or blade tip, at the distal end of the ultrasonic instrument. The ultrasonic end actuator transmits ultrasonic energy to the tissue placed in contact with the end actuator. Ultrasonic instruments of this nature can be configured for open surgical use, laparoscopic or endoscopic surgical procedures, including, for example, robotically assisted procedures.

[0084] Electric energy can also be used for coagulation and / or cutting. An electrosurgical device typically includes a handle and an instrument that has a distally mounted end actuator (for example, one or more electrodes). The end actuator can be positioned against and / or adjacent to the tissue, so that electric current is introduced into the tissue. Electrosurgery is widely used and offers many advantages including the use of a single surgical instrument for both coagulation and cutting.

[0085] The electrode or tip of the electrosurgical device is small at the point of contact with the patient to produce an RF current with a high current density to produce a surgical coagulation and / or tissue cutting effect by cauterization. The return electrode carries the same RF signal back to the electrosurgical generator after the signal passes through the patient, thus providing a return path for the RF signal.

[0086] Electrosurgical devices can be configured for bipolar or monopolar operation. During bipolar operation, the current is introduced into the tissue and returned from it through the active and return electrodes, respectively, of the end actuator. During monopolar operation, a current is introduced into the tissue by an active electrode of the end actuator and returned via a return electrode (for example, a grounding plate) separately located on or against the patient's body. The heat generated by the current flowing through the tissue can form hemostatic seals within the tissue and / or between tissues and, therefore, can be particularly useful for sealing blood vessels, for example. The end actuator of an electrosurgical device sometimes also comprises a cutting member that is movable in relation to the tissue and the electrodes, to transpose the tissue.

[0087] In application, an electrosurgical device can transmit RF current at low frequency through the tissue, which causes friction, or ionic agitation (ie, resistive heating), which, therefore, increases the tissue temperature. Due to the fact that a boundary is created between the affected tissue and the surrounding tissue, doctors can operate with a high level of precision and control, without sacrificing adjacent, unguided tissue. The low operating temperature of the RF energy is useful for removing, shrinking or sculpting soft tissues while simultaneously cauterizing blood vessels. RF energy can work particularly well in connective tissue, which mainly comprises collagen and shrinks when it comes in contact with heat. Other electrosurgical instruments include, without limitation, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation, and / or microwave technologies, among others. The techniques described here are applicable to ultrasonic, bipolar or monopolar (electrosurgical) RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation and / or microwave-based surgical instruments, among others.

[0088] The electrical energy applied by an electrosurgical device can be transmitted to the instrument from a generator. The generator is configured to convert electricity into high-frequency waveforms produced from oscillating electrical currents, which are transmitted to the electrodes to affect tissue. The current passes through the tissue to glow (a form of coagulation in which an arc of current over the tissue creates scorching of the tissue), to dry (a direct application of energy that draws water from the cells), and / or to cut (an application direct energy that vaporizes the cellular fluid causing cellular explosions) the tissue. The response of the fabric to the current is a function of the resistance of the fabric, the density of the current passing through the fabric, the output power and the time of application of the current. In certain cases, as described hereinafter, the current waveform can be adjusted to perform a different surgical function and / or accommodate tissue with different properties. For example, different types of tissue, such as vascular tissue, nerve tissue, muscles, skin, fat and / or bone tissue may respond differently to the same waveform.

[0089] Electric energy can be in the form of RF energy, which can be in a frequency range described in the document EN 60601-2-2: 2009 + A11: 2011, Definition 201.3.218 - "HIGH FREQUENCY" . For example, frequencies in monopolar RF applications are typically restricted to less than 5 MHz to minimize problems associated with high frequency scattering current. Frequencies above 200 kHz can typically be used for monopolar applications to avoid unwanted nerve and muscle stimulation, which would result from using a low frequency current.

[0090] In bipolar RF applications, the frequency can be almost any. Lower frequencies can be used for bipolar techniques in certain situations, as in the case of a risk analysis showing that the possibility of neuromuscular stimulus has been mitigated to an acceptable level. It is generally accepted that 10 mA is the lower threshold for thermal effects on tissue. Higher frequencies can also be used in the case of bipolar techniques.

[0091] In certain cases, a generator can be configured to digitally generate an output waveform and supply it to a surgical device, so that the surgical device can use the waveform for various effects on tissues. The generator can be a monopolar generator, a bipolar generator and / or an ultrasonic generator. For example, a single generator can supply power to a monopolar device, a bipolar device, an ultrasonic device, or an electrosurgical device / ultrasonic device combination. The generator can promote tissue-specific effects through waveforming, and / or it can direct RF energy and ultrasonic energy simultaneously and / or sequentially to a single surgical instrument or to multiple surgical instruments.

[0092] In one case, a surgical system may include a generator and several surgical instruments that can be used with it, including an ultrasonic surgical instrument, an RF electrosurgical instrument, and a combination of an ultrasonic instrument / RF electrosurgical instrument. The generator can be configurable for use with various surgical instruments, as further described in US patent application No. 15 / 265,279, entitled "TECHNIQUES FOR OPERATING GENERATOR FOR

DIGITALLY GENERATING ELECTRICAL SIGNAL WAVEFORMS AND SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS ", filed on September 14, 2016, now publication of US patent application No. 2017/0086914, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0093] As described here, medical procedures for cutting tissue and / or cauterizing blood vessels are often performed with the use of RF electrical energy, which is produced by a generator and applied to the patient's tissue through an electrode that is operated by a doctor. The electrode releases an electrical discharge into the cellular matter of the patient's body adjacent to the electrode. The discharge causes the cellular matter to heat up in order to cut the tissue and / or cauterize the blood vessels.

[0094] The high temperatures involved in electrosurgery can cause thermal necrosis of the tissue adjacent to the electrode. The longer the tissue is kept exposed to the high temperatures involved in electrosurgery, the more likely the tissue is to suffer from thermal necrosis. In certain cases, thermal tissue necrosis can decrease the tissue cutting speed and increase postoperative complications, the production of bedsores and the healing time, as well as increasing the incidences of thermal damage to the tissue far from the cutting site. .

[0095] The concentration of the RF energy discharge affects both the efficiency with which the electrode is able to cut the tissue and the likelihood of damage to the tissue far from the cutting site. With a standard electrode geometry, RF energy tends to be distributed evenly over a relatively large area adjacent to the intended incision site. A generally uniform distribution of the RF energy discharge increases the likelihood of unwanted charge loss to the surrounding tissue, which can increase the likelihood of unwanted damage to the surrounding tissue.

[0096] Typical electrosurgical generators generate various operating frequencies of RF electrical energy and output power levels. The specific operating frequency and output power of a generator varies depending on the particular electrosurgical generator used and the physician's needs during the electrosurgical procedure. Specific operating frequency and output power levels can be manually adjusted on the generator itself by a doctor or other members of the operating room staff. The proper adjustment of these various parameters requires great knowledge, skill and attention from the doctor or other team members. After the physician makes the desired adjustments to the various configurations in the generator, the generator can maintain the output parameters during electrosurgery. In general, wave generators used for electrosurgery are adapted to produce RF waves with an output power in the range of 1 to 300 W in a cut mode, and 1 to 120 W in coagulation mode, and a frequency in 300 to 600 kHz range. Typical wave generators are adapted to maintain the selected settings during electrosurgery. For example, if the doctor needed to adjust the generator's output power level to 50 W and then touch the patient with the electrode to perform electrosurgery, the generator's power level would increase rapidly and be maintained at 50 W. from the power level to a specific value, such as 50 W, allows the doctor to cut through the patient's tissue, by maintaining such a high power level, the probability of thermal necrosis of the patient's tissue increases.

[0097] In some embodiments, a generator is configured to provide enough energy to effectively perform electrosurgery that makes use of an electrode that increases the concentration of the RF energy discharge, while at the same time limiting unwanted damage to the tissue, reduces postoperative complications and facilitates faster healing. For example, the waveform of the generator can be optimized by a control circuit throughout the surgical procedure. However, the claimed subject of the present invention is not limited to aspects that solve any disadvantages or that operate only in environments such as those described above. Instead, such background is provided only to illustrate an example of an area of technology where some aspects described here can be practiced.

[0098] As disclosed herein, energy devices provide mechanical and / or electrical energy to the target tissue to treat the tissue (for example, cutting the tissue, cauterizing blood vessels and / or coagulating the tissue within and / or close to the tissue -target). Cutting, cauterization and / or coagulation of the tissue can result in the release of fluids and / or particles in the environment. Such fluids and / or particulates emitted during a surgical procedure may constitute smoke, for example, which may comprise carbon particles and / or other particles suspended in the air. In other words, a fluid can comprise smoke and / or other fluidic matter. Approximately 90% of open endoscopic and surgical procedures produce some level of smoke. The smoke can be unpleasant to the olfactory senses of the doctor (s), assistant (s) and / or patient (s), can obstruct the doctor (s) 's view of the surgical site and, in some cases , can be harmful to health. For example, smoke produced during an electrosurgical procedure may contain toxic chemicals such as acrolein, acetonitrile, acrylonitrile, acetylene, alkylbenzenes, benzene, butadiene, butene, carbon monoxide, cresols, ethane, ethylene, formaldehyde, free radicals, hydrogen cyanide , isobutene, methane, phenol, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, propene, propylene, pyridine, pyrrole, styrene, toluene and xylene, as well as dead and living cellular materials (including blood fragments) and viruses. Some materials that have been identified in surgical smoke have been identified as known carcinogens. It is estimated that one gram of tissue cauterized during an electrosurgical procedure may be equivalent to the toxins and carcinogens present in six unfiltered cigarettes. Additionally, exposure to smoke released during an electrosurgical procedure is identified as causing irritation in the eyes and lungs of healthcare professionals.

[0099] In addition to the toxicity and unpleasant odors associated with the material present in surgical smoke, the size of the particles in surgical smoke can be harmful to the respiratory system of doctor (s), assistant (s) and / or patient (s). In certain cases, the particulates can be extremely small. Repeated inhalation of extremely small particles can lead to acute and chronic respiratory conditions in certain cases.

[00100] Many electrosurgical systems use a surgical evacuation system that captures the smoke resulting from a surgical procedure, and directs the captured smoke through a filter and an escape port away from the doctor (s) and / or patient (s) ). For example, an evacuation system can be configured to evacuate the smoke that is generated during an electrosurgical procedure. The reader will recognize that such an evacuation system can be called a "smoke evacuation system", although that evacuation system can be configured to evacuate more than just smoke from a surgical site. Throughout this description, the "smoke" evacuated by an evacuation system is not limited to the smoke itself. Instead, the smoke evacuation systems described herein can be used to evacuate a variety of fluids, including liquids, gases, vapors, smoke, water vapor, or combinations thereof. The fluids can be of biological origin and / or can be introduced into the surgical site from an external source during a procedure. Fluids can include water, saline, lymph, blood, exudate and / or purulent discharge, for example. In addition, fluids can include particulates or other materials (for example, cellular matter or debris) that are released by the evacuation system. For example, such particulates can be suspended in the fluid.

[00101] Evacuation systems typically include a pump and a filter. The pump creates a suction that drains the smoke into the filter. For example, suction can be configured to drain smoke from the surgical site to open a conduit, through an evacuation conduit and then into an evacuation system evacuation cabinet. A 50018 evacuator cabinet for a 50000 surgical evacuation system is illustrated in Figure 1. In one aspect of the present description, a pump and filter are positioned inside the 50018 evacuator cabinet. Smoke drained into the 50018 evacuator cabinet follows to the filter through a 50036 suction line, and harmful toxins and unpleasant odors are filtered out of the smoke as it passes through the filter. The suction line can also be called a vacuum and / or evacuation line and / or pipe, for example. The filtered air can then escape from the surgical evacuation system as an exhaust. In certain cases, the various evacuation systems described herein can also be configured to deliver fluids to a desired location, such as a surgical site.

[00102] Now, with reference to Figure 2, the suction duct 50036 coming out of the evacuation cabinet 50018 (Figure 1) can end in a handle, like the handle 50032. The handle 50032 comprises an electrosurgical instrument that includes a tip 50034 electrode and an opening of the evacuation duct near and / or in a position adjacent to the electrode tip

50034. The evacuation duct opening is configured to capture fluid and / or particulates that are released during a surgical procedure. In this case, the evacuation system 50000 is integrated with the electrosurgical instrument 50032. Still with reference to Figure 2, smoke S is pulled into the suction duct 50036.

[00103] In certain cases, the 50000 evacuation system may include a separate surgical tool that comprises an opening in the conduit and is configured to suck smoke into the system. In still other cases, a tool that comprises opening the evacuation duct can be snapped onto an electrosurgical tool, as shown in Figure 3. For example, a portion of a 51036 suction duct can be positioned around (or adjacent a) a 51034 electrode tip. In one case, the suction line 51036 can be releasably attached to a 51032 handle of an electrosurgical tool comprising the 51034 electrode tip using clamps or other fasteners.

[00104] Various internal components of a 50518 evacuator cabinet are shown in Figure 4. In several cases, the internal components in Figure 4 can also be incorporated into the 50018 evacuator cabinet of Figure 1. With reference mainly to Figure 4, a system evacuation 50500 includes the evacuation cabinet 50518, a filter 50502, an exhaust mechanism 50520 and a pump 50506. The evacuation system 50500 defines a flow path 50504 through the evacuation cabinet 50518 which has an inlet port 50522 and a outlet port 50524. Filter 50502, exhaust mechanism 50520 and pump 50506 are arranged sequentially in line with flow path 50504 through evacuator cabinet 50518 between inlet port 50522 and outlet port 50524. The port inlet 50522 can be coupled in fluid communication with a suction duct, such as suction duct 50036 in Figure 1, for example, which can comprise a distal opening of the duct operable at the surgical site.

[00105] The 50506 pump is configured to produce a pressure differential in the 50504 flow path by mechanical action. The pressure differential is configured to drain smoke 50508 from the surgical site into the entrance port 50522 and along flow path 50504. After smoke 50508 has passed through filter 50502, smoke 50508 can be considered filtered smoke, or air, 50510, which can then continue on flow path 50504 and then be expelled through outlet port 50524. Flow path 50504 includes a first zone 50514 and a second zone 50516. The first zone 50514 is upstream of the pump 50506; the second zone 50516 is downstream of the pump 50506. The pump 50506 is configured to pressurize the fluid in the flow path 50504 so that the fluid in the second zone 50516 has a higher pressure than the fluid in the first zone 50514. A 50512 engine drives the 50506 pump. Several suitable motors are further described here. The 50520 exhaust mechanism is a mechanism that can control the speed, direction and / or other properties of the filtered smoke 50510 exiting the evacuation system 50500 at the exit port 50524.

[00106] The flow path 50504 through the 50500 evacuation system can be comprised of a pipe or other conduit that substantially contains and / or isolates the fluid that moves through the flow path 50504 of the fluid outside the flow path. flow 50504. For example, the first zone 50514 of the flow path 50504 may comprise a tube through which the flow path 50504 extends between the filter 50502 and the pump

50506. The second zone 50516 of the flow path 50504 can also include a tube through which the flow path 50504 extends between the pump 50506 and the exhaust mechanism 50520. The flow path 50504 also extends through the filter 50502, pump 50506 and exhaust mechanism 50520 so that flow path 50504 extends continuously from inlet port 50522 to outlet port 50524.

[00107] In operation, smoke 50508 can flow into filter 50502 at inlet port 50522 and can be pumped through flow path 50504 by pump 50506 so that smoke 50508 is drained into filter 50502. A filtered smoke 50510 can then be pumped through the exhaust mechanism 50520 and out of the exhaust port 50524 of the evacuation system 50500. The filtered smoke 50510 from the evacuation system 50500 at the exhaust port 50524 is the exhaust, and may consist of in filtered gases that have passed through the 50500 evacuation system.

[00108] In several cases, the evacuation systems described here (for example the evacuation system 50000 and the evacuation system 50500) can be incorporated into an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, such as the 100 system (Figure 39) or the system 200 (Figure 47), for example. In one aspect of the present description, for example, the computer-implemented surgical system 100 may include at least one central controller 106 and a cloud 104. Referring primarily to Figure 41, central controller 106 includes a smoke evacuation module

126. The operation of the smoke evacuation module 126 can be controlled by the central controller 106 based on its situational recognition and / or the feedback provided by its components and / or based on information from the cloud 104. The surgical systems implemented by computer 100 and 200, as well as their situational recognition, are described later in this document.

[00109] Situational recognition encompasses the ability of some aspects of a surgical system to determine or infer information related to a surgical procedure from data received from databases and / or instruments. The information may include the type of procedure being performed, the type of tissue being operated on, or the body cavity that is the subject of the procedure. By providing contextual information related to the surgical procedure, the surgical system can, for example, improve the way in which it controls the modular devices (for example, a smoke evacuation system) that are connected to it and provide contextual information or suggestions to the doctor during the course of the surgical procedure. Situational recognition is described later in this document and in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its wholeness.

[00110] In several cases, the surgical systems and / or the surgical evacuation systems described herein may include a processor. The processor can be programmed to control one or more operating parameters of the surgical system and / or the evacuation system based on detected and / or aggregated data and / or one or more user actions, for example. Figure 5 is a schematic representation of a 50300 electrosurgical system that includes a 50308 processor. The 50300 electrosurgical system is powered by a 50302 AC source, which provides either 120 V or 240 V alternating current. AC 50302 is directed to an AC / DC converter 50304, which converts the alternating current of 120 V or 240 V to direct current of 360 V. The direct current of 360 V is then directed to a 50306 power converter (for example, a reducing converter ("buck"). The 50306 power converter is a DC to DC reduction converter. The 50306 power converter is adapted to reduce the input voltage of 360 V to a desired level within a range between 0 and 150 V.

[00111] The 50308 processor can be programmed to regulate various aspects, functions and parameters of the electrosurgical system

50300. For example, the 50308 processor can determine the desired output power level on a 50334 electrode tip, which can be similar in many ways to the 50034 electrode tip in Figure 2 and / or the 51034 electrode tip in Figure 3 , for example, and instruct the 50306 power converter to decrease the voltage to a specified level, in order to provide the desired output power. The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50310 memory configured to store executable instructions per machine to operate the 50300 electrosurgical system and / or subsystems thereof.

[00112] Connected between the 50308 processor and the 50306 power converter is a 50312 digital to analog converter ("DAC").

DAC 50312 is adapted to convert a digital code created by the 50308 processor to an analog signal (current, voltage, or electrical load) that controls the voltage reduction performed by the 50306 power converter. After the 50306 power converter reduces the voltage 360 V to a level that the 50308 processor has determined will provide the desired output power level, the voltage is directed to the 50334 electrode tip to perform electrosurgical treatment of a patient's tissue and is then directed to a return or electrode grounding device 50335. A voltage sensor 50314 and a current sensor 50316 are adapted to detect the voltage and current present in the electrosurgical circuit, and communicate the detected parameters to the 50308 processor so that the 50308 processor can determine whether or not to adjust the output power level. As noted, typical wave generators are adapted to maintain the selected settings during an electrosurgical procedure. In other cases, the operating parameters of a generator can be optimized during a surgical procedure based on one or more inputs for the 5308 processor, such as inputs from a central surgical controller, cloud and / or situational recognition module, for example, as described later in this document.

[00113] The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50318 communication device to communicate over a network. The communication device includes a 50320 transceiver configured to communicate over physical or wireless wires. The communication device 50318 may also include one or more additional transceivers. Transceivers may include, but are not limited to, cellular modems, wireless mesh network transceivers, Wi-Fi® transceivers, low power remote network (LPWA) transceivers and / or near field communication (NFC) transceivers .

The communication device 50318 can include or can be configured to communicate with a mobile phone, a sensor system (for example, environmental, position, motion, etc.) and / or a sensor network (wired and / or wireless), a computing system (for example a server, a workstation computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a tablet computer (for example iPad®, GalaxyTab® and the like), a computer ultraportable, an ultra-mobile computer, a netbook-type computer and / or a subnotebook-type computer, etc. In at least one aspect of the present description, one of the devices may be a coordinating node.

[00114] The 50320 transceivers can be configured to receive serial transmission data from the 50308 processor through respective universal asynchronous transmitters and receivers (UARTs - "universal asynchronous receivers / transmitters") to modulate the serial transmission data on an RF carrier to produce a transmit RF signal and to transmit the transmit RF signal through respective transmit antennas. The transceiver (s) is (are) additionally configured (s) to receive, via respective RF antennas, an RF reception signal that includes an RF carrier modulated with serial reception data, to demodulate the signal receiving RF to extract the serial receiving data and supply it to the respective UARTs to supply to the processor. Each RF signal has an associated carrier frequency and an associated channel bandwidth. Channel bandwidth is associated with carrier frequency, transmission data and / or reception data. Each RF carrier frequency and each channel bandwidth are related to the operating frequency range (s) of the 50320 transceiver (s). Each channel bandwidth is additionally related to the standard and / or wireless communication protocol to which the 50320 transceiver (s) can conform. In other words, each 50320 transceiver can correspond to an implementation of a selected wireless communication standard and / or protocol, for example, the IEEE standard

802.11 a / b / g / n is for Wi-Fi® or the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for wireless mesh networks that use Zigbee routing.

[00115] The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50324 intelligent detection and control device that is coupled to a 50326 smoke evacuator. The 50326 smoke evacuator can include one or more 50327 sensors, and can also include a pump and motor from the pump controlled by a 50328 motor driver. The 50328 motor driver is coupled in communication with the 50308 processor and the pump motor in the 50326 smoke evacuator. The 50324 intelligent detection and control device includes 50321 sensor algorithms and algorithms communication devices that facilitate communication between the 50326 smoke evacuator and other devices to adapt their control programs. The 50324 intelligent detection and control device is configured to evaluate fluids, particulates and gases extracted through a 50336 evacuation duct to improve smoke extraction efficiency and / or reduce smoke output from the device, for example, as further described in this description. In certain cases, the intelligent detection and control device 50324 is coupled in communication with one or more sensors 50327 in the smoke evacuator 50326, one or more internal sensors 50330 and / or one or more external sensors 50332 of the electrosurgical system 50300.

[00116] In certain cases, a processor may be located inside an evacuation cabinet of a surgical evacuation system. For example, with reference to Figure 6, a 50408 processor and a 50410 memory of it are positioned inside a 50440 evacuator cabinet of a 50400 surgical evacuation system. The 50408 processor is in signal communication with a 50428 motor driver, several internal sensors 50430, a screen 50442, memory 50410 and a communication device 50418. The communication device 50418 is similar in many ways to the communication device 50318 described above with reference to Figure 5. The communication device 50418 can enable the 50408 processor in the 50400 surgical evacuation system communicates with other devices in a surgical system. For example, communication device 50418 may enable wired and / or wireless communication with one or more external sensors 50432, one or more surgical devices 50444, one or more central controllers 50448, one or more clouds 50446 and / or one or more systems and / or additional surgical tools. The reader will readily recognize that the 50400 surgical evacuation system in Figure 6 can, in certain cases, be incorporated into the 50300 electrosurgical system in Figure 5. The 50400 surgical evacuation system also includes a 50450 pump, which includes a 50451 pump motor, an evacuation duct 50436 and an exhaust 50452. Various pumps, evacuation ducts and exhausts are described later in this document. The 50400 surgical evacuation system may also include a smart detection and control device, which can be similar in many ways to the 50324 smart detection and control device, for example. For example, such a detection device and intelligent controls may be in signal communication with the 50408 processor and / or one or more of the 50430 sensors and / or the external 50432 sensors.

[00117] The 50300 electrosurgical system (Figure 5) and / or the 50400 surgical evacuation system (Figure 6) can be programmed to monitor one or more parameters of a surgical system and can perform a surgical function based on one or more algorithms stored in a memory in signal communication with the 50308 processor and / or the 50408 processor. Several exemplifying aspects described herein can be implemented by such algorithms, for example.

[00118] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to detect the air flow through a vacuum source to adjust parameters of the smoke evacuation system and / or external devices and / or systems that are used in conjunction with the smoke evacuation system, such as an electrosurgical system, an energy device and / or a generator, for example. In one aspect of the present description, the sensor system can include multiple sensors positioned along the airflow path of the surgical evacuation system. The sensors can measure a pressure differential within the evacuation system, to detect a state or condition of the system between the sensors. For example, the system between two sensors can be a filter, and the pressure differential can be used to increase the speed of the pump motor as the flow through the filter is reduced, in order to maintain a flow through the system. As another example, the system can be a fluid collector from the evacuation system, and the pressure differential can be used to determine an airflow path through the evacuation system. In yet another example, the system can be the inlet and outlet (or exhaust) of the evacuation system, and the pressure differential can be used to determine the maximum suction load in the evacuation system to maintain the maximum suction load below limit value.

[00119] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to detect the proportion of a aerosol or carbonized particles, that is, smoke, in the fluid extracted from a surgical site. For example, the detection system may include a sensor that detects the size and / or composition of the particles, and the information is used to select an airflow path through the evacuation system. In that case, the evacuation system can include a first filtration path, or a first filtration state, and a second filtration path, or a second filtration state, which can have different properties. In one case, the first path includes only a particulate filter, and the second path includes both a fluid filter and the particulate filter. In certain cases, the first path includes a particulate filter, and the second path includes the particulate filter and a finer particulate filter arranged in series. The invention also contemplates additional and / or alternative filtration paths.

[00120] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to perform a chemical analysis on particles evacuated from a patient's abdominal cavity. For example, the 50324 smart detection and control device can detect the particle count and type to adjust the power level of the ultrasonic generator to induce the ultrasonic blade to produce less smoke. In another example, sensor systems can include sensors to detect particle count, temperature, fluid content and / or the percentage of contamination of the evacuated fluid, and can report the detected property or properties to a generator to adjust its output. For example, the 50326 smoke evacuator and / or the 50324 smart detection and control device can be configured to adjust the evacuation flow and / or the pump motor speed and, at a predefined particulate level, can operationally affect the output power or the waveform of the generator to decrease the smoke generated by the end actuator.

[00121] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to evaluate the particle count and the contamination in the operating room by assessing one or more properties in the ambient air and / or in the exhaust exiting the evacuator cabinet. Particle counts and / or air quality can be displayed on the smoke evacuation system, for example in the evacuator cabinet, to communicate information to a doctor and / or establish the effectiveness of the smoke evacuation system and its ( s) filter (s).

[00122] In one aspect of the present description, a processor, such as the 50308 processor or the 50408 processor (Figures 5 and 6), for example, is configured to compare an image of the sample rate obtained from an endoscope with the count of particles in the evacuator provided by the detection system (for example, the 50324 intelligent control and detection device) to determine a correlation and / or to adjust the pump speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). In one case, generator activation can be communicated to the smoke evacuator so that an estimated required smoke evacuation rate can be implemented. The activation of the generator can be communicated to the surgical evacuation system through a central surgical controller, cloud communication system and / or direct connection, for example.

[00123] In one aspect of the present description, the sensor systems and algorithms for a smoke evacuation system (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) can be configured to control the smoke evacuator, and can adapt the parameters engine to adjust the filtration efficiency of the smoke evacuator based on the needs of the surgical field at any given time. In one case, an airflow pump speed adaptation algorithm is provided to automatically adjust the pump motor speed based on the particulate count detected at the entrance of the smoke evacuator and / or released at the exit or escape of the evacuator. of smoke. For example, the 50324 intelligent detection and control device (Figure 5) can include a user-selectable speed and an automatic mode speed, for example. At automatic mode speed, the air flow through the evacuation system can be scalable based on the smoke entering the evacuation system and / or the lack of filtered particles released from the smoke evacuation system. The speed of the automatic mode can enable automatic detection and compensation for the laparoscopic mode in certain cases.

[00124] In one aspect of the present description, the evacuation system may include a communication and electrical architecture (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) that provides data collection and communication features to improve interactivity with a central surgical controller and a cloud. In one example, a surgical evacuation system and / or processor, such as processor 50308 (Figure 5) and processor 50408 (Figure 6), for example, may include a segmented control circuit that is energized in a method in stages to check for errors, shorts and / or for system security checks. The segmented control circuit can also be configured to have an energized portion and a non-energized portion until the energized portion performs a first function. The segmented control circuit can include circuit elements to identify and show the user the status updates of the connected components. The segmented control circuit also includes circuit elements to run the motor in a first state, in which the motor is activated by the user, and in a second state, in which the motor was not activated by the user, but starts the pump in a quieter mode and at a slower pace. A segmented control circuit can enable the smoke evacuator to be energized in stages, for example.

[00125] The communication and electrical architecture for the evacuation system (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) can also enable the interconnectivity of the smoke evacuator with other components present in the central surgical controller, both for interactions and for the data communication with a cloud. Communication of the parameters of the surgical evacuation system to a central surgical controller and / or cloud can be provided in order to affect the output or operation of other connected devices. The parameters can be operational or detected. Operational parameters include air flow, pressure differentials and air quality. The detected parameters include particulate concentration, percentage of aerosol and chemical analysis.

[00126] In one aspect of the present description, the evacuation system, such as the 50400 surgical evacuation system, for example, may also include a housing and replaceable components, controls and a screen. Circuit elements are provided to communicate the safety identification (ID) between such replaceable components. For example, communication between a filter and the electronic smoke evacuation circuit can be provided to verify the component's authenticity, remaining life, update component parameters, record errors and / or limit the number and / or type of components that can be identified by the system. In several cases, the communication circuit can authenticate resources to enable and / or disable configuration parameters. The communication circuit can use encryption and / or error handling schemes to manage security and ownership relationships between the component and the electronic smoke evacuation circuit. In certain cases, disposable / reusable components are included.

[00127] In one aspect of this description, evacuation systems can provide fluid management and extraction and airflow filter configurations. For example, a surgical evacuation system is provided that includes a fluid capture mechanism, the fluid capture mechanism having a first and a second set of extraction or airflow control features arranged in series to extract large and small fluid droplets, respectively. In certain cases, the air flow path may contain a recirculation channel or secondary fluid channel returning to the main reservoir downstream of the exhaust port of the main fluid management chamber.

[00128] In one aspect of the present description, an advanced block can be coupled to the electrosurgical system. For example, the grounding electrode 50335 of the 50300 electrosurgical system (Figure 5) may include an advanced block with localized detection that is integrated into the block while maintaining the capacitive coupling. For example, the capacitive coupling return path of the block may have small separable matrix elements that can be used to detect control signals and / or nerve movement from certain anatomical sites, to detect the proximity of the monopolar tip to a nerve bundle .

[00129] An electrosurgical system may include a signal generator, an electrosurgical instrument, a return electrode and a surgical evacuation system. The generator can be an RF wave generator that produces RF electrical energy. Connected to the electrosurgical instrument is a useful conduit. The utility conduit includes a cable that carries electrical energy from the signal generator to the electrosurgical instrument. The utility conduit also includes a vacuum hose that carries smoke and / or fluid captured / collected away from a surgical site. Such an example 50601 electrosurgical system is shown in Figure 7. More specifically, the 50601 electrosurgical system includes a 50640 generator, a 50630 electrosurgical instrument, a 50646 return electrode and a 50600 evacuation system. The 50630 electrosurgical instrument includes a 50632 cable and a 50632 cable. distal opening of the 50634 duct coupled in fluid communication with a 50636 suction hose from the 50600 evacuation system. The 50630 electrosurgical instrument also includes an electrode that is powered by the 50640 generator. The first 50642 electrical connection, for example a wire, extends from the electrosurgical instrument 50630 to generator 50640. The second electrical connection 50644, for example a wire, extends from the electrosurgical instrument 50630 to the electrode, that is, the return electrode 50646. In other cases, the electrosurgical instrument 50630 may be a bipolar electrosurgical instrument . The distal opening of the conduit 50634 in the electrosurgical instrument 50630 is coupled in fluid communication with the suction hose 50636 that extends to an end cap of the filter 50603 of a filter installed in an evacuation cabinet 50618 of the 50600 evacuation system.

[00130] In other cases, the distal opening of the 50634 duct of the 50600 evacuation system may be arranged in a handle or tool that is separate from the 50630 electrosurgical instrument. For example, the 50600 evacuation system may include a surgical tool that is not coupled to the 50640 generator and / or does not include tissue energizing surfaces. In certain cases, the distal opening of the conduit 50634 of the evacuation system 50600 can be releasably attached to an electrosurgical tool. For example, the 50600 evacuation system may include a flue-fixed or press-fit conduit ending at a distal conduit opening, which can be releasably attached to a surgical tool (see, for example, Figure 3).

[00131] The 50630 electrosurgical instrument is configured to provide a patient's target tissue with electrical energy to cut the tissue and / or cauterize blood vessels within the target tissue and / or close to it, as described here. Specifically, an electrical discharge is provided to the patient by the electrode tip to cause heating of the patient's cellular matter that is in close contact with or in a position adjacent to the electrode tip. The tissue is heated to a suitably high temperature to allow the 50630 electrosurgical instrument to be used to perform electrosurgery. The return electrode 50646 is applied to or placed in close proximity to the patient (depending on the type of return electrode), to complete the circuit and provide an electrical return path to the 50640 generator for the energy that passes to the body of the patient.

[00132] The heating of the patient's cell matter by the electrode tip, or cauterization of blood vessels to prevent bleeding, often results in the release of smoke at the place where the cauterization occurs, as described here. In such cases, as the 50634 evacuation duct opening is close to the electrode tip, the 50600 evacuation system is configured to capture the smoke that is released during a surgical procedure. Vacuum suction can drain the smoke into the conduit opening 50634, via the 50630 electrosurgical instrument, and into the suction hose 50636 towards the 50618 evacuator cabinet of the 50600 evacuation system.

[00133] With reference now to Figure 8, the evacuation cabinet 50618 of the evacuation system 50600 is shown (Figure 7). The 50618 evacuator cabinet includes a 50620 socket that is sized and structured to receive a filter. The 50618 evacuator cabinet can comprise all or some of the internal components of the 50618 evacuator cabinet. Socket 50620 includes a first 50622 receptacle and a second 50624 receptacle. A 50626 transition surface extends between the first 50622 receptacle and the second receptacle 50624.

[00134] Referring mainly to Figure 9, socket 50620 is shown along a plane in cross section shown in Figure 8. Socket 50620 includes a first end 50621 that is opened to receive a filter, and a second end 50623 in communication with a flow path 50699 through the 50618 evacuator cabinet. A filter 50670 (Figures 10 and 11) can be removably positioned with socket 50620. For example, filter 50670 can be inserted and removed from the first end 50621 of the socket 50620. The second receptacle 50624 is configured to receive a 50670 filter connection nozzle.

[00135] Surgical evacuation systems generally use filters to remove unwanted pollutants from the smoke before it is released as an escape. In certain cases, the filters may be replaceable. The reader should consider that the 50670 filter shown in Figures 10 and 11 can be used in the various evacuation systems described here. The 50670 filter can be a replaceable and / or disposable filter.

[00136] The filter 50670 includes a front cover 50672, a rear cover 50674 and a filter body 50676 disposed between them. The front cover 50672 includes a 50678 filter inlet which, in certain cases, is configured to receive smoke directly from the 50636 suction hose (Figure 7) or another smoke source. In some aspects of the present description, the front cover 50672 can be replaced by a fluid collector (for example, the fluid collector 50760 shown in Figures 14 to 17) which directs the smoke directly from the smoke source, and which after removing at least a portion of the filter fluid passes the partially processed smoke into the 50676 filter body for further processing. For example, the 50678 filter inlet can be configured to receive smoke through a fluid collector exhaust port, such as a 50766 port on a 50760 fluid collector (Figures 14 to 17) to pass partially processed smoke into the interior of the filter 50670.

[00137] After entering the 50670 filter, the smoke can be filtered by components housed within the 50676 filter body. The filtered smoke can then escape from the 50670 filter through a 50680 filter exhaust defined in the 50674 rear cover of the 50670 filter. When the 50670 filter is associated with an evacuation system, the suction generated in the 50618 evacuation cabinet of the 50600 evacuation system can be communicated to the 50670 filter through the 50680 filter exhaust to pull the smoke through the internal filter components of the 50670 filter. A filter usually includes a particulate filter and a charcoal filter. The particulate filter can be a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) or an ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA), for example. ULPA filtration uses a depth filter that is similar to a labyrinth. The particulates can be filtered using at least one of the following methods: direct interception (in which particles larger than 1.0 microns are captured because they are too large to pass through the fibers of the filter medium); inertial impact (in which particles between 0.5 and 1.0 microns collide with the fibers and remain there; and diffusion interception (in which particles smaller than 0.5 microns are captured by the effect of Brownian random thermal motion as they "look for" fibers and stick to them).

[00138] The charcoal filter is configured to remove toxic gases and / or odors generated by surgical smoke. In several cases, charcoal can be "activated", which means that the coal has been treated with a heating process to expose the active absorption sites. Charcoal can be from activated virgin coconut shells, for example.

[00139] Now with reference to Figure 11, filter 50670 includes a layer of coarse filter medium 50684 followed by a filter layer of fine particles 50686. In other cases, filter 50670 may consist of a single type of filter. In still other cases, the 50670 filter may include more than two filter layers and / or more than two different types of filter layers. After the removal of particulate matter by the filter layers 50684 and 50686, the smoke is drained through a 50688 coal reservoir in the 50670 filter to remove gaseous contaminants in the smoke, such as volatile organic compounds, for example. In several cases, the 50688 coal reservoir may comprise a charcoal filter. The filtered smoke, which is now substantially free of particulate matter and gaseous contaminants, is drained through the 50680 filter exhaust and into the 50600 evacuation system for further processing and / or disposal.

[00140] The 50670 filter includes a plurality of barriers between components of the 50676 filter body. For example, a first barrier 50690 is positioned between the 50678 filter inlet (Figure 10) and a first particulate filter, as the coarse filter medium. 50684, for example. A second barrier 50692 is positioned between a second particulate filter, such as the fine particulate filter 50686, for example, and the 50688 coal reservoir. In addition, a third 50694 barrier is positioned between the 50688 coal reservoir and the filter exhaust. 50680. Barriers 50690, 50692 and 50694 may comprise a gasket or seal, which is configured to prevent movement of components within the 50676 filter body. In many cases, the size and shape of barriers 50690, 50692 and 50694 can be selected to prevent the filtration components from distending in the direction of the applied suction.

[00141] The 50684 coarse filter media may include a low air-resistant filter material, such as fiberglass, polyester and / or pleated filters that are configured to remove most particles larger than 10 µm, for example. In some aspects of the present description, this includes filters that remove at least 85% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 90% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 95% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 99% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 99.9% of particles larger than 10 µm, or more than 99.99% of particles larger than 10 µm.

[00142] Additionally or alternatively, the 50684 coarse filter medium may include a low air resistance filter that removes most particles larger than 1 µm. In some aspects of this description, this includes filters that remove at least 85% of particles larger than 1 µm, more than 90% of particles larger than 1 µm, more than 95% of particles larger than 1 µm, more than 99% of particles larger than 1 µm, more than 99.9% of particles larger than 1 µm, or more than 99.99% of particles larger than 1 µm.

[00143] The 50686 fine particulate filter can include any filter more efficient than the 50684 coarse filter medium. This includes, for example, filters that are able to filter a higher percentage of particles with the same size as the 50684 coarse filter medium. and / or capable of filtering particles smaller than the coarse filter medium

50684. In some aspects of the present description, the 50686 fine particulate filter may include a HEPA filter or an ULPA filter. In addition or alternatively, the 50686 fine particulate filter can be pleated to increase its surface area. In some aspects of the present description, the coarse filter medium 50684 includes a pleated HEPA filter and the fine particulate filter 50686 includes a pleated ULPA filter.

[00144] After particulate filtration, the smoke enters a section downstream of the 50670 filter that includes the coal reservoir

50688. The coal reservoir 50688 is bounded by porous dividers 50696 and 50698 arranged between the intermediate barrier and the terminal barrier 50692 and 50694, respectively. In some aspects of the present description, porous dividers 50696 and 50698 are rigid and / or inflexible and define a constant spatial volume for the 50688 coal reservoir.

[00145] The 50688 coal reservoir may include additional absorbents that act cumulatively with or independently of the carbon particles to remove gaseous pollutants. Additional absorbents may include, for example, absorbents such as magnesium oxide and / or copper oxide, for example, which can act to adsorb gaseous pollutants such as carbon monoxide, ethylene oxide and / or ozone, for example. In some aspects of the present description, additional absorbents are dispersed throughout the 50688 reservoir and / or are positioned in separate layers above, below or within the 50688 reservoir.

[00146] Again with reference to Figure 4, the evacuation system 50500 includes pump 50506 within the evacuation cabinet 50518. Similarly, the evacuation system 50600 shown in Figure 7 may include a pump located in the evacuation cabinet 50618, that can generate suction to drain the smoke from the surgical site, through the suction hose 50636 and through the filter 50670 (Figures 10 and 11). In operation, the pump can create a pressure differential inside the 50618 evacuator cabinet which causes smoke to flow into the 50670 filter and outside the exhaust mechanism (for example, the 50520 exhaust mechanism in Figure 4) on exit from the flow path. The 50670 filter is configured to extract harmful, unpleasant or otherwise unwanted particles present in the smoke.

[00147] The pump can be arranged in line with the flow path through the 50618 evacuator cabinet so that the gas flowing through the 50618 evacuator cabinet enters the pump at one end and exits the pump at the other end. The pump can provide a sealed positive displacement flow path. In several cases, the pump can produce the sealed positive displacement flow path by confining (sealing) a first volume of gas and decreasing that volume to a smaller second volume as the gas moves through the pump. Decreasing the volume of the trapped gas increases the gas pressure. The second volume of pressurized gas can be released from the pump at an outlet of the pump. For example, the pump can be a compressor. More specifically, the pump may comprise a hybrid regenerative blower, a grapple pump, a lobe compressor and / or a spiral compressor.

Positive displacement compressors can provide optimized compression ratios and operating pressures while limiting vibrations and noise generated by the evacuation system

50600. Additionally or alternatively, the 50600 evacuation system may include a fan for moving fluid through it.

[00148] An example of a positive displacement compressor, for example a 50650 spiral compressor pump, is shown in Figure 12. The 50650 spiral compressor pump includes a stator coil 50652 and a mobile coil 50654. The stator coil 50652 it can be fixed in position while the mobile spiral 50654 executes an eccentric orbit. For example, the mobile spiral 50654 can perform an eccentric orbit by rotating around the central longitudinal axis of the stator spiral 50652. As shown in Figure 12, the central longitudinal axes of the stator spiral 50652 and the mobile spiral 50654 extend perpendicularly to the visualization plane of spirals 50652, 50654. The stator spiral 50652 and the movable spiral 50654 are interspersed with each other to form separate sealed compression chambers 50656.

[00149] In use, a gas can enter the 50650 spiral compressor pump at an inlet 50658. As the mobile spiral 50654 rotates around the stator coil 50652, the gas at the inlet is trapped first in the compression chamber 50656. The compression chamber 50656 is configured to move a distinct volume of gas along the contour of the spirals 50652 and 50654 towards the center of the spiral compressor pump 50650. The compression chamber 50656 defines a sealed space in which the gas resides. In addition, as the mobile spiral 50654 moves the captured gas towards the center of the stator spiral 50652, the compression chamber 50656 decreases in volume. This decrease in volume increases the pressure of the gas inside the compression chamber 50656. The gas inside the sealed compression chamber 50656 is trapped while the volume decreases, pressurizing the gas. When the pressurized gas reaches the center of the 50650 spiral compressor pump, the pressurized gas is released through an outlet 50659.

[00150] Now with reference to Figure 13, a portion of an evacuation system 50700 is shown. The evacuation system 50700 can be similar in many respects to the evacuation system 50600 (Figure 7). For example, the evacuation system 50700 includes the evacuation cabinet 50618 and the suction hose 50636. Again with reference to Figure 7, the evacuation system 50600 is configured to produce suction and thus drain the smoke from the distal end of the hose. suction tube 50636 into the 50618 evacuator cabinet for processing. Notably, the suction hose 50636 is not connected to the 50618 evacuator cabinet through the 50603 filter end cap in Figure 13. Instead, the 50636 suction hose is connected to the 50618 evacuator cabinet through the 50760 fluid collector. A filter, similar to the 50670 filter, can be positioned inside the 50618 evacuator cabinet socket behind the fluid collector 50760.

[00151] The 50760 fluid collector is a first processing point that extracts and retains at least a portion of the fluid (e.g. liquid) from the smoke before redirecting the partially processed smoke to the 50700 evacuation system for further processing and filtration. The 50700 evacuation system is configured to process, filter and otherwise clean smoke to reduce or eliminate unpleasant odors or other problems associated with the production of smoke in the operating room (or other operating environment), as described here. By extracting droplets of liquid and / or aerosol from the smoke before being further processed by the 50700 evacuation system, the 50760 fluid collector can, among other things, increase the efficiency of the 50700 evacuation system and / or increase the service life filters associated with the system in certain cases.

[00152] With reference mainly to Figures 14 to 17, the fluid collector 50760 is shown separate from the evacuator cabinet 50618 (Figure 13). The fluid collector 50760 includes an inlet port 50762 defined on a cover or front surface 50764 of the fluid collector

50760. Inlet port 50762 can be configured to reliably receive suction hose 50636 (Figure 13). For example, one end of the suction hose 50636 can be inserted at least partially into the inlet port 50762 and can be secured with an interference fit. In several cases, the interference fit may be a fluid tight and / or air tight fit so that substantially all of the smoke that passes through the 50636 suction hose is transferred to the fluid collector

50760. In some cases, other mechanisms can be used to couple or connect the suction hose 50636 to the inlet port 50762, such as a compression fitting with a lock, a sealing ring, screw the suction hose 50636 with the gateway 50762, for example, and / or other coupling mechanisms.

[00153] In several cases, a fluid-tight and / or air-tight fitting between the 50636 suction hose and the 50760 fluid collector is configured to prevent fluids and / or other materials in the evacuated smoke from leaking at or near the junction between these components. In some cases, the suction hose 50636 can be attached to the inlet port 50762 through an intermediate coupling device, such as a seal ring and / or adapter, for example to ensure an air and / or fluid-tight connection between the suction hose 50636 and the fluid collector 50760.

[00154] As discussed above, fluid collector 50760 includes exhaust port 50766. The exhaust port extends in the opposite direction to a cap or rear surface 50768 of the fluid collector

50760. The exhaust port 50766 defines an open channel between an internal chamber 50770 of the fluid collector 50760 and the external environment. In some cases, the 50766 exhaust port is dimensioned and shaped to be firmly associated with a surgical evacuation system or its components. For example, exhaust port 50766 can be sized and shaped to associate with and direct at least partially processed smoke from fluid collector 50760 to a filter housed within a 50618 evacuator cabinet (Figure 13). In certain cases, the exhaust port 50766 may extend in the opposite direction from the front plate, a top surface or a side surface of the fluid collector 50760.

[00155] In certain cases, the exhaust port 50766 includes a membrane, which separates the exhaust port 50766 from the evacuator cabinet 50618. Such a membrane can act to prevent water or other liquid collected in the fluid collector 50760 from passing through exhaust port 50766 and enter the 50618 evacuation cabinet, while allowing air, water and / or steam to pass freely into the 50618 evacuation cabinet. For example, a high flow microporous polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) can be positioned downstream of the 50766 exhaust port and upstream of a pump to protect the pump or other components of the 50700 evacuation system from damage and / or contamination.

[00156] The fluid collector 50760 also includes a gripping region 50772, which is positioned and dimensioned to assist a user in handling the fluid collector 50760 and / or connecting the fluid collector 50760 with the suction hose 50636 and / or the evacuator cabinet 50618. Grip region 50772 is shown to be an elongated recess; however, the reader should readily consider that the 50772 gripping region may include at least one recess, groove, protuberance, tassel and / or ring, for example, which can be sized and shaped to accommodate the user's fingers or otherwise to provide a grip surface.

[00157] Referring mainly to Figures 16 and 17, the inner chamber 50770 of the fluid collector 50760 is shown. The relative positioning of the inlet port 50762 and the exhaust port 50766 is configured to promote the extraction and retention of extracted fluid smoke as it passes into the fluid collector

50760. In certain cases, the inlet port 50762 may comprise a notched cylindrical shape, which may direct the smoke and associated fluid into a fluid reservoir 50774 of the fluid collector 50760 or otherwise in the opposite direction to the exhaust port 50766 An example of such a fluid flow is shown with arrows like A, B, C, D and E in Figure 17.

[00158] As shown, smoke enters fluid collector 50760 through inlet port 50762 (illustrated by arrow A) and exits fluid collector 50760 through exhaust port 50766 (illustrated by arrow E). At least partially due to the geometry of the inlet port (for example a longer upper side wall 50761 and a shorter lower side wall 50763), the smoke entering the inlet port 50762 is initially directed mainly down into the fluid reservoir 50774 from fluid collector 50760 (illustrated by arrows (B). As it continues to be pulled down and into fluid collector 50760 along arrows A and B, the smoke, which was initially directed downwards, continues downwards and is directed laterally in the opposite direction to its source to move in a substantially opposite path, but parallel towards the upper portion of the fluid collector 50760 and out of the exhaust port 50766 (illustrated by arrows D and E).

[00159] The directional flow of smoke through the fluid collector 50760 can ensure that the liquids present in the smoke will be extracted and retained in the lower portion (for example, the fluid reservoir 50774) of the fluid collector 50760. In addition, the positioning exhaust port 50766 vertically above inlet port 50762 when fluid collector 50760 is in a vertical position is configured to prevent accidental transport of liquid through the exhaust port 50766 through the smoke flow, but without substantially impeding the flow of fluids into and out of the fluid collector 50760. Additionally, in certain cases, the configuration of the inlet port 50762 and the outlet port 50766 and / or the size and shape of the fluid collector 50760 itself can cause the 50760 fluid collector is spill resistant.

[00160] In several cases, an evacuation system may include a plurality of sensors and intelligent controls, as described later in this document with reference to Figures 5 and 6, for example. In one aspect of the present description, an evacuation system can include one or more temperature sensors, one or more fluid detection sensors, one or more pressure sensors, one or more particle sensors and / or one or more chemical sensors . A temperature sensor can be positioned to detect the temperature of a fluid at the surgical site, which moves through a surgical evacuation system, and / or which is released into an operating room from a surgical evacuation system. A pressure sensor can be positioned to detect pressure within the evacuation system, such as inside the evacuator cabinet. For example, a pressure sensor can be positioned upstream of the filter, between the filter and the pump and / or downstream of the pump. In certain cases, a pressure sensor can be positioned to detect pressure in the environment outside the evacuation system. Similarly, a particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles within the evacuation system, such as inside the evacuator cabinet. A particle sensor can be upstream of the filter, between the filter and the pump and / or downstream of the pump, for example. In several cases, a particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles in the environment to determine the quality of the air in the operating room, for example.

[00161] A 50818 evacuator cabinet from a 50800 evacuation system is shown schematically in Figure 18. The 50818 evacuator cabinet can be similar in many respects to the 50018 and / or 50618 evacuator cabinets, for example, and / or incorporated into the various evacuation systems described here. The 50818 evacuator cabinet includes several sensors which are further described here. The reader will recognize that certain evacuator cabinets may not include each sensor shown in Figure 18 and / or that they may include one or more additional sensors. Similar to evacuator cabinets 50018 and 50618 described herein, evacuator cabinet 50818 of Figure 18 includes an inlet 50822 and an outlet 50824. A fluid collector 50860, a filter 50870 and a pump 50806 are aligned sequentially along a flow path 50804 through evacuator cabinet 50818 between inlet 50822 and outlet 50824.

[00162] An evacuator cabinet may include modular and / or replaceable components, as described later in this document. For example, an evacuator cabinet may include a 50871 socket or receptacle sized to receive a modular fluid collector and / or a replaceable filter. In certain cases, a fluid collector and a filter can be incorporated into a single interchangeable 50859 module, as shown in Figure 18. More specifically, the 50860 fluid collector and the 50870 filter form the 50859 interchangeable module, which can be modular and / or replaceable, and can be removably installed in receptacle 50871 in evacuator cabinet 50818. In other cases, fluid collector 50860 and filter 50870 can be separate and distinct modular components, which can be assembled together and / or installed separately in the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[00163] Still referring to the 50818 evacuator cabinet, the 50818 evacuator cabinet includes a plurality of sensors to detect various parameters in the cabinet and / or environment parameters. Additionally or alternatively, one or more modular components installed in the 50818 evacuator cabinet may include one or more sensors. For example, still referring to Figure 18, the 50859 interchangeable module includes a plurality of sensors to detect various parameters within it.

[00164] In several cases, the 50818 evacuator cabinet and / or one or more modular components compatible with the 50818 evacuator cabinet may include a processor, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors (Figures 5 and 6, respectively), which is configured to receive inputs from one or more sensors and / or communicate the outputs to one or more systems and / or drivers. Various processors for use with the 50818 evacuator cabinet described later in this document.

[00165] In operation, smoke from a surgical site can be drained to inlet 50822 of the 50818 evacuator cabinet through the fluid collector 50860. The flow path 50804 through the 50818 evacuator cabinet in Figure 18 may comprise a conduit or 50805 sealed tube that extends between the various in-line components. In several cases, smoke can flow through a 50830 fluid detection sensor and a 50832 chemical sensor to a 50834 bypass valve, which is described later in this document. A fluid detection sensor, such as the 50830 sensor, can detect particles of fluid in the smoke. In one case, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can be a continuity sensor. For example, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can include two spaced electrodes and a sensor to detect the degree of continuity between them. When there is no fluid present, the continuity can be zero, or substantially zero, for example. The 50832 chemical sensor can detect the chemical properties of smoke.

[00166] At the bypass valve 50834, the fluid can be directed into a condenser 50835 of the fluid collector 50860 and the smoke can continue towards the filter 50870. Deflectors 50864 are positioned inside the condenser 50835 to facilitate condensation of droplets of fluid present in the smoke in a reservoir in the 50860 fluid collector. A 50836 fluid detection sensor can ensure that any fluid in the evacuator cabinet will be fully, or at least substantially, captured within the 50860 fluid collector.

[00167] Still referring to Figure 18, the smoke can then be directed to flow into the 50870 filter of the 50859 interchangeable module. At the entrance of the 50870 filter, the smoke can flow through a 50838 particle sensor and a pressure

50840. In one form, the 50838 particle sensor may comprise a laser particle counter, as further described here. The smoke can be filtered through a pleated ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA) 50842 and a charcoal filter 50844, as shown in Figure 18.

[00168] After leaving the filter, the filtered smoke can flow through a 50846 pressure sensor and can then continue along the 50804 flow path within the 50818 evacuator cabinet towards the 50806 pump. When moving through the pump 50806, filtered smoke can flow through a 50848 particle sensor and a 50850 pressure sensor at the outlet to the 50818 evacuator cabinet. In one form, the 50848 particle sensor can comprise a laser particle counter, as additionally described in this document. The evacuator cabinet 50818 in Figure 18 also includes an air quality particle sensor 50852 and an ambient pressure sensor 50854 to detect various environmental properties, such as the environment within the operating room. The air quality particle sensor, or external / ambient air particle sensor, 50852 can comprise a laser particle counter in at least one embodiment. The various sensors shown in Figure 18 are described later in this document. In addition, in several cases, alternative detection means can be used in the smoke evacuation systems described here. For example, alternative sensors for counting particles and / or determining the concentration of particulates in a fluid are also described herein.

[00169] In several cases, the 50860 fluid collector shown in Figure 18 can be configured to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. For example, the geometry of the 50860 fluid collector can be selected to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. In certain cases, the 50860 fluid collector may include deflectors and / or splash screens, such as the 50862 screen, to prevent captured fluid from splashing out of the 50860 fluid collector. In one or more cases, the 50860 fluid collector may include sensors to detect the volume of fluid within the fluid collector and / or determine whether the 50860 fluid collector is completely full. The 50860 fluid collector may include a valve for draining fluid from the collector. The reader will readily understand that several alternative fluid collector arrangements and geometries can be used to capture the fluid drained into the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[00170] In certain cases, the 50870 filter may include a greater and / or lesser number of filtration levels. For example, the 50870 filter may include one or more filter layers selected from the following filter group: a coarse filter medium filter, a fine filter medium filter and a sorbent-based filter. The coarse filter medium filter can be a low air resistance filter, which can be comprised of fiberglass, polyester and / or pleated filters, for example. The fine filter medium filter can be a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) and / or an ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA). The sorbent-based filter can be an activated charcoal filter, for example. The reader should readily consider that several alternative filter arrangements and geometries can be used to filter smoke drained along the flow path through the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[00171] In one or more cases, the 50806 pump shown in Figure 18 can be replaced by and / or used in combination with another compressor and / or pump, such as a hybrid regenerative blower, a claw pump and / or a compressor lobe, for example. The reader should readily consider that various pumping arrangements and alternative geometries can be used to generate suction on the 50804 flow path to drain smoke into the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[00172] The various sensors in an evacuation system, like the sensors shown in Figure 18, can communicate with a processor. The processor may be incorporated into the evacuation system and / or may be a component of another surgical instrument and / or a central surgical controller. Several processors are further described here. An integrated processor can be configured to adjust one or more operating parameters of the evacuator system (for example a motor for the 50806 pump) based on inputs provided by one or more sensors. Additionally or alternatively, an integrated processor can be configured to adjust one or more operating parameters of another device, such as an electrosurgical tool and / or an imaging device based on inputs provided by one or more sensors.

[00173] Now with reference to Figure 19, another 50918 evacuator cabinet from an 50900 evacuation system is illustrated. The 50918 evacuator cabinet shown in Figure 19 can be similar in many ways to the 50818 evacuator cabinet shown in Figure 18. For example, evacuator cabinet 50918 defines a flow path 50904 between an inlet 50922 of the evacuator cabinet 50918 and an outlet 50924 of the evacuator cabinet

50918. Between inlet 50922 and outlet 50924, a fluid collector 50960, a filter 50970 and a pump 50906 are arranged sequentially. The 50918 evacuator cabinet may include a 50971 socket or receptacle sized to receive a modular fluid collector and / or a replaceable filter, similar to the 50871 receptacle, for example. In a 50934 bypass valve, the fluid can be directed into a condenser 50935 of the fluid collector 50960 and the smoke can continue towards the filter 50970. In certain cases, the fluid collector 50960 can include deflectors, such as deflectors 50964, and / or splash screens, such as screen 50962, for example, to prevent the captured fluid from splashing out of the 50960 fluid collector. The 50970 filter includes a 50942 ultra-low pleated air filter (ULPA) and a 50944 charcoal filter. A 50905 sealed duct or pipe extends between the various in-line components. Evacuator cabinet 50918 also includes sensors 50830, 50832, 50836, 50838, 50840, 50846, 50848, 50850, 50852 and 50854 which are described later in this document and shown in Figures 18 and

19.

[00174] Still referring to Figure 19, the 50918 evacuator cabinet also includes a 50980 centrifugal blower arrangement and a 50990 recirculation valve. The 50990 recirculation valve can selectively open and close to recirculate the fluid through the 50960 fluid collector For example, if the fluid detection sensor 50836 detects a fluid, the 50990 recirculation valve can be opened so that the fluid is redirected in the opposite direction of the 50970 filter and back into the 50960 fluid collector. fluid detection sensor 50836 does not detect a fluid, the 50990 valve can be closed so that the smoke is directed into the 50970 filter. When it is recirculated through the 50990 recirculation valve, the fluid can be drained through a recirculation 50982. The 50980 centrifugal blower arrangement is engaged with the recirculation duct 50982 to generate a recirculating suction force in the recirculation duct 50982. More specifically, when the 50990 recirculation valve is opened and the 50906 pump is activated, the suction force generated by the 50906 pump downstream of the 50970 filter can generate rotation of the first centrifugal blower, or squirrel cage, 50984, which can be transferred to the second centrifugal blower, or squirrel cage, 50986, which extracts the recirculated fluid through the 50990 recirculation valve and into the 50960 fluid collector.

[00175] In various aspects of the present description, the schematic control diagrams in Figures 5 and 6 can be used with the various sensor systems and evacuator cabinets in Figures 18 and 19. Communication of smoke evacuation system parameters while central surgical roller or to the cloud to exit or operate other fixed devices END8546USNP (M-1/164469)

[00176] During the course of surgical procedures in which electrosurgical instruments were used, parameters such as the type of particles, the concentration of particles and the particle size in surgical smoke were not previously monitored. This lack of smoke monitoring during surgical procedures implies that the smoke evacuation devices present in the surgical sites have not adjusted the operation to carefully evacuate the smoke to compensate for the value of the parameters as the parameters change during the course of the surgical procedure (for example, greater concentration of particles in the smoke that is evacuated, etc.).

[00177] With reference to Figures 20 to 22 and Figures 25 to 35, an exemplary 56100 intelligent smoke evacuation system, as described here, is capable of communicating detected and captured parameters to a central surgical controller 206 or an analysis environment of data by cloud computing 204 (cloud 204, from this point onwards), which in turn outputs and operates other devices in communication with the central surgical controller 206 or cloud 204. For example, if a varying particle concentration is detected, this varying parameter is communicated to the central surgical controller 206 or cloud 204, and the central surgical controller 206 or cloud 204 can adjust the operation of another component in the smart smoke evacuation system 56100, such as the power level applied to the electrosurgical instrument, to compensate for the varied parameter.

[00178] By automatically adjusting the operation of other devices due to parameters detected by the intelligent smoke evacuation system, the smoke produced by the operation of an electrosurgical instrument is removed more effectively, and the risk to doctors and other people present during the procedure surgical is reduced.

[00179] Figure 20 illustrates a 56100 smoke evacuation system in which the various modules and devices are in communication with each other, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. The communication between the modules and the devices identified in the smoke evacuation system 56100 can occur directly or indirectly through a connection via the central surgical controller 204 and / or the cloud 204. The smoke evacuation system 56100 can be interactively coupled to the central surgical controller 206 and / or in the cloud 204 as described, for example, in Figures 25 to 35. In this way, the parameters detected or captured by a smoke evacuation module 226 can affect the functionality of other modules, devices, or components in a computer-implemented surgical system, such as those illustrated in Figures 32 and 24. Figure 20, for example, shows a computer-implemented smoke evacuation system 56100 comprising a cloud 204, a central surgical controller 206, a control module smoke evacuation 226, and module A 56108, module B 56106, and module C

56104. The modules of A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 can be any of the modules or devices that are in communication with, or that are a part of, the central surgical controller 206. For example, modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 can be components of the visualization system 208, components of the robotic system 222, an intelligent instrument 235, an imaging module 238, a generator module 240, a suction / irrigation module 228, a communication module 230, a processor module 232, a storage matrix 234, an operating room mapping module 242, etc. Examples and descriptions of these various types of modules and components can be found, for example, in the discussion of Figures 25 to 35.

[00180] The smoke evacuation module 226 comprises at least one sensor. This sensor can be any type of sensor, including, for example, sensors that detect operational parameters such as ambient pressure sensors, particle sensors and air quality, etc. In addition, the sensors can be internal sensors, such as a pressure sensor, a fluid detection sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter, etc. In addition, more than one pressure sensor can be included in the smoke evacuation module 226 to determine a pressure differential across various portions of the smoke evacuation module

226. A description of sensors used in the context of a 56100 smoke evacuation system can be found in connection with Figures 4 to 6, 18 and 19, for example.

[00181] In several aspects, the smoke evacuation module 226 and modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 can be in direct or indirect communication with the central surgical controller 206 and / or the cloud 204, for example. Returning to Figure 20, the smoke evacuation module 206 and modules A 56108, B 56106 B and C 56104 are shown establishing bidirectional communication with the central surgical controller 206. This bidirectional communication is indicated by two directional arrows, such as the arrow 56112 This bidirectional communication can be established, for example, by connecting the modular cabinet of the smoke evacuation module 226 or the modules A 56108, B 56106 B, and C 56104 with a modular rear panel comprising an internal connector console.

The modular rear panel is configured to connect laterally or vertically to the modular cabinet of the smoke evacuation module 226 or modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 with the central surgical controller 206. An example of this is shown in Figures 27 to 31 In an alternative example, bidirectional communication can be established by the smoke evacuation module 226 enclosure or modules A 56108, B 56106, and C 56104, which is an independent enclosure that has a wired connector at the rear of the device that allows it to interface with the central surgical controller 206. Alternatively, in another example, the smoke evacuation module 226 and modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 can be connected directly to each other.

In yet another example, smoke evacuation module 226 and modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 may comprise a wireless communication module for communication with the central surgical controller 206 and / or with cloud 204, either directly or indirectly.

In the example illustrated in Figure 20, the central surgical controller 206 is shown to be in bidirectional communication with the cloud 204. Alternatively, in another example, the smoke evacuation module 226, as indicated by the dashed line 56110, and also any one or all modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104, can be directly in communication with the cloud 204 to receive instructions or information directly from the cloud without proceeding through the central surgical controller 206.

[00182] Figure 21 shows an exemplary flow diagram of method 56200 of interconnectivity between central surgical controller 206, cloud 204, smoke evacuation module 226 and / or several other modules A 56108, B56106 and C 56104, according to at least one aspect of the present description. Although the example method 56200 is described with reference to the flowchart illustrated in Figure 21, it will be recognized that many other methods of performing the actions associated with the method can be used. For example, the order of some of the blocks can be changed, certain blocks can be combined with other blocks, and some of the described blocks are optional.

[00183] With reference also to Figures 25 to 35, initially, a parameter is captured 56202 by the smoke evacuation module

226. For example, a sensor component of the smoke evacuation module 226, such as the particle and air quality sensor, will detect a parameter. This parameter can be any parameter related to the operating room environment, such as, for example, the air quality of the operating room. Although in the present example there is only one parameter detected, this description should not be limited in this way. In an alternative example, there may be many parameters detected by any number of different sensors. The frequency with which the parameters are detected and the frequency with which the smoke evacuation module 226 is activated depends on the amount of smoke that is evacuated. For example, if very little smoke is being evacuated, then the smoke evacuation module 226 may operate more slowly and / or detect parameters less frequently. Alternatively, if the smoke evacuation module 226 is actively operating to evacuate smoke that is rapidly being produced, it may be useful for the smoke evacuation module 226 to operate at a higher rate and / or to detect parameters more frequently to ensure that the equipment works properly. This can provide a safer environment for all surgeons, medical staff, and medical equipment in the operating room. Other parameters that can be detected include those detected by internal sensors, such as, for example, particulate concentration, percentage of aerosol or chemical analysis. Alternatively, operational parameters detected by the sensors in the smoke evacuation module 226 enclosure include, for example, air flow, pressure differentials, or air quality. A description of sensors used in the context of the 56100 smoke evacuation system can be found in Figures 4 to 6, 18 and 19, for example.

[00184] Then, the smoke evacuation module 226 will transmit 56204 the value of this captured parameter to the central surgical controller 206 or to the cloud 204. For example, if the air quality value of the operating room is captured, it can be sent by the smoke evacuation module 226 to the central surgical controller 206. The central surgical controller 206 can process the parameter, and / or can communicate the received air quality parameter to the cloud 204. This can be done via a network router 211, a central network controller 207, a network key 209 or any combination thereof. In an alternative example, the smoke evacuation module 226 can communicate the air quality parameter directly to the cloud 204 using wired or wireless communication techniques.

[00185] Then, the parameter value is processed 56206, and 56208 is determined if the parameter value impacts the way the 56100 surgical evacuation system or other modular device should operate. This processing can take place in the central surgical controller 206, in cloud 204, or a combination of central surgical controller 206 and cloud 204. The processing performed on the detected parameter includes the use of the detected parameter value in various algorithms and the learning software for determine whether the operation of the smoke evacuation module 226 or any modules A 56108 A, B 56106, and C 56104 should be automatically adjusted to compensate for the value of the parameter that has been detected. The parameter value is a smoke evacuation variable. The algorithms and learning software can be stored in the cloud 204 (storage 105) or in the central surgical controller 206 (storage 248) before processing, and can be remotely updated as needed.

[00186] For example, if the detected air quality parameter value indicates a large amount of smoke particles in the air, cloud 204 may contain software algorithms that can use the air quality parameter value to determine what how to change the operation of the smoke evacuation module or modules A 56108, B 56106 and C 56104 to improve the ambient air quality of the operating room. In the example, cloud 204 can determine that the operation of an intelligent instrument 235 needs to be modified, and that operation is best adjusted by adjusting the generator output that provides waveforms to the intelligent instrument 235. Generator module 240 converts electricity into high frequency waveforms comprised of oscillating electrical currents, which are transmitted to the electrodes to act on the tissue. In an alternative example, cloud 204 may determine that none of the modules A 56108, B 56106, and C 56104 need to be adjusted, but that the operation of the smoke evacuation module 226 needs to be adjusted. In this alternate example, cloud 204 may determine that the air quality parameter value indicates that the smoke evacuation module 226 can provide a safer environment if the operation of the smoke evacuation module 226 is set to evacuate smoke from the center surgical procedure more quickly.

[00187] Then, an instruction is sent 56210 to the 56100 surgical evacuation system or to the modular device to adjust the operation. For example, cloud 204 can determine that, based on the value of the detected air quality parameter, the operation of the smart instrument 235 needs to be adjusted. In the example, it was previously determined by cloud 204 that this would be best accomplished by modifying the output of generator module 240. Therefore, in this example step 56210, cloud 204 sends an instruction to generator module 240 (for example, module A 56108) . In the example, an instruction is sent to generator module 240 that directs the output of generator module 240 to be modified to change the operation of smart instrument 235.

[00188] Finally, the operation of the 56100 surgical evacuation system or modular device is adjusted 56212 based on the instruction. For example, generator module 240 will comply with the instruction it received from cloud 204, and modify the shape of the waveform output for smart instrument 235. This setting causes smart instrument 235 to act on tissue in a desired manner. In one example, instructions for the various modules are pre-stored in the cloud 204 or central surgical controller 206, but can be updated remotely as needed. Alternatively, these instructions are dynamically generated by the cloud 204 or central surgical controller 206 as needed.

[00189] Figure 22 is a 56300 smoke evacuation system in communication with several other modules and devices, according to at least one aspect of the present description. The example illustrated in Figure 22 discloses an alternative example of the computer-implemented surgical system shown in Figure 20. With continuous reference to Figures 25 to 35 and Figure 22, a cloud 204 and a central surgical controller 206 are shown. Although the illustrated example shows a single cloud 204 and a single central surgical controller 206, in alternative examples there may be more than one cloud 204 and / or more than one central surgical controller 206 in the computer-implemented surgical system.

[00190] In Figure 22, the central surgical controller 206 can include several modules, such as a suction / irrigation module 228, a smoke evacuation module 226 and a generator module 240. The smoke evacuation module 226 can contain a first 56302 sensor and a second 56304 sensor that detect different parameters. For example, the first 56302 sensor is a chemical sensor that performs a chemical analysis on smoke that is evacuated from the operating room, and the second 56304 sensor can be a laser particle counter that determines the particle concentration of the smoke that is evacuated from the operating room. In an alternative example, there may be more or less than two sensors on the smoke evacuation module 226.

[00191] In the example, the first 56302 sensor detects a first parameter 56306, for example, the pH of the smoke that is evacuated from the operating room. The second sensor 56304 detects a second parameter 56308, for example, particle count (parts per million) of the smoke that is evacuated from the operating room. The smoke evacuation module 226 can be connected to the central surgical controller 206, or it can be a part of the central surgical controller 206 and, therefore, the first parameter 56306 and the second parameter 56308 can be supplied to the central surgical controller 206 automatically after being detected. In an alternative example, the central surgical controller 206 can request any parameters detected periodically from the smoke evacuation module 226, or upon a user request for information on the detected parameter, and the smoke evacuation module 226 will provide the values of parameters detected upon request. Alternatively, the smoke evacuation module 226 can provide detected values to the central surgical controller 206 periodically without prompting.

[00192] In one example, the central surgical controller 206 can process, modify, or manipulate the first parameter 56306 and the second parameter 56308 to become a first processed parameter 56306 'and a second processed parameter 56308'. In an alternative example, the central surgical controller 206 may not perform any processing of the first parameter 56306 and the second parameter 56308. The central surgical controller 206 may send the first processed parameter 56306 'and the second processed parameter 56308' to cloud 204 for additional processing to determine whether the operation of the various modules needs to be adjusted based on the values of the detected parameters. Cloud 204 can execute a variety of algorithms to determine whether the values of the first processed parameter 56306 'and the second processed parameter 56308' indicate whether any of the other modules and devices, including the smoke evacuation module 226, need to adjust the operation to create a more ideal environment in the operating room. Cloud 204 can, in this example, determine that the values of the first processed parameter 56306 'and the second processed parameter 56308' are above or below acceptable limits and that, therefore, the operation of other modules needs to be adjusted to compensate for the detected values / captured from the first processed parameter 56306 'and the second processed parameter 56308'.

[00193] In the example shown in Figure 22, cloud 204 can determine that the display of the visualization system 208 needs to be adjusted to show the surgical site accurately. In that case, cloud 204 can send an instruction A 56312 to the visualization system 208 to adjust its screen of the surgical site. The visualization system 208 is communicatively coupled to the central surgical controller 206.

[00194] Additionally, in the example, cloud 204 can determine, after executing a variety of algorithms, that the operation of the suction / irrigation module 228 also needs to be adjusted based on the value of the first processed parameter 56306 'or the second parameter processed 56308 '. In the example, a B 56310 instruction can be sent to central surgical controller 206 from cloud 204. Central surgical controller 206 can transmit instruction B 56310 to suction / irrigation module 228. In an alternative example, the surgical controller central 206 can cause processor 244 located in central surgical controller 206 to adjust the operation of the suction / irrigation module 228. In another alternative example, cloud 204 can send instruction B 56310 directly to the suction / irrigation module 228 without first sending instruction B 56310 through the central surgical controller 206.

[00195] The cloud 204 may determine, after executing several algorithms, that the generator module 240 may not benefit from an adjustment in the operation, or that the detected parameters may not be effectively influenced from an adjustment in the operation of the generator module 240. Therefore, in the example illustrated in Figure 22, cloud 204 may not send an instruction to generator module 240. Alternatively, cloud 204 may send generator module 240 an indication that no modification to the operation is necessary. Smoke evacuation system containing a segmented control circuit, in which the circuit is energized in a staged method to check for errors, short circuits and perform system security checks

[00196] If flaws in the smoke evacuation system are not detected, the smoke evacuation system may be inadvertently operated in a surgical context when the evacuation system is not functioning properly. This can lead to an unsafe surgical environment in which dangerous or carcinogenic smoke is not being properly filtered out of an operating room. Alternatively, while some portions of a smoke evacuation system may be functioning properly, other portions may not be functioning properly. This can make the smoke evacuation system generally dangerous to energize and operate.

[00197] The smoke evacuation system 56100, 56300 comprising a smoke evacuation module 226 coupled to the central surgical controller 206 and / or the cloud 204, as described in Figures 20 to 22, for example, can additionally comprise a circuit 57100 segmented control panel, as described in Figure

23. The 57100 segmented control circuit can be powered in stages to check for faults, errors, short circuits, and can perform a variety of safety checks while initializing the smoke evacuation module 226 to help determine if the module smoke evacuation 226 can be operated safely.

[00198] When initializing the smoke evacuation module 226 in a staged method, faults and errors can be identified before attempting to operate the smoke evacuation module 226. This can improve the overall safety of the surgical operation since the ventilation system Smoke evacuation can be repaired or, if necessary, replaced with a replacement smoke evacuation module.

[00199] In one aspect, the smoke evacuation module 226 described in Figures 20 to 22 comprises a segmented control circuit in which the circuit can be energized in a staged method to check for errors, short circuits and perform checks system security. Figure 23 illustrates an aspect of a 57100 segmented control circuit, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. It should be noted that although certain features, modules, processors, motors, etc. are grouped into several segments represented in Figure 23, the description should not be limited to this example. In alternative examples, the segments can include more, less or different components than those shown in Figure 23. Additionally, in another alternative example, the number of segments in the exemplified segmented circuit can be greater or less than three segments.

[00200] In the example in Figure 23, the 57100 segmented control circuit includes a first segment 57102, a second segment 57104, and a third segment 57106. In one example, the first segment 57102 includes a main processor 57108 and a security processor 57110. The 57108 main processor can be directly wired to a button or an on / off switch

57120. Therefore, in this example, the first segment 57102, and specifically the main processor 57108, is the first segment 57102 and the component 57108 to be activated.

[00201] The security processor 57110 and / or the main processor 57108 can be configured to interact with one or more additional circuit segments and their components, such as the second segment 57104, which may include detection circuit 57112 and display circuit 57114 , and the third segment 57106, which can include a 57116 motor control circuit and a 57118 motor. Each of the circuit segments and their components can be coupled to or in communication with the 57110 safety processor and / or the processor main 57108. The main processor 57108 and / or the security processor 5 7110 can also be coupled to a memory, or include an internal memory. The main processor 57108 and / or the security processor 5 7110 can also be coupled to or be in wired or wireless communication with a communication device that will enable communication over a network such as the central surgical controller 206 and / or cloud 204.

[00202] The main controller 57108 can comprise a plurality of inputs coupled, for example, to one or more circuit segments, a battery, and / or a plurality of switches. The 57100 segmented control circuit can be implemented by any suitable circuit, such as a printed circuit board (PCBA) assembly within the smoke evacuation module 226. It should be understood that the term processor, as used here , includes any microprocessor, processor, controller, controllers or other basic computing device that incorporates the functions of a computer's central processing unit (CPU) into an integrated circuit or at most some integrated circuits. The 57108 main controller and 57110 processor are multipurpose programmable devices that accept digital data as input, process it according to instructions stored in its memory and provide results as output. This is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. The 57110 security processor can be configured specifically for critical security applications,

among others, to provide advanced integrated security features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[00203] In the example shown in Figure 23, the second segment 57104 can comprise a detection circuit 57112 and a display circuit 57114 both coupled to or in signal communication with the main processor 57108. The detection circuit 57112 of the evacuation module smoke detector 226 generally described in the present invention includes several sensors, some of which are internal to the smoke evacuation module 226 and some are external and located in the cabinet of the smoke evacuation module

226. These sensors include various pressure sensors, fluid sensors, chemical sensors, laser particle counters or other laser sensors, and air quality sensors. A description of sensors used in the context of the 56100 smoke evacuation system can be found in Figures 4 to 6, 18 and 19, for example.

[00204] In an alternative aspect, the detection circuit 57112 may include a communication device as some sensors located in the external cabinet of the smoke evacuation module 226 may involve communication and / or connectivity with the detection circuit 57112, with the main processor 57108, and / or with the security processor 57102 through the communication device. The 57114 display circuit may include a screen or other display device that can display text, images, graphics, tables, etc. obtained by the smoke evacuation module 226 or another device in communication with the smoke evacuation module 226 or the central surgical controller 206. For example, the display circuit 57114 may include a monitor or screen (for example, the screen 210, 217 or monitor 135) that can display and overlay images or data received from imaging module 238, device / instrument 235, and / or other display systems 208. This display or screen device can show the user the status of each segment or the status of each component in each segment in the segmented control circuit 57100. The status of each segment, or the state of each component in each segment, can be discerned by the segmented control circuit 57100 by identifying each component or segment, receiving or determining a state for each component or segment, and displaying the state of the state for each component or segment to the user. The component or segment can be identified using, for example, a unique data packet format, authentication, encryption, identification number, password, signal communication, flag, etc. A state of a component or segment can be determined using a flag, an indication, a detected parameter value, a measurement, etc.

[00205] These functions (identification, determination and display) can be performed using, for example, Wi-Fi, a wired connection, signal communication, Thread, Bluetooth, RFID or NFC. For example, the components of the 57100 segmented control circuit can include a communication device to communicate over a network, or it can be coupled to an external communication device for communication over a network. Communication devices can include a transceiver configured to communicate over physical or wireless wires. The device may additionally include one or more additional transceivers. Transceivers may include, but are not limited to, cellular modems, wireless mesh network transceivers, Wi-Fi® transceivers, low power remote network (LPWA) transceivers and / or near field communication (NFC) transceivers . The communication device can include or be configured to communicate with the main processor 57108, the safety processor 57110, the display circuit 57114, the central surgical controller 206, or the cloud 204, which can check or receive the identities of the components and their associated states. Transceivers can be configured to receive serial transmission data from the processor, through their respective universal asynchronous transmitters and receivers (UARTs - "universal asynchronous receivers / transmitters"), to modulate the serial transmission data on an RF carrier to produce a signal transmit RF signal and to transmit the RF signal through the respective antennas. Each transceiver can correspond to an implementation of a selected wireless communication standard and / or protocol, for example, the IEEE standard

802.11 a / b / g / n is for Wi-Fi® or the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for wireless mesh networks that use Zigbee routing, as described here. Alternatively, the display circuit may include a small speaker for audible signaling or a small light / screen to indicate the status of the smoke detector, an on / off operation, remaining filter life, etc. The identification of each component and its status can be provided voluntarily by each component, by sending or transmitting such information at regular or irregular time intervals. An example of an irregular time interval can be, for example, when a user directs information to be sent. In an alternative example, the identity and status information for each component or segment can be requested at regular or irregular time intervals. For example, an identity and state of the 57116 motor control circuit can be requested every 1 minute, 20 minutes, 40 minutes, one hour, 3 hours, 24 hours, among others.

[00206] In an alternative aspect, the segmented control circuit 57100 enables the energization of a state circuit that allows the smoke evacuation module 226 to consult or search all connected components. The status circuit can be located in any of the segments, but for this example it can be located in the first segment 57102. That state circuit can be able to query / search all components, including the components in the first segment 57102, in the second segment 57104, in the third segment 57106, as well as in any other additional components such as those shown in Figures 25 to 35. The search / query of the connected components can be done to check the compatibility, that the component or segment can be compatible with the system evacuation of smoke or with the central controller; authenticity, that the component or segment can be the correct component and can be trusted; the state used, or the state of any segment or component that has a usage-based longevity, such as a filter; and the correct insertion of the segment or component, such as the correct insertion of a filter before energizing the engine and the pump connected to the engine. In one example, the smart instrument, such as the smart instrument 235, can still be consulted / researched to verify that the appropriate devices are being used and that the smoke evacuation system is capable of working, or knows how to work, with the intelligent instrument researched / consulted. For example, the researched or consulted 235 smart instrument can be a Zip Pen®. Knowing which Zip Pen® is being used can help the smoke evacuation system determine how it works. If an unidentified smart instrument is being used, the smoke evacuation system may determine that engine power is inadequate or unsafe and an error can be shown by the 57114 display circuit. This can be done for any component in the smart surgical environment. , and not just for the smart instrument 235. Alternatively, if an unidentified smart instrument is being used, the smoke evacuation system may determine that the device can be used in a universally safe mode of operation.

[00207] The energization of a state circuit, as noted above, which allows the smoke evacuation module 226 to consult / search other components, can also provide identification, authentication and proprietary status text strings for the components consulted / searched . This enables controlled identification of the smoke evacuation module 226 and subcomponents of the smoke evacuation module 226 in order to prevent simulation devices from circumventing the safety device. For example, an exemplary attempt to deceive the security system is to build a "skimmer" (lollipop) to make exclusive connections. In order to prevent the system from being cheated, an operation can be performed to authenticate each component. Each component attached to the smoke evacuation system can be authenticated based on stored data, security encryption, authentication, parameters, or some combination thereof. The stored data may include an identification number or another identifier, a product name, and a product type, a unique device identifier, a registered trademark, a serial number and / or other manufacturing data, parameters of configuration, usage information, features enabled or disabled, or an algorithm / instruction on how to use the fixed component.

[00208] In the example shown in Figure 23, the third segment 57106 can include a 57116 motor control circuit and a motor

57118. The control circuit of the 57116 engine and / or the 57118 engine can be coupled to or in signal communication with the 57108 main processor and / or with the 57110 safety processor. The 57108 main processor can direct the control circuit engine 57116 to reduce or increase the speed of the engine 57118. In an alternative example, the control circuit of the engine 57116 and the engine 57118 can be coupled to or be in signal communication with the safety processor 57110. The engine 57118 can be coupled to a pump on the smoke evacuation module 226 (see Figures 4 and 6 to 19), and operation of the 57118 engine can make the pump run. Specifically, in one example, the 57118 engine can operate in two different states. The first state can be when the 57118 engine is activated by a user. In this first state, the 57118 engine can operate at a higher speed than in the second state. In the second state, engine 57118, engine control circuit 57116, main processor 57108, or security processor 57110 can detect a lack of user activity or receive an instruction from main processor 57108, security processor 57110, central surgical controller 204, cloud 206, or another module located within central surgical controller 206 (e.g., processor module 232) to decrease the operating speed of engine 57118.

[00209] The number of different states in which the 57118 engine can operate is not limited to two. The 57118 engine can change or choose its operating status based on various measured parameter values. In another aspect, the 57118 engine can determine or define its operational state based on the user's activity levels that are within, above or below specific limits. Additionally, these limits can be related or interrelated with limits of other modules or components of the smoke evacuation module 226.

[00210] In an alternative example, the 57118 engine can optionally have a mode called suspended mode. In this example, the suspended mode can be activated, or the 57118 engine can be placed in a suspended mode (silent mode or low power mode), when not being used for a predetermined period of time. The limit period of inactivity before entering suspend mode can vary depending on several factors, including the type of surgical procedure, the specific surgeon who performs the procedure, or other factors. Therefore, the predetermined period of time can be predefined, but it can be easily adjusted. For example, the limit from switching from the exemplary active state to the suspended state can be ten minutes. In this example, if a smart instrument 235 is not used by a surgeon in more than ten minutes, the engine control circuit 57116 or engine 57118 may receive an instruction to enter suspend mode. In an alternative example, if the smart instrument 235 is not used by the surgeon in more than ten minutes, the smart instrument 235 can automatically activate a suspended mode, slowing down the 57118 engine to put it in the suspended state. In addition, when the smoke evacuation module 226 or smart instrument 235 is not used again or detects user interaction, the smoke evacuation module 226 can go through an activation sequence to re-energize the segmented circuit 57100. This Activation sequence can be the same initialization sequence used to power the 57100 segmented circuit during error or fault checking. Alternatively, the activation sequence can be an abbreviated version of the initialization sequence to quickly re-energize the segmented circuit 57100 when user interaction is detected.

[00211] The example shown in Figure 24 discloses a method 57200 for operating a portion of the smoke evacuation module control circuit 226 in order to energize the segmented control circuit 57100 in stages, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. In this way, several portions of the control circuit will be able to carry out safety checks before energizing the subsequent segments, providing a safe reset circuit method. Although the example method 57200 is described with reference to the flowchart illustrated in Figure 24, it will be recognized that many other methods of performing the actions associated with the method can be used. For example, the order of some of the blocks can be changed, certain blocks can be combined with other blocks, and some of the described blocks are optional.

[00212] According to method 57200, the control circuit 57100 first activates 57202 a first segment 57102. For example, as shown previously in Figure 23, a first segment 57102 can include a main processor 57108 and a security processor 57110. In an alternative example, other components may also be included in the first 57102 segment, or the first 57102 segment may not include a 57108 main processor and / or a 57110 security processor.

[00213] Then, the first segment 57102 performs a first function 57204. This first function, for example, may be related to the safety check of the 57100 control circuit and / or the smoke evacuation module 226. For example, the 57108 main processor or 57110 security processor can check each segment or segment components for short circuits and other errors before engaging the high power portions of the 57100 segmented control circuit. The 57108 main processor and / or the processor Security 57110 can perform security checks on each component or each segment to determine if they are working properly. In addition, in another example, the main processor 57108 or security processor 57110 can perform a verification function to ensure that the components in the smoke evacuation module 226 are the correct components. For example, the 57108 main processor or 57110 security processor may include a Trusted Platform Module (TPM), or the TPM may be a separate component in the 57110 segmented control circuit, to ensure that components of the smoke evacuation system 56100, 56300 are the correct components. This verification can be done in a variety of ways. For example, an example method consists of having a key stored in the TPM for each component or segment. If the connected components are compared and the switch for each component or segment is not found within the TPM, the smoke evacuation module 226 may not enable or power these modules. In an additional example, the key discussed may incorporate encryption or, alternatively, may require authentication by a component of the smoke evacuation module 226, such as main processor 57108 or security processor 57110.

[00214] Additionally, for example, the main processor 57108 and / or the safety processor 57110 may include switching logic stored in memory that prevents the 57100 segmented control circuit from activating portions of the circuit if specific safety conditions are not met . For example, there may be a variety of conditions stored in the security processor 57118 associated with a logical key or a plurality of logical keys. For example, if a protection cabinet is not completely closed, if a filter module is not completely or properly inserted, if a hose is not properly or completely inserted, and if a fluid reservoir is not properly filled, a logic switch can be used. be triggered and an associated portion of the segmented control circuit 57100 or the smoke evacuation module 226 may not be activated.

[00215] In an alternative example, there may be a separate enclosure circuit to ensure that the cabinet is fully and properly closed before allowing the smoke evacuation module 226 or one of the various segments to be activated or operated. For example, if the cabinet is not completely closed, the circuit may not be completed. Therefore, the remaining segments or components of the 57100 segmented control circuit may not be activated. This enclosure circuit concept can be used on a tamper-proof circuit to prevent unauthorized maintenance service. For example, a tamper-proof circuit may include a confirmation circuit. If a cabinet that should not be opened is opened, the confirmation circuit can be permanently damaged, either electrically or mechanically. This breakable confirmation circuit has an internal connection strip that can join two rigidly fixed electrical connection blocks, one block being located in a housing wrap and the other block being located on the base structure of the housing. The internal connection can have a fixed insertable electrical connector that can lock in the respective connection blocks with a fitting feature in both the wrap and the base structure. When it is broken, it may be evident that the cabinet has been opened or tampered with. Once broken, the electrical connectors can be easily removed and replaced when the case is opened for replacement. In an alternative aspect, the blocks and docking resources can be located in different positions, and each segment can include separate blocks and docking resources. For example, the first segment 57102, the second segment 57104, and the third segment 57106 can each have a separate acknowledgment circuit. If the first segment 57102 is breached or opened, the confirmation circuit can be broken since the rigid internal connection strip can be broken and therefore can be identified as violated and / or the confirmation circuit can be replaced. With separate confirmation circuits, it is easy to detect whether any of the various segments or components of the 57100 segmented control circuit has been breached.

[00216] Alternatively, an enclosure circuit can be used as a segmented safety device. For example, if a portion of the system requires maintenance, an enclosure circuit may make it possible to open and maintain a portion of the system, but avoid using segmented control circuit 57100 or smoke evacuation module 226 after a separate portion does not. of the 57100 segmented control circuit may have been opened, disassembled or modified. For example, if the segmented control circuit 57100 of the smoke evacuation system 226 is to be repaired, but only the display circuit 57114 needs maintenance, there may be no reason for a maintenance technician or other personnel to perform maintenance. from the third segment 57106 or from the first segment 57102. Therefore, the third segment 57106 and the first segment 57102 may include separate enclosure circuits containing fuses or other single-use electromechanical / mechanical devices, or digital versions of the like. After the third segment 57106 and the first segment 57102 are opened, modified, or dismantled, the fuses may blow, preventing the power from reaching the third segment 57106 and the first segment 57102.

[00217] If an error, short circuit, failure, or other problem is detected, the segmented control circuit 57100 may be able to operate at least one segment of the segmented control circuit 57100, while not operating other segments. In order to ensure the safety of the 57100 segmented control circuit, portions of the 57100 segmented control circuit, and their connections between them, can be physically equipped with switches, fuses or circuit breakers, allowing the switches, fuses and circuit breakers to trip and prevent energizing if an unsafe condition is detected. Any suitable mechanical, electromechanical, or solid state switches can be used to implement the plurality of switches. For example, there may be a single-use fuse, a resettable fuse, or a solid-state switching device between the 57108 main processor and the 57116 motor control circuit. Generally speaking, an electrical fuse is an electrical safety device which operates to provide overcurrent protection for an electrical circuit. It may include a metallic wire or strip that melts when an excess current flows through it, thereby interrupting the current. In general, a resettable fuse is a polymeric device with a positive temperature coefficient (PPTC = "polymeric positive temperature coefficient") that is a passive electronic component used to protect against overcurrent failures in electronic circuits. The device can also be known as a multifunctional or polykey. In general, the solid state switch works under the influence of a magnetic field, such as Hall effect devices, magnetoresistive devices (MR = "magneto-resistive"), giant magnetoresistive devices (GMR - "giant magneto-resistive"), and magnetometers, among others. In other implementations, the switches can be solid state switches that operate under the influence of light, such as optical sensors, infrared sensors, and ultraviolet light sensors, among others. In addition, the switches can be solid state devices such as transistors (for example, FET, junction FET, metal oxide semiconductor FET (MOSFET - "metal-oxide semiconductor-FET"), bipolar and the like). Other switches may include wireless switches, ultrasonic switches, accelerometers, and inertia sensors, among others.

[00218] Then, a second segment can be activated 57206. For example, the second segment 57104, including detection circuit 57112 and display circuit 57114, can be energized. Then, a third segment can be activated 57208. For example, the third segment 57106, including the engine control circuit 57116 and the engine 57118, can be energized. Although this exemplifying aspect describes the activation of the first segment 57102 before the second, and of the second segment 57104 before the third segment 57106, the order of segment activation can be modified if deemed appropriate. Additionally, in an alternative example, a variety of error checks, checks, etc. can be performed between energizing the second segment 57104 and the third segment 57106.

[00219] The reader should readily consider that the various surgical evacuation systems and components described herein can be incorporated into an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, a central surgical controller and / or a robotic system. For example, a surgical evacuation system can communicate data to a central surgical controller, a robotic system and / or an interactive surgical system implemented by a computer and / or it can receive data from a central surgical controller, a robotic system and / or an interactive surgical system implemented by computer. Several examples of computer-implemented interactive surgical systems, robotic systems and central surgical controllers are described in more detail below. Surgical evacuation system with a communication circuit for communication between a filter and a smoke evacuation device

[00220] In general, the provision of network services to medical devices can expose the vulnerabilities of medical devices to malicious attacks. While there may be comprehensive firewall services provided on the networking system, these services can be vulnerable to security attacks from components within medical devices. That is, firewall services may not have information regarding the types, products, configurations, or authenticity of medical device components and, therefore, may not be able to protect the medical device system from malicious attacks from non-authentic components / unauthorized use of medical devices. For example, an unauthenticated / unauthorized component (for example, a filtering device) may include ransomware-type malicious software, which can deny user access to the medical device or data on the medical device until a ransom payment is made. . In addition, the non-authentic / unauthorized component may not be compatible with other authentic / authorized components of the medical device, which may result in reduced service life and / or overall performance of the medical components. This can also lead to an unexpected interruption in the operation of medical devices.

[00221] Aspects of the present description can solve the above mentioned deficiencies. In some examples, a surgical evacuation system may include a communication circuit that can facilitate communication between a smoke evacuation device and a replaceable filtration device that has a plurality of filtration components. The communication circuit can authenticate the filtration device (including the plurality of filtration components), check the remaining life of the filtration device, update the output parameters of the filtration device and record errors generated by the filtration device. The communication circuit can limit a number or a type of filtration component that can be identified by the surgical evacuation system, and can enable / disable the plurality of filtration components based on an authentication result. In some instances, the communication circuit may authenticate the filtration device / components using information about filtration components, which may include a product type, a product name, a unique device identifier, a brand registered product number, a serial number, or a configuration parameter for the filtering device / components. In some instances, the filtering device and / or the communication circuit may encrypt or decrypt data / parameters communicated between the filtering device and the communication circuit.

[00222] Thus, the surgical evacuation system according to an exemplary embodiment of the present description may be able to detect an unauthenticated / unauthorized component of a medical device, protect the medical device data / parameters by encryption, and verify possible problems with the filtration device in advance, checking the remaining service life and errors of the filtration components. This can advantageously enable the surgical system to avoid possible malicious attacks and performance degradation that may be caused by the non-authentic / unauthorized component, and to continue to operate the surgical evacuation system without an unexpected interruption in the operation of the medical device.

[00223] Figure 25 shows a high level component diagram of an exemplary 58100 smoke evacuation system, according to one or more aspects of the present description. The 58100 smoke evacuation system may include a 58105 smoke evacuation device having a 58160 pump and a 58165 motor operably coupled to the 58160 pump, a 58170 display device, a 58180 communication device, a 58110 processor, a 58120 memory, and one or more 58140A-B sensors. In some instances, the 58105 smoke evacuation device may include a 58150 filtration device and a 58130 filter communication circuit. The 58150 filtration device may be in communication with the 58105 smoke evacuation device (for example, the processor 58110) through the filter communication circuit 58130.

[00224] The 58100 smoke evacuation system may be similar to the smoke evacuation system shown in Figure 6. For example, the 58110 processor may be in signal communication with a motor driver or the 58165 motor, several 58140A- sensors B, the display device 58170, the memory 58120 and the communication device 58180. The communication device 58180 can be similar to the communication device described above with reference to Figures 5 and 6. That is, the communication device 58180 can enable that the 58110 processor in the 58100 smoke evacuation system communicates with other devices in the surgical system. For example, the 58180 communication device can enable wired and / or wireless communication with external sensors, surgical devices, central controllers, clouds and / or various additional surgical systems and / or tools. The reader will readily understand that the smoke evacuation system of Figure 25 can be incorporated into the surgical system of Figure 5 in certain cases.

[00225] In some examples, the 58150 filtration device can be coupled to a 58155 suction duct. A 58190 exhaust mechanism can be coupled to the 58160 pump. The 58190 exhaust mechanism may be similar to the 50520 exhaust mechanism. examples, the suction duct 58155, the filtration device 58150, the pump 58160 and the exhaust mechanism 58190 can be arranged sequentially in line with a flow path (for example, the flow path 50504) between an inlet port ( for example, input port 50522) and an output port (for example, output port 50524). The inlet can be coupled in fluid communication with the suction line 58155 which comprises a distal opening of the line at the surgical site. Although the 58190 exhaust mechanism is shown to be located outside the 58105 smoke evacuation device, in some instances, the 58190 exhaust mechanism may be located in the 58105 smoke evacuation device.

[00226] In some examples, the 58110 processor may be in signal communication with the filter communication circuit 58130 for communication between the filter device 58150 and the smoke evacuation device 58105. In some examples, the communication circuit of filter 58130 may be located on the smoke evacuation device 58105 or on the filter device 58150. In other examples, the communication circuit 58130 may be located outside the smoke evacuation device 58105. In some examples, the communication circuit 58130 may be part of the intelligent detection and control device represented in Figure

5.

[00227] Figure 26 illustrates a filter communication circuit 58130, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present description. The filter communication circuit 58220 can include a master controller 58210, an authentication unit 58220, an error logging unit 58230, an update unit 58240, an encryption / description unit 58250, a remaining life verification unit 58260 and a 58270 data storage unit. In some examples, master controller 58210 can be in signal communication with processor 58110 and control other units 58220 to 58270 on the filter communication circuit 58130. In other examples, processor 58110 can act as the 58210 master controller.

[00228] Figure 27 illustrates a 58150 filtration device, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present description. The filtration device 58150 can include a plurality of filtration components. The filtration components can include a 58310 controller, a 58320 filter element unit and a 58330 filter sensor unit. The 58320 filter element unit can include one or more 58325A-C filter elements. The 58330 filter sensor unit can include one or more 58335A-C filter sensors. The 58310 controller can control and communicate with the filter element unit 58320 and the filter sensor unit 58330. The filter device 58150 can be similar to those (for example, filter 50670) shown in Figures 10, 11, 18 and 19. In some examples, the one or more filter elements 58325A-C may be the fluid filter, the coarse filter medium 50684, the fine particulate filter 50686, the particulate filter, the coal reservoir 50688, or the filter charcoal shown in Figures 10, 11, 18 and 19, or any other filters in the 58150 filtration device. The filter elements 58325A-C may also include the bypass valve, deflectors, squirrel cage, or any other elements (eg barriers 50690, 50692, 50694, rear cover 50674, etc.) within the filtration device in addition to the sensors. In some examples, the one or more filter sensors 58335A-C may be similar to those (for example the fluid detection sensors 50830, the chemical sensor 50832, the fluid sensor 50836, the pressure sensor 50840, the particle counter laser 50838 etc.) shown in Figures 18 and 19.

[00229] In some examples, controller 58310 on filtering device 58150 may be in signal communication with master controller 58210 of filter communication circuit 58130. In some examples, filtering device 58150 can encrypt the output parameters of the plurality of filtration components before sending parameters to the 58130 communication circuit. Upon receiving the encrypted parameters, the communication circuit (for example the encryption / description unit 58250) can decrypt the encrypted parameters as discussed below.

[00230] Again with reference to Figure 26, the authentication unit 58220 can authenticate / verify the filtration device 58150 or the plurality of filtration components. In some examples, the 58220 authentication unit can identify the number of filtration components connected to the 58150 filtration device. The 58220 authentication unit can also limit the number or type of a filtration component that can be identified by the communication circuit. For example, if the filtration component is not of the type authorized for use in the 58150 filtration device, or if the number of filtration components used in the 58150 filtration device is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10, 20 , 50 etc.), the 58220 authentication unit can disable the filtration component or the 58150 filtration device. The 58220 authentication unit can also enable or disable the 58150 filtration device or the plurality of filtration components based on a authentication result.

[00231] Error logging unit 58230 can log errors or error messages from the plurality of filtration components or filtering device 58150. In some examples, error logging unit 58230 can log errors and error messages on the unit 58270 data storage circuit. The filter communication circuit 58130 can read the error messages and use them to find out what happened on the 58150 filtering device. Examples of errors and error messages can include errors that occur due to sensor / filter, foreign / dangerous chemicals detected by the sensors / filters, moisture detected in particulate filters; clogged filters, pressure differential (for example, between pressure sensors 50840 and 50846) above a predetermined value, and non-authentic / unauthorized filtering device / component.

[00232] The update unit 58240 can update output parameters of the plurality of filtration components. The updated parameters can be operational or detected. Operational parameters can include air flow, pressure differentials, air quality or any other parameters related to the operation of the 58150 filtration device. The detected parameters can include particulate concentration, aerosol percentage, chemical analysis, or any other detected values by sensors (eg pressure, fluid, chemical, particle) in the 58150 filtration device. These parameters can be stored in the 58270 data storage unit and updated automatically or manually by the update unit

58240. For example, the 58240 update unit can update the pressure differential values stored in the 58270 data storage unit when a change in pressure differentials is detected by pressure sensors (for example, sensors 50840, 50846). The filter communication circuit 58130 can receive these parameters directly from each filtration component (for example filter elements 58325A-C / filter sensors 58335A-C) or through the slave controller

58310.

[00233] The encryption / description unit 58250 can encrypt or decrypt the output parameters of the plurality of filtering components. The 58250 encryption / description unit can encrypt or decrypt any data or packet received from the 58150 filtering device. In some examples, the 58150 filtering device may also include a encryption / description unit similar to the 58250 encryption / description unit. encryption unit / filter device description 58150 can encrypt the output parameters of the plurality of filtration components before sending the parameters to the filter communication circuit 58130 and decrypt the data received from the filter communication circuit 58130. The data / encrypted parameters communicated between the filtration device 58150 and the filter communication circuit 58130 may not be visible / readable for the filtration components, the filtration device 58150 and the smoke evacuation device 58105 unless the encrypted data / parameters decrypted.

[00234] In some examples, the encryption / description unit 58250 and the filtering device 58150 can encrypt or decrypt the data / parameters by symmetric encryption, which uses the same (secret) key to encrypt and decrypt the data. In other examples, the encryption / description unit 58250 and the filtering device 58150 can encrypt or decrypt the data / parameters by asymmetric encryption, which uses public and private keys to encrypt and decrypt data. In asymmetric encryption, one of the public / private keys can be used to encrypt the data, and the other key can be used to decrypt the data.

[00235] The 58260 remaining life check unit can check / estimate the remaining life of the plurality of filtration components. In some examples, the 58260 Remaining Life Check Unit can use usage information about the plurality of filtration components to check the remaining life of the filtration components. Usage information for filtration components can include usage time data, the number of times each filtration component has been used, the number or type of errors that each filtration component has generated, a standard service life of each filtration component. filtration, and pressure differentials between pressure sensors located upstream (for example, 50840) and downstream (for example 50846) of filter elements 58325A-C. In some examples, if the pressure differential value of a 58325A filter element (for example, the ULPA filter) exceeds a predetermined value, which may indicate that the 58325A filter element is clogged, the remaining life check unit 58260 can determine that the remaining life of the 58325A filter element is zero or will become zero soon, for example within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 5 hours, 1 to

5 days, 1 to 5 weeks, or 1 to 5 months) and that it should be replaced. If the filtration component usage information indicates that a significant amount of moisture has entered a particulate or charcoal filter, the 58260 Remaining Life Check Unit can determine that the remaining particulate filter or filter life charcoal is zero or will become zero soon, for example, within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 5 hours, 1 to 5 days, 1 to 5 weeks, or 1 to 5 months) and that it must be replaced. If the filtration component usage information indicates that there is an error in a 58335A filter sensor or 58325A filter element (for example, they do not work properly), the 58260 remaining life check unit can determine that the remaining life of the filter filter sensor 58335A or filter element 58325A is zero or will become zero soon, for example, within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 5 hours, 1 to 5 days, 1 to 5 weeks, or 1 5 months) and that it should be replaced. In some examples, usage information for filtration components can be stored on the 58270 data storage unit.

[00236] The 58270 data storage unit can store information about the filtration components. Information about filtration components can include a product type, a product name, a unique device identifier, a product trademark, a serial number, and a configuration parameter for the plurality of filtration components. In some examples, information about the filtration components can be generated, for example, from the filtration component when the 58220 authentication unit authenticates / verifies the filtration components. In some examples, the data storage unit

58270 may also include information on authentic / authorized filtration components. Information about authentic / authorized filtration components may include a list of product types, product names, unique device identifiers, product trademarks, serial numbers, and configuration parameters for authentic / authorized filtration components. In some examples, information about filtration components and / or information about authentic filtration components can be stored in plain text. In other examples, information about filtration components and / or information about authentic filtration components can be stored in an encrypted form. In some examples, the 58270 data storage unit can also store information about disabled and enabled features, and an algorithm or instructions on how the 58105 smoke evacuation device can use the filtration components.

[00237] In some examples, data / parameters from the 58150 filtration device can be supplied to the 58105 smoke evacuation device (for example the 58270 data storage unit) in a non-sequential manner, for example as a packet of Dice. As used here, a data packet can refer to the data unit communicated between two devices (for example the filter device 58150 and the smoke evacuation device 58105). The 58105 smoke evacuation device (for example the 58110 processor, the 58210 master controller) can know how to combine the received data packets into the original data / parameters.

[00238] In some examples, the 58220 authentication unit can authenticate / verify the plurality of filtration components on the 58150 filtration device using the information on filtration components and / or the information on authentic filtration components. For example, the 58220 authentication unit can compare information about filtration components with information about authentic filtration components. That is, the 58220 authentication unit can verify that the information on filtration components (for example, unique device identifier / trademark / serial number of a filter on the 58150 filtration device) matches the information on authentic filtration components previously stored (for example in the list of unique device identifiers / trademarks / serial numbers of authentic filtration components). If it is determined that the information on a given filtration component does not match the information on authentic filtration components, the authentication unit 58220 can determine that the filtration component is not authentic / authorized. If it is determined that a filtration component is not authentic, the 58220 authentication unit may disable some or all of the functions of the filtration device (for example, smoke filtration, smoke detection, data processing, etc.) or (s) ) own filtration device / components. In some examples, the 58220 authentication unit may disable the filtration device / components or the functions of the filtration device by turning off the 58160 pump / 58165 engine or closing an inlet port on one of the filters.

[00239] In some examples, the serial number may be located on an integrated circuit, such as an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) or an electronically erasable programmable and read-only memory (EEPROM) of the device / components filtering system (for example, slave controller 58310). For example, in some cases, only certain families of integrated circuits can be used for authentic filtering devices / components and the serial numbers on those integrated circuits may indicate that the filtering devices / components that have them are authentic. In some instances, when the 58150 filtration device is connected to the 58105 smoke evacuation device, the 58220 authentication unit can read the serial number of the integrated circuit (for example EPROM / EEPROM) on the filtration components and verify that it it's authentic. In some examples, the 58220 authentication unit can be programmed to accept a set of ranges of serial numbers.

[00240] In some examples, the filter communication circuit 58130 (for example, master controller 58210) can act as a master device, and the filtering device 58150 (for example the plurality of filtration components, which includes the controller 58310) can act as a slave device. In some examples, the communication between the master device and the slave device can be unidirectional from the master device to the slave device during the execution of the authentication step. That is, it can only be the master device that is capable of authenticating / verifying the slave device, and the slave device cannot authenticate / verify the master device. In that case, the slave device can only provide information (for example information about filtration components, including a product type, a product name, a unique device identifier, a product trademark, a serial number and a parameter of configuration of the filtration components) requested by the master device. In some examples, communication between the master device and the slave device can be bidirectional.

[00241] In some examples, the plurality of filtration components may have a layered structure. For example, one of the filtration components (for example the slave controller 58310) can act as a master component and the rest of the filtration components can act as slave components. In this case, the other filtering components can communicate data / parameters directly to the master component, which in turn can communicate the received data / parameters to the master device (master controller 58210). In other examples, each of the filtration components can communicate data / parameters directly to the master device.

[00242] In some examples, the smoke evacuation device 58105 and the filtration device 58150 can communicate with each other, for example through the filter communication circuit 58130, using a wireless connection (bidirectional or unidirectional). Examples of the wireless connection may include radio frequency identification (RFID) (read only or read / write), Bluetooth, Zigbee, IV, or any other suitable wireless protocols. In other examples, the smoke evacuation device 58105 and the filtration device 58150 can communicate with each other using a wired connection. In this case, an electrical connector is provided between the smoke evacuation device 58105 and the filtration device 58150. For example, again with reference to Figures 13 and 14, the electrical connector can be located in socket 2120 which is configured to receive the filtration device 58150. In some instances, the first receptacle 2122 and / or the second receptacle 2124 may act as the electrical connector that electrically connects the smoke evacuation device 58105 (for example the 58110 processor, the 58210 master controller) and the filtration device 58150 (for example the slave controller 58310 or other filtration components 58325A-C, 58335A-C). In some instances, the electrical connector may be a spring loaded connector ("pogo pin") or a plug-in connector.

[00243] Again with reference to Figure 7, in some examples, there may be a cable connector, for example a wire, which extends from the smoke evacuation device 50600, 58100 to the generator

50640. The cable connector can provide activation signals and energy application information, and the 50600, 58100 smoke evacuation device can control the components in the 50600, 58100 smoke evacuation device based on the activation signals and the power application information. For example, the 50600 smoke evacuation device can reduce the suction force / rate or stop the suction, for example by decreasing the pump power / engine speed or turning off the 58160 pump / 58165 engine in response to receiving information / signals power application indicating that the generator is not activated or is not fully activated. The 50600 smoke evacuation device can also increase the suction force / rate in response to receiving energy application information / signals indicating that the generator is activated or fully activated. In this way, the 50600 smoke evacuation device may be able to change the level of force / suction rate as the 50640 generator is activated or deactivated.

[00244] In some examples, the filter communication circuit 58130 may include a Trusted Platform Module (TPM), which can be used to protect encrypted keys and authentication information against malicious software attacks. In some instances, the TPM may be a microprocessor or a specialized integrated circuit that provides a protected space for major operations and other security-related tasks. In some examples, the TPM may use a monotonic counter for anti-repetition protection, for example to limit the number of unsuccessful accesses. For example, the TPM, using the monotonic counter, can prevent attempts to transmit data that are malicious or fraudulently repeated by an unauthorized component of the 58150 filtering device. The TPM can provide decentralized and enhanced security for the 58100 system. .

[00245] In some examples, the 58170 display device can act as an interactive data point, receiving inputs and showing outputs for the 58100 smoke evacuation system. In some examples, the 58170 display device may include a screen sensitive to Touch. In some instances, the 58170 display device may show a smoke evacuation console with keys / buttons to control (for example, enable / disable) or check the status of components in the 58100 smoke evacuation system. For example, with the use of the keys / buttons, a user can check the activation status or the data / parameters (for example the magnitude of the fan / motor speed) provided by the components in the smoke evacuation system

58100. In other examples, the evacuation system may include a mechanical console with keys / buttons to control or check the condition of components in the smoke evacuation system

58100. In some instances, the smoke evacuation console on the 58170 display device may look similar to the mechanical console, for example through a standard configuration. In this case, the 58170 display device can display a (small) icon, for example in a corner of the 58170 display device, which can enable the user to access a menu structure that, when activated, shows more adjustment options.

[00246] In some examples, the 58170 display device can operate interactively with other display devices (for example the central controller screen 135) in the surgical system 100. For example, the 58170 display device can act as a display device main when the 58105 smoke evacuation device is not connected to the central controller 106. When the 58105 smoke evacuation device is connected to the central controller 106, the 58170 display device can act as a secondary display device while the controller screen central 135 acts as a primary display device. In that case, the 58170 display device may also include control buttons to control not only the 58105 smoke evacuation device, but also the central controller 106. In some instances, the central controller screen 135 and / or the display device 58170 may include an icon that may enable the central controller screen 135 to become an input device for the 58170 display device and vice versa.

[00247] In some examples, one or more components of the surgical system may be disposable / reusable, including the filtration device 58150, the filtration components in the filtration device 58150, the fluid collector 50760 (for example, including the reservoir of fluid 50774), the air hose 50636, the 50630 electrosurgical instrument (for example the Zip Pen® pen), the blade on the surgical instrument, or any of the components of the 58100 smoke evacuation system. Dual filters for large and small droplets connected in series

[00248] The fluid extracted from a surgical site by a smoke evacuation system may contain liquid (for example, large and small droplets) and various particles in addition to the smoke, which can be generated during a surgical procedure. The combination of different types and / or states of matter present in the evacuated fluid can make it difficult to filter the fluid removed from the surgical site. In addition, some types of matter in the fluid can be harmful to certain filters in the smoke evacuation system. For example, the presence of liquid droplets in the fluid can damage certain filters, such as particulate / charcoal filters, which can be very expensive. In addition, these filters can be easily damaged / clogged not only by large droplets, but also by relatively small droplets.

[00249] Aspects of the present description can solve the above mentioned deficiencies. In certain cases, a surgical evacuation system may include a pump, a motor operationally coupled to the pump, and a flow path coupled in fluid communication with the pump. The flow path may include a first fluid filter configured to extract a large droplet in a fluid that moves through the flow path, and a second fluid filter configured to extract a small droplet in the fluid. The first fluid filter can be coupled in series with the second fluid filter and positioned upstream of the second fluid filter. An outlet port for the second fluid filter can be coupled to an inlet port for a non-fluid filter, which can be damaged when moisture / droplets enter it. In certain cases, the surgical evacuation system may also include one or more recirculation channels configured to recirculate the fluid leaving the first fluid filter or the second fluid filter.

[00250] Thus, the present description may enable the smoke evacuation system to extract not only large droplets, but also small droplets before the fluid enters a non-fluid filter, which can be damaged by both large and small droplets. In addition, the second fluid filter can use a filter element that can be more sophisticated and more expensive than the components used in the first fluid filter, and such a filter element in the second fluid filter tends to be easily and quickly clogged by droplets big ones. In this description, by providing the first fluid filter configured to extract large droplets upstream of the second fluid filter, the evacuation system can effectively protect the second fluid filter from damage and / or obstructions, thereby saving energy for the pump and money. Finally, by providing one or more recirculation channels, the present invention allows the evacuation system to ensure that no droplets with potential for damage to filters for non-fluids enter the filter for non-fluids.

[00251] Figure 28 shows a schematic diagram of a cabinet for a smoke evacuation system 59100, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. The smoke evacuation system 59100 may include an evacuation cabinet 59105 and a fluid collector 59110 coupled to the evacuation cabinet 59105. The evacuation system 59100 may also include a first fluid filtration device 59120, a second filtration device for fluids 59130, a 59140 non-fluid filtration device, and a 59170 pump. The 59170 pump can be operationally coupled to a motor. The smoke evacuation system 59100 can additionally include a plurality of 59190A-K sensors and intelligent controls. The fluid collector 59110, the non-fluid filtration device 59140 and the pump 59170 can be similar to the examples (for example, the fluid collector, the ULPA filter, the charcoal filter, the spiral pump) represented in the Figures 18 and 19. The fluid collector 59110, the filtration devices

59120, 59130, 59140 and pump 59170 can be aligned sequentially along a flow path through the evacuator cabinet 59105 between inlet 59112 and outlet 59175. As used here, a 59140 non-fluid filtration device can refer to to a filtration device or filter (for example, particulate / charcoal filters) that can be vulnerable to droplets and can be damaged when droplets enter it.

[00252] In several cases, the plurality of sensors may include one or more fluid detection sensors, one or more pressure sensors, one or more particle sensors and / or one or more chemical sensors. The multiple 59190A-K sensors can be similar to the sensors (for example, sensors 50830, 50832, 50836, 50840, 50838, 50846, 50848, 50850, 50854, 50852) shown in Figures 18 and 19. For example, a pressure sensor can be positioned to detect pressure within the 59100 evacuation system, such as within the evacuator cabinet

59105. For example, a pressure sensor can be positioned upstream of one of the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 (for example the sensor 59190E), between the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 and the pump 59170 (for example the 59190G sensor), and / or positioned downstream of the 59170 pump (for example the 59190I sensor). In certain cases, a 59190K pressure sensor can be positioned outside the 59100 evacuation system to detect pressure in the environment.

[00253] Similarly, a 59190F, 59190H particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles within the 59100 evacuation system, such as inside the 59105 evacuator cabinet. A particle sensor can be positioned upstream of one of the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 (e.g. sensor 59190F), between filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 and pump 59170, and / or downstream of pump 59170 (e.g. sensor 59190H), for example. In several cases, a 59190J particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles in the environment to determine air quality in the operating room, for example.

[00254] In several cases, a fluid detection sensor can be positioned upstream of one of the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 (for example the sensor 59190A, 59190C, 59190D), between the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 and pump 59170, downstream of pump 59170, or outside the evacuation cabinet 59106. Similarly, a chemical sensor can be positioned upstream of one of the filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 (for example the 59190B sensor) , between filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140 and pump 59170, downstream of pump 59170, or outside the evacuation cabinet 59106.

[00255] Those skilled in the art will understand that certain evacuation systems may not include each of the sensors represented in Figure 28 and / or may include one or more additional sensors. The components in the 59100 evacuation system can be modular and / or replaceable. For example, fluid collector 59110, filtration devices 59120, 59130, 59140, pump 59170 and the plurality of sensors 59190A-K can be modular and / or replaceable.

[00256] The multiple 59190A-K sensors can detect various parameters of the fluid moving through the fluid path in the 59105 evacuation cabinet and / or the environment. In several cases, the 59105 evacuation cabinet and / or a modular component compatible with the 59105 cabinet may include a processor, which can be configured to receive input from one or more sensors (for example, 59190A-K) and / or to communicate outputs to one or more triggers.

[00257] As used here, the fluid can refer to any material that enters inlet 59112, for example, coming from a suction duct, including liquids, gases, vapors, smoke or combinations thereof. The fluids can be of biological origin and / or can be introduced into the surgical site from an external source during a procedure. Fluids may also include water, saline, lymph, blood, exudate and / or purulent discharge. In addition, fluids can also include particulates or other materials (for example, cellular matter or debris) that are released by the evacuation system. In one example, such particulates may be suspended in the fluid.

[00258] In operation, the fluid from a surgical site can be drained to the 59112 inlet of the 59105 evacuator cabinet through the 59110 fluid collector. The flow path through the 59105 cabinet in Figure 28 can be a sealed conduit or tube that extends between the various components in line. In many cases, fluid can flow through a 59190A fluid detection sensor and a 59190B chemical sensor to the first 59120 fluid filtration device. A 59190A fluid detection sensor can detect fluid particles in the fluid / smoke and the 59190B chemical sensor can detect chemical properties of the fluid. The 59190A fluid detection sensor can also detect the concentration (e.g. liquid / gas ratio) and / or the droplet size in the fluid near the 59190A fluid detection sensor. The first 59120 fluid filtration device can extract large droplets in the fluid. Then, the fluid can be directed to flow into the second 59130 fluid filter. In the second 59130 fluid filter, small droplets in the fluid exiting the first 59120 fluid filtration device can be extracted. The fluid can then flow through the second fluid filtration device

59130 and can be directed to flow into the 59140 non-fluid filtration device.

[00259] At the entrance of the 59140 non-fluid filtration device, the fluid can flow through a 59190F laser particle counter and a 59190E pressure sensor. The fluid can be filtered through one or more non-fluid filters 59144, 59146. In certain cases, the 59140 non-fluid filtration device shown in Figure 28 may include more and / or less levels of filtration. For example, the 59140 non-fluid filtration device may include one or more filter layers selected from the following group of filters: a coarse filter medium filter, a fine filter medium filter and a sorbent-based filter. The coarse filter medium filter can be a low air resistance filter, which can be comprised of fiberglass, polyester and / or pleated filters, for example. The fine filter medium filter can be a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) and / or an ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA). The sorbent-based filter can be an activated carbon filter (for example charcoal filter). In certain cases, the 59140 non-fluid filtration device may also include one or more baffles 59142 or similar structures, on which the fluid entering the 59140 non-fluid filtration device may condense. In certain cases, the deflector 59142 may be located near the entry port of the 59140 non-fluid filtration device. In certain other cases, the 59142 deflector may be positioned at any other suitable location on the 59140 non-fluid filtration device.

[00260] When exiting the 59140 non-fluid filtration device, fluid can flow through a 59190G pressure sensor and then continue along the 59148 flow path within the 59105 evacuator cabinet towards the 59170 pump. through the 59170 pump, the filtered fluid can flow through a 59190H laser particle sensor and a 59190I pressure sensor at outlet 59175 of the 59105 evacuator cabinet. The 59105 evacuator cabinet can also include an air quality particle sensor 59190J and a 59190K ambient pressure sensor to detect various environmental properties such as the environment within the operating room.

[00261] In several cases, the 59110 fluid collector or the first 59120 fluid filtration device can be configured to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. For example, the geometry of the fluid collector 59110 or the first fluid filtration device 59120 can be selected to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. In certain cases, the fluid collector 59110 or first fluid filtration device 59120 may include one or more deflectors 59126 and / or splash screens to prevent captured fluid from splashing out of the fluid collector 59110 or the first filtration device fluid 59120. In one or more cases, the fluid collector 59110 / first fluid filtration device 59120 may include sensors to detect the volume of fluid within the fluid collector 59110 / first fluid filtration device 59120 and / or if the fluid collector 59110 / first fluid filtration device 59120 is completely filled. The fluid collector 59110 / first fluid filtration device 59120 may include a valve to empty the fluid in the fluid reservoir 59114 of the fluid collector 59110 or in the fluid reservoir 59125 of the first fluid filtration device 59120.

[00262] The various sensors in the 59100 evacuation system can communicate with a controller, which can be incorporated into the 59100 evacuation system and / or can be a component of another surgical instrument and / or a central surgical controller. The controller can adjust one or more operating parameters of the evacuator system (for example an engine for the evacuator pump) based on inputs provided by one or more sensors or operating parameters from another device, such as an electrosurgical tool and / or an imaging device based on inputs provided by one or more sensors.

[00263] Again with reference to Figure 28, in certain cases, the first fluid filtration device 59120 can be configured to extract a large droplet in the fluid that moves through the flow path, and the second fluid filtration device 59130 can be configured to extract a small droplet in the fluid. As shown in Figure 28, the first 59120 fluid filtration device can be coupled in series with the second 59130 fluid filtration device. The first 59120 fluid filtration device can be positioned upstream of the second 59130 fluid filtration device. In certain cases, an outlet port of the second 59130 fluid filtration device may be coupled to an inlet port of a 59140 non-fluid filtration device.

[00264] As used here, a droplet larger than 10 to 20 µm can be considered as a large droplet. In addition, a droplet smaller than 10 to 20 µm can be considered as a small droplet. In certain cases, the first 59120 fluid filtration device can remove most droplets larger than 20 µm. In certain cases, the first 59120 fluid filtration device can remove at least 85% of droplets greater than 20 µm, more than 90% of droplets greater than 20 µm, more than 95% of droplets greater than 20 µm, more than 99 % of droplets greater than 20 µm, more than 99.9% of droplets greater than 20 µm, or more than 99.99% of droplets greater than 20 µm.

[00265] Additionally or alternatively, the first 59120 fluid filtration device can remove most droplets larger than 10 µm. In certain cases, the first 59120 fluid filtration device can remove at least 85% of droplets greater than 10 µm, more than 90% of droplets greater than 10 µm, more than 95% of droplets greater than 10 µm, more than 99 % of droplets greater than 10 µm, more than 99.9% of droplets greater than 10 µm, or more than 99.99% of droplets greater than 10 µm.

[00266] The second 59130 fluid filtration device can remove most droplets larger than 1 µm, for example. In certain cases, the second 59130 fluid filtration device can remove at least 85% of droplets greater than 1 µm, more than 90% of droplets greater than 1 µm, more than 95% of droplets greater than 1 µm, more than 99 % of droplets greater than 1 µm, more than 99.9% of droplets greater than 1 µm, or more than 99.99% of droplets greater than 1 µm.

[00267] In addition or alternatively, the second 59130 fluid filtration device can remove most droplets greater than 0.1 µm, for example. In certain cases, the second 59130 fluid filtration device can remove at least 85% of droplets greater than 0.1 µm, more than 90% of droplets greater than 0.1 µm, more than 95% of droplets greater than 0, 1 µm, more than 99% of droplets greater than 0.1 µm, more than 99.9% of droplets greater than 0.1 µm or more than 99.99% of droplets greater than 0.1 µm.

[00268] In certain cases, the first fluid filtration device 59120 may include a 59122 bypass valve. The 59122 bypass valve may be similar to the 50834, 50934 bypass valves shown in Figures 18 and 19. For example, when the bypass valve 59122 is in a first position, fluid intake through the bypass valve 59122 can be directed along a first path 59123. When the bypass valve 59122 is in a second position, as shown in Figure 28, the fluid intake through the bypass valve 59122 can be directed along a second path 59124. In certain cases, the first path 59123 may correspond to a flow path where almost no liquid / droplet has been detected in the fluid or when the ratio detected liquid / gas is below a threshold value. In certain other cases, the first 59123 path may correspond to a flow path in which the size of most detected droplets (for example, 80%, 90%, 95% or 99%) is less than a predetermined threshold value (for example, example 10 to 20 µm).

[00269] In certain cases, the second path 59124 may correspond to a flow path in which the presence of liquid / droplet was detected in the fluid, for example aerosol, or when the liquid / gas ratio detected is equal to or greater than the value limit. In certain other cases, the second path 59124 may correspond to a flow path in which the size of most detected droplets is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value (for example, 10 to 20 µm). The 59190A fluid detection sensor can be configured to detect the presence of liquid droplets or aerosols in the fluid, the liquid / gas ratio and / or the droplet / aerosol size. For example, the fluid detection sensor 59190A can be positioned at and / or close to the outlet port of the fluid collector 59110 and / or the inlet port of the first 59120 fluid filtration device. A liquid / gas ratio equal to or greater than the limit value (for example 1: 2; 1: 1; 2: 1; 5: 1; 10: 1) can be considered an aerosol. The first path 59123 can deviate from the first fluid filtration device 59120, and the second path 59124 can direct the fluid through the first fluid filtration device 59120 to capture large droplets in the fluid before the fluid is directed into the second device 59130 fluid filtration system. By selecting a fluid path based on the liquid / gas ratio or the size of the droplets in the fluid, the efficiency of the 59100 surgical evacuation system can be improved.

[00270] As discussed above, if the 59190A fluid detection sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio equal to or greater than a limit value, a droplet greater than a limit size, or a combination of both, fluid intake can be bypassed for the second path 59124 before entering the second fluid filtration device 59130. The second path 59124 can be configured to condense liquid droplets on the flow path. For example, second path 59124 can include a plurality of baffles 591266 or other similar structures, on which the fluid can be configured to condense. As the fluid flows through the second path 59124, the liquid can condense on the 59126 baffles, and can be directed to drip and fall into the 59125 fluid reservoir.

[00271] On the other hand, if the 59190A fluid detection sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio below the limit value, a droplet less than a limit size, or a combination of both, fluid intake can be directed directly to the second fluid filtration device 59130. The bypass valve 59122 can be positioned to bypass the second fluid path 59124 and the first fluid filtration device 59120 so that the fluid flows directly into the second fluid filtration device

59130. Due to the diversion of the first 59120 fluid filtration device, the 59100 surgical evacuation system may require less energy from the engine that drives the 59170 pump. For example, the engine may require more energy to drain an aerosol through the evacuation system. surgical procedure than to drain non-aerosol smoke through the surgical evacuation system.

[00272] In certain cases, the second 59130 fluid filtration device may include a 59135 filter that is configured to capture small droplets (for example less than 10 to 20 µm). In certain cases, the 59135 filter can be configured to extract droplets larger than a limit size (for example 0.1 to 1 µm). In certain cases, the 59135 filter can be at least one of a membrane filter, a honeycomb filter and / or a porous structure filter (for example, fine porous block), or any other suitable filter capable of extracting small droplets or droplets greater than 0.1 to 1 µm. The fluid exiting the second fluid filtration device 59130 may flow into the non-fluid filtration device 59140. In certain cases, the second fluid filtration device 59130 may also include one or more deflectors or similar structures, over the which the fluid entering the second fluid filtration device may condense. In certain cases, the deflectors may be located near the inlet port of the second 59130 fluid filtration device. In certain other cases, the deflectors may be positioned in any other suitable location on the second 50130 fluid filtration device.

[00273] Still referring to Figure 28, the evacuation system 59100 can also include a first recirculation channel 59150. The inlet port 59152 of the first recirculation channel 59150 can be positioned between the second fluid filtration device 59130 and the 59140 non-fluid filtration device. The first 59150 recirculation channel can be configured to recirculate the fluid leaving the second 59130 fluid filtration device.

[00274] The fluid directed into the first 59150 recirculation channel can be injected into the fluid path upstream of the second 59130 fluid filtration device. For example, the fluid directed into the first 59150 recirculation channel can be injected into the first fluid filtration device 59120 (for example, fluid reservoir 59125), as illustrated in Figure

28. In certain other cases, fluid directed into the first recirculation channel 59150 can be injected into a portion upstream of the second fluid filtration device 59130 (for example the inlet port of the second fluid filtration device 59130) or a flow path between the first 59120 fluid filtration device and the second fluid filtration device

59130.

[00275] In certain cases, the first recirculation channel 59150 (for example a portion of the first recirculation channel 59150 next to the inlet port 59152) may extend downwards from the inlet port 59152 of the first recirculation channel

59150. This can allow the large droplet or small droplet in the fluid exiting the second fluid filtration device 59130 to be directed to the first recirculation channel 59150 by gravity.

[00276] In certain cases, the 59100 evacuation system may also include a first 59155 recirculation valve. The first 59155 recirculation valve can be configured to close and / or open the first 59150 recirculation channel. recirculation 59155 is opened, the fluid leaving the second fluid filtration device 59130 can be directed into the first recirculation channel 59150. In certain cases, the 59100 evacuation system may additionally include a 59190D fluid detection sensor. The 59190D fluid detection sensor can be positioned close to the first 59155 recirculation valve. The 59190D fluid detection sensor can be similar to the 59190A fluid detection sensor. The 59190D fluid detection sensor can be configured to detect a fluid parameter (for example the droplet size in the fluid, the liquid / gas ratio). The first recirculation valve 59155 can open the first recirculation channel 59150 when the parameter detected by the fluid detection sensor 59190D is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value. For example, if the 59190D fluid detection sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio equal to or greater than a threshold value (for example, 1: 2; 1: 1; 2: 1; 5: 1; 10: 1) and / or a droplet size greater than a threshold value (for example, 0.1 to 1 µm), the flow out of the second 59130 fluid filtration device can be diverted to the first recirculation channel. In this way, the 59100 evacuation system can prevent moisture / droplets that can damage the 59144, 59146 filters from entering the 59140 non-fluid filtration device. If the 59190D fluid detection sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio below a limit value and / or a droplet size less than a limit value (for example, 0.1 to 1 µm), the first 59155 recirculation valve can be closed so that the fluid leaving the second fluid filtration device 59130 is directed into the 59140 non-fluid filtration device.

[00277] In certain cases, the fluid recirculated through the first recirculation channel 59150 can flow through the first fluid filtration device 59120 and / or through the second fluid filtration device 59130 again, and the recirculation steps can be repeated until the parameter detected by the 59190D fluid detection sensor is below a predetermined threshold value. In certain cases, if the repetition number is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value (for example 5 times, 10 times, or any other suitable value greater than 0), which may indicate that some components in the first / second control devices 59120/59130 fluid filtration is not working properly (for example due to sensor failures, filter / deflector damage or obstruction), the first / second 59120/59130 fluid filtration devices or the 59100 evacuation system may be disabled, for example by stopping the 59170 pump or the engine. In that case, the 59100 evacuation system processor can notify the 59100 evacuation system or the user that there is an error in the first / second 59120/59130 fluid filtration devices.

[00278] In certain cases, the evacuation system 59100 may also include a second recirculation channel 59160. An inlet port 59162 of the second recirculation channel 59160 can be positioned between the first fluid filtration device 59120 and the second flow device fluid filtration 59130. The second recirculation channel 59160 can be configured to recirculate the fluid leaving the first fluid filter 59120. In certain cases, fluid directed into the second recirculation channel 59160 can be injected into the fluid path a upstream of the first 59120 fluid filtration device (for example, the 59114 reservoir or the 59110 fluid collector) or an upstream portion of the first 59120 fluid filtration device (for example, the first fluid inlet port of the reservoir 59125 of the first fluid filtration device 59120). In certain cases, the second recirculation channel 59160 (for example a portion of the second recirculation channel 59160 next to the inlet port 59162) may extend downwardly from the inlet port 59162 of the second recirculation channel 59160. This may enable that the large droplet or small droplet in the fluid exiting the first fluid filtration device 59120 is directed to the second recirculation channel 59160 by gravity.

[00279] In certain cases, the 59100 evacuation system may additionally include a second 59165 recirculation valve. The second 59165 recirculation valve can be configured to close and / or open the second 59160 recirculation channel. recirculation is opened, the fluid exiting the first fluid filtration device 59120 can be recirculated through the second recirculation channel 59160.

[00280] In certain cases, the 59100 evacuation system may also use a 59190C fluid detection sensor to control the second 59165 recirculation valve. The 59190C fluid detection sensor may be similar to the 59190A fluid detection sensor, D The 59190C fluid sensor can be positioned close to the second 59165 recirculation valve. The 59190C fluid sensor can be configured to detect a fluid parameter (for example the droplet size in the fluid, the liquid / gas ratio). The second recirculation valve 59165 can open the second recirculation channel 59160 when the parameter detected by the fluid detection sensor 59190C is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value. For example, if the 59190C fluid detection sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio equal to or greater than a threshold value (for example, 1: 2; 1: 1; 2: 1; 5: 1; 10: 1) and / or a droplet size greater than a limit value (for example, 10 to 20 µm), the fluid leaving the first fluid filtration device 59120 can be diverted to the second recirculation channel 59160. In this way, the evacuation system 59100 can prevent large droplets / moisture that can easily and / or quickly clog the 59135 filter from entering the second 59140 fluid filtration device. If the 59190C fluid sensor detects a liquid / gas ratio below a threshold value and / or a droplet size less than a limit value (for example, 10 to 20 µm), the second 59165 recirculation valve can be closed so that the fluid leaving the first fluid filtration device 59120 is directed into the second flow device fluid filtration 59130.

[00281] In certain cases, the fluid recirculated through the second recirculation channel 59160 can flow through the first fluid filtration device 59120 again, and the recirculation steps can be repeated until the parameter detected by the fluid detection sensor 59190C stay below a predetermined limit value. In certain cases, if the repetition number is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value (for example 5 times, 10 times, or any other suitable value greater than 0), which may indicate that some components in the first filtration device of 59120 fluids are not working properly (for example due to sensor failures, damage or obstructions in the deflectors), the first 59120 fluid filtration device or the 59100 evacuation system may be disabled, for example, by stopping the 59170 pump or the engine. In that case, the 59100 evacuation system processor can notify the 59100 evacuation system or the user that there is an error in the first 59120 fluid filtration device.

[00282] In certain cases, the first 59155 recirculation valve can be configured to open and / or close the flow path between the second fluid filtration device 59130 and the non-fluid filtration device 59140. For example, when the parameter detected by the fluid detection sensor 59190D is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value, the first recirculation valve 59155 opens the first recirculation channel 59150 and closes the flow path between the second fluid filtration device 59130 and the device filtration of 59140 non-fluids at the same time. Accordingly, the present description can advantageously enable the 59100 evacuation system to divert almost all of the fluid leaving the second fluid filtration device 59130, which may include droplets that can damage the filters 59144, 59146 of the non-fluid filtration device 59140, into the first recirculation channel 59150. In addition, in certain cases, closing the first recirculating channel 59150 and opening the flow path between the second fluid filtration device 59130 and the non-fluid filtration device 59140 can be done with a single step / operation instead of multiple steps / operations. For example, as illustrated in Figure 28, when the first 59155 recirculation valve is opened 90 degrees, it closes the flow path between the second fluid filtration device 59130 and the non-fluid filtration device 59140.

[00283] Similarly, in certain cases, the second 59165 recirculation valve can be configured to open and / or close the flow path between the first fluid filtration device 59120 and the second non-fluid filtration device 59130. In certain cases, when the parameter detected by the fluid detection sensor 59190C is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value, the second recirculation valve 59165 can open the second recirculation channel 59160 and close the flow path between the first fluid filtration 59120 and the second fluid filtration device 59130 at the same time. Accordingly, the present description can advantageously enable the 59100 evacuation system to divert almost all of the fluid leaving the first fluid filtration device 59120, which can include large droplets that can easily and quickly clog the second fluid filtration device 59130 and / or the filter 59135 of the second fluid filtration device 59130, into the second recirculation channel 59160. In addition, in certain cases, the closing of the second recirculation channel 59160 and the opening of the flow path between the first device fluid filtration 59120 and the second fluid filtration device 59130 can be made with a single step / operation instead of multiple steps / operations. For example, as illustrated in Figure 28, when the second 59165 recirculation valve is opened 90 degrees, it closes the flow path between the first fluid filtration device 59120 and the second fluid filtration device 59130. This can advantageously reduce the number of signals / commands between the processor and components in the 59100 evacuation system, preventing possible signal delay and component malfunction due to signal delay.

[00284] In certain cases, the 59100 evacuation system may include one or more centrifugal blower arrangements. For example, a first 59180A centrifugal blower (e.g. squirrel cage) can be provided on the flow path 59148 between the 59140 non-fluid filtration device and the 59170 pump, and a second 59180B centrifugal blower can be provided on the first channel of recirculation 59150. The first centrifugal blower 59180A can be operationally coupled to the second centrifugal blower 59180B, for example by means of one or more gears 59185A. For example, when the first 59155 recirculation valve is opened and the 59170 pump is activated, the suction force generated by the 59170 pump can generate rotation of the first 59180A centrifugal blower, which can be transferred to the second 59180B centrifugal blower. gear 59185A, which extracts the recirculated fluid through the first 59150 recirculation channel.

[00285] Similarly, a third 59180C centrifugal blower can be provided for the second 59160 recirculation channel. In certain cases, the third 59180C centrifugal blower can be operationally coupled to the first 59180A centrifugal blower, for example, by means of or more gears 59185A-B and the second centrifugal blower 59180B, as shown in Figure 28. In this case, when the second recirculation valve 59165 is opened and pump 59170 is activated, the suction force generated by pump 59170 can generate rotation of the first centrifugal blower 59180A, which can be transferred to the second centrifugal blower 59180B and, in turn, to the third centrifugal blower 59180C, which extracts the fluid recirculated through the second recirculation channel 59160. In certain other cases, the third centrifugal blower 59180C can be operationally coupled to the first 59180A centrifugal blower, for example by means of gears 59185B without the second blower centrifuge 59180B is disposed between the third and the first blowers. In this case, when the second recirculation valve 59165 is opened and the pump 59170 is activated, the suction force generated by the pump 59170 can generate rotation of the first centrifugal blower 59180A, which can be transferred to the third centrifugal blower 59180C, by means of one or more gears 59185B, which draws the recirculated fluid through the second recirculation channel 59160. Thus, the present description can advantageously use less motor / pump energy by reusing motor / pump energy to generate suction force for the first and / or second recirculation channels 59150, 59160. In certain other cases, the first recirculation channel 59150 and / or the second recirculation channel 59160 can be provided with a separate pump to generate the suction force.

[00286] The reader should readily consider that the various surgical evacuation systems and components described herein can be incorporated into an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, a central surgical controller and / or a robotic system. For example, a surgical evacuation system can communicate data to a central surgical controller, a robotic system and / or an interactive surgical system implemented by a computer and / or it can receive data from a central surgical controller, a robotic system and / or an interactive surgical system implemented by computer. Several examples of computer-implemented interactive surgical systems, robotic systems and central surgical controllers are described in more detail below.

[00287] Figure 29 illustrates an electrosurgical system 60000, according to at least one aspect of the present description. The 60000 electrosurgical system includes a 60002 generator, a 60004 electrosurgical instrument and a 60006 return block. The 60002 generator supplies alternating current at radio frequency levels to the 60004 electrosurgical instrument through a first 60008 conductor / cable. The 60004 electrosurgical instrument includes a tip electrode (ie, an active electrode) that can be positioned on a patient's target tissue. The 60004 electrosurgical instrument receives alternating current from the 60002 generator and supplies the alternating current to a 60010 patient's target tissue through the electrode tip. Alternating current is received in the target tissue, and the resistance of the tissue creates heat that provides the desired effect (for example, sealing and / or cutting) at the surgical site. The alternating current is conducted through the patient's body and, finally, is received by the return block 60006. The alternating current received by the return block 60006 is taken back to the generator 60002 through a second conductor / cable 60012 to complete the closed path followed by alternating current.

[00288] According to several aspects, the generator 60002 is similar to the generator 900 described above and can include, for example, a processor and a waveform generator similar to the processor

902 and the waveform generator 904 described above.

[00289] The 60004 electrosurgical instrument can be configured for monopolar operation in which the electrosurgical energy supplied by the 60002 generator is introduced into the patient's tissue through an active electrode of the 60004 surgical instrument and is returned to the 60002 generator through the 6006 return block According to several aspects, the 60004 electrosurgical instrument includes a handpiece or pencil and an electrode tip. The electrode tip serves as the active electrode of the 60000 electrosurgical system and introduces electrosurgical energy to a 60010 patient's target tissue. Specifically, an electrical discharge is provided to the 60010 patient by the electrode tip to cause the 60010 patient's cell matter to heat up that is in close contact with or in a position adjacent to the electrode tip. The heating of the tissue occurs at a suitably high temperature to enable the 60004 electrosurgical instrument to be used to perform electrosurgery.

[00290] Figure 30 illustrates return block 60006 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29, according to at least one aspect of the present description. The 60006 return block may be similar to the patient's MEGA SOFT® return electrode commercially available from Megadyne Medical Products, Inc. in that the 60006 return block may include a sleeve or cover 60014, may be separated by a small distance from the patient's body, it can be capacitively coupled to the patient's body and is configured to withstand the amount of current introduced into the patient's body by the 60004 electrosurgical instrument, but it is different.

[00291] The 60006 return block is different from the patient's MEGA SOFT® return electrode commercially available from Megadyne Medical Products, Inc. in that instead of a return electrode, the return block includes a plurality of electrodes 60016 (see Figure 31) that can be capacitively coupled to the patient's body and are collectively configured to carry the amount of current introduced into the patient's body by the 60004 electrosurgical instrument. For this capacitive coupling, the patient's body acts effectively as a plate of a capacitor and, collectively, the plurality of electrodes in the return block effectively act together as the other plate of the capacitor. A more detailed description of the capacitive coupling can be found, for example, in US patent No. 6,214,000, entitled

CAPACITIVE REUSABLE ELECTROSURGICAL RETURN ELECTRODE, granted April 10, 2001, and in US patent no.

6,582,424, entitled CAPACITIVE REUSABLE ELECTROSURGICAL RETURN ELECTRODE, granted on June 24, 2003, the content of which is incorporated herein by reference. Although the 60006 return block is shown in Figure 30 as being substantially rectangular, it will be recognized that the 60006 return block can be of any suitable shape.

[00292] Figure 31 illustrates a plurality of electrodes 60016 from return block 60006 of Figure 30, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. For the sake of clarity, the sleeve or cover 60014 of the 60006 return block is not shown in Figure

31. Although four 60016 electrodes are shown in Figure 31, it will be recognized that the 60006 return block can include any number of 60016 electrodes. For example, according to several aspects, the 60006 return block includes sixteen 60016 electrodes. although the individual 60016 electrodes are shown in Figure 31 as being substantially rectangular, it will be recognized that the individual electrodes can have any suitable shape.

[00293] The 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block can be considered return electrodes of the 60000 electrosurgical system of Figure 29 and can also be considered segmented electrodes, since the 60016 electrodes can be selectively decoupled from the patient's body and / or the generator 60002. The 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block can also be coupled together to act effectively as a large electrode. For example, according to several aspects, each of the 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block can be connected by the respective conductive members 60018 to inputs of a 60020 switching device, as shown in Figure 24. When the 60020 switching device is in an open position, as shown in Figure 31, the respective 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block are decoupled from each other, as well as from the patient body and / or the 60002 generator. In contrast, when the 60020 switching device is in a In the closed position, the respective 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block are coupled together to act effectively as a large electrode.

[00294] The switching device 60020 can be controlled by a processing circuit (for example, a processing circuit of the generator 60002 of the electrosurgical system, a processing circuit of the central surgical controller 206, a processing circuit of the central surgical controller 106 , etc.). For the sake of simplicity, the processing circuit is not shown in Figure 31. According to several aspects, the switching device 60020 shown in Figure 31 can be incorporated in the return block 60006. According to other aspects, the switching device 60006 shown in Figure 31 can be incorporated into the second conductor / cable 60012 of the 60000 electrosurgical system of Figure 29. The return block 60006 can also include a plurality of detection devices

60022 (see Figure 32).

[00295] Being able to couple the plurality of 60016 electrodes together for use during an electrosurgical procedure, the total effective size of the 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block is large enough and / or has sufficient surface area to maintain the density of current low enough to mitigate the likelihood of any unwanted burns on patient 60010.

[00296] Figure 32 illustrates an array of detection devices 60022 of return block 60006 of Figure 30, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. For the sake of clarity, the sleeve or cover 60014 of the 60006 return block is not shown in Figure 32. According to various aspects, the number of detection devices 60022 corresponds to the number of electrodes 60016 so that there is a detection device 60022 for each 60016 electrode, and each 60022 detection device is mounted or integrated with a corresponding 60016 electrode. However, although the number of 60022 detection devices shown in Figure 32 corresponds to the number of 60016 electrodes, it will be recognized that the 60006 return block can include any number of 60022 detection devices. For example, for aspects of the 60006 return block that include sixteen 60016 electrodes, the 60006 return block can include only four or eight detection devices

60022. Although the 60022 detection devices are shown in Figure 32 as being centered on the corresponding 60016 electrodes, it will be recognized that the 60022 detection devices can be positioned over any portion of the corresponding 60016 electrodes and can be positioned differently on different electrodes 60016.

[00297] The 60022 detection devices are configured to detect a monopolar nerve control signal applied to the patient and / or a movement of a patient's anatomical feature (eg muscle contraction) resulting from the application of the nerve control signal . The monopolar nerve control signal can be applied by the electrosurgical instrument 60004 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29 or it can be applied by a different surgical instrument that is coupled to a different generator. Each 60022 detection device can include, for example, a pressure sensor, an accelerometer, combinations thereof, etc. and is configured to emit a signal indicative of the detected nerve control signal and / or the detected movement of an anatomical feature of the patient. Such pressure sensors may include, for example, piezoresistive stress meters, capacitive pressure sensors, electromagnetic pressure sensors and / or piezoelectric pressure sensors. Such accelerometers may include, for example, mechanical accelerometers, capacitive accelerometers, piezoelectric accelerometers, electromagnetic accelerometers and / or microelectromechanical system accelerometers ("MEMS" - microelectromechanical system). The respective output signals of the respective 60022 detection devices can be in the form of analog and / or digital signals.

[00298] Using Coulomb's law and the respective locations of the active electrode of the 60004 electrosurgical instrument, the patient's body and the respective 60022 detection devices, the respective output signals from the respective 60022 detection devices, which are indicative of a signal of detected nerve control and / or movement of a patient's anatomical feature, can be analyzed to determine the location of a nerve within the patient's body. Coulomb's law states that E = K (Q / r2), where E is the threshold current needed in a nerve to stimulate the nerve, K is a constant, Q is the minimum current of the nerve stimulation electrode and r is the distance from nerve. The further away the nerve stimulation electrode is from the nerve, the greater the proportionally necessary current to stimulate the nerve. A constant current stimulus can thus be used to estimate the distance between the nerve stimulation electrode and the nerve. In general, the respective strengths of the output signals from the respective 60022 detection devices are indicative of how much the respective 60022 detection devices are close to or away from the 60010 patient's stimulated nerve.

[00299] According to various aspects, the analysis of the respective output signals of the respective 60022 detection devices can be performed by a processing circuit of the generator 60002 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29, by a processing circuit of a system of nerve monitoring that is separated from generator 60002 of the 60000 electrosurgical system of Figure 29, by a central surgical controller processing circuit 206, by a central surgical controller processing circuit 106, etc. The analysis can be performed in real time or almost in real time. According to various aspects, the respective output signals serve as inputs to a monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm that is performed by the processing circuit.

[00300] As shown in Figure 32, according to several aspects, the output signals of the respective 60022 detection devices can be inserted into a 60024 single input and multiple output switching device (for example, a multiplexer) through of the respective conductive members 60026. By controlling the selection signals S 0, S1 for the 60024 multiple input - single output switching device, the 60024 multiple input - single output switching device can be controlled to emit only one of the output signals from the respective 60024 detection devices at a time for the analysis described above. For example, with reference to Figure 32, by setting the selection signals S0, S1 to 0.0, the output signal from detection device 60022 associated with electrode 60016 in the upper left corner of Figure 32 can be emitted by the switching device of multiple inputs and single output 60024 for analysis by the applicable processing circuit. By setting the selection signals S0, S1 to 0.1, the output signal from the 60022 detection device associated with the 60016 electrode in the upper right corner of Figure 32 can be output by the 60024 multiple input and single output switching device for analysis by the applicable processing circuit. By setting the selection signals S0, S1 to 1.0, the output signal from the 60022 detection device associated with the 60016 electrode in the lower left corner of Figure 32 can be output by the 60024 multiple input and single output switching device for analysis by the applicable processing circuit. By setting the selection signals S 0, S1 to 1.1, the output signal from detection device 60022 associated with electrode 60016 in the lower right corner of Figure 32 can be output from the multiple input and single output switching device 60024 to analysis by the applicable processing circuit.

[00301] The selection signals S0, S1 can be supplied to the 60024 single input and single output switching device by a processing circuit, such as a 60002 generator processing circuit of the 60000 electrosurgical system of Figure 29, by a processing circuit of a nerve monitoring system that is separated from the generator 60002 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29, by a processing circuit of the central surgical controller 206, by a processing circuit of the central surgical controller 106, etc. For the sake of simplicity, the processing circuit is not shown in Figure 32. Providing the various selection signals at a sufficiently fast rate, the output signals from the respective detection devices can be effectively scanned at a rate that allows for timely analysis of all output signals from the respective detection devices to determine the position of the stimulated nerve.

[00302] According to several aspects, the 60024 multiple input and single output switching device shown in Figure 32 can be incorporated in the 60006 return block. According to other aspects, the 60024 multiple input and single output switching device. shown in Figure 32 can be incorporated into the second conductor / cable 60012 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29.

[00303] The control of the 60024 multiple input and single output switching device has been described above in the context of a four input and output switching device, corresponding to the four 60022 detection devices shown in Figure 32. It will be recognized that, for In aspects where there are more than four 60022 detection devices (for example, sixteen detection devices), the output signals from the more than four 60022 detection devices will be output to the multiple input switching device - single output 60024 and more than two selection signals (for example, S0, S1, S2 and S3) are required to control the output of the multiple input switching device - single output 60024.

[00304] For aspects where the output signals from the 60024 detection devices are analog signals, the output from the multiple input and single output switching device 60024 can be converted into a corresponding digital signal by an analog / digital converter 60026 (shown dashed lines in Figure 32) before performing the analysis of the output signals of the applicable processing circuit.

[00305] By incorporating a matrix of 60022 detection devices into a plurality of 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block, the position of a patient's nerve in relation to the electrode tip of the 60004 electrosurgical instrument can be determined. The determined location of the nerve can be presented to the surgeon, thereby mitigating the likelihood that the surgeon will inadvertently injure or cut the nerve while using the electrode tip to cut the patient's target tissue 60010.

[00306] According to various aspects, the detection of the control signal and / or nerve movement of an anatomical characteristic of the patient by the detection devices 60022 can be performed while the electrodes 60016 of the return block 60006 are coupled to each other or while the 60016 electrodes are decoupled from each other. For example, regarding the detection when the respective 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block are decoupled from each other, after positioning the patient 60010 on the operating table, but before starting a surgical procedure, the 60006 return block it can be placed in a "detection mode" by controlling the 60020 switching device shown in Figure 31 to decouple the respective 60016 electrodes from the 60006 return block from each other. While the respective 60016 electrodes are decoupled from each other, a nerve and / or a nerve bundle can be stimulated with a 60004 electrosurgical instrument, as described above, and the respective output signals from the 60022 detection devices of the 60006 return block can be stimulated. be analyzed, as described above, to identify where the nerve, nerve bundle and / or nerve connections associated with them are located. The locations can be inserted into a monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm profile that can reside, for example, in a 60002 generator memory circuit, in a different generator memory circuit that is coupled to a different surgical instrument than the 60004 electrosurgical instrument. , etc. Once the locations are inserted into the monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm profile, the locations are effectively isolated from the capacitive operation of the 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block and are used as nodes for detecting the monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm profile to inform the surgeon, as the surgeon approaches a nerve and / or a nerve bundle during a tissue cutting procedure. According to several aspects, the surgeon can be informed of the location close to the nerve and / or nerve bundle by means of an audible warning, a visual warning, a vibrating alert, among others.

[00307] Regarding the realization of the detection when the respective electrodes 60016 of the return block 60006 are coupled to each other, according to several aspects, as described in more detail below with reference to Figure 33, the generator 60002 of the system electrosurgical 60000 from Figure 29 can generate a high frequency waveform (the alternating current in the radio frequency) that is modulated in a carrier wave, the carrier wave having a frequency low enough to stimulate a patient's nerve. This allows the detection of the nerve control signal and / or the movement of an anatomical feature to be concomitant with the capacitive coupling of the respective 60016 electrodes of the 60006 return block with the patient's body. By applying a specific waveform to patient 60010 and detecting a specific response, there is a high level of confidence that the movement of the anatomical feature is a result of the applied waveform and not just a general movement. Modulation can be adjusted over time to stimulate different nerve sizes. According to several aspects, the modulation can vary in amplitude over time in order to allow the applicable processing circuit to determine the distance the nerve and / or nerve bundle is from the signal without having to constantly stimulate the nerve and / or nerve bundle.

[00308] Figure 33 illustrates a 60030 method for simultaneously applying a nerve stimulation signal and electrosurgical energy to a patient, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. In this illustrative procedure, the 60002 generator generates 60032 alternating current at a radio frequency level as a high frequency waveform. According to several aspects, a 60002 generator waveform generator performs this function.

[00309] The generator 60002 generates 60034 a low frequency waveform that is configured to stimulate a patient's nerve; According to various aspects, the low frequency waveform is a monopolar nerve control signal and a 60002 generator waveform generator performs this function.

[00310] The 60002 generator uses 60036 the high frequency waveform generated in step 60032 to modulate the low frequency waveform generated in step 60034 to form a composite waveform. According to several aspects, a waveform generator from the 60002 generator performs this step. According to other modalities, a 60002 generator processing circuit performs this function.

[00311] The generator 60002 supplies 60038 the form of compound generated in step 60036 to the electrosurgical instrument 60004.

[00312] The electrode (that is, the active electrode) of the 60004 electrosurgical instrument applies 60040 to the composite waveform to patient 60010. The high frequency waveform operates to heat the target tissue of patient 60010 and exits the patient's body patient before being received by the 60016 electrodes of the return block

60006. The low-frequency waveform operates to stimulate a patient's nerve and / or cause a movement of a patient's anatomical feature (for example, a muscle contraction) resulting from the application of the nerve control signal.

[00313] The plurality of electrodes 60016 that are coupled to each other by means of the switching device 60020 receives 60042 the electrosurgical energy that leaves the patient's body and passes the electrosurgical energy back to the generator 60002 through the respective conductive members 60018, switching device 60020 and second conductor / cable 60012.

[00314] 60022 detection devices detect 60044 the monopolar nerve control signal applied to patient 60010 and / or a movement of an anatomical characteristic of patient 60010 (eg, a muscle contraction) resulting from the application of the nerve control signal and generate the corresponding corresponding output signals. The outputs of the respective 60022 detection devices are sampled as described above and sent to a processing circuit for analysis. The processing circuit can be, for example, a processing circuit of the generator 60002 of the electrosurgical system 60000 of Figure 29, a processing circuit of a nerve monitoring system that is separate from the generator 60002 of the electrosurgical system of Figure 29, by a central surgical controller processing circuit 206, by a central surgical controller processing circuit 106, etc.

[00315] The applicable processing circuit analyzes 60046 output signals and determines where the nerve, nerve bundle and / or nerve connections associated with the output signals are located. As described above, according to various aspects, the respective output signals can serve as inputs to a monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm that is performed by the processing circuit, and the monopolar nerve stimulation algorithm operates to help prevent the surgeon from cutting or damage the nerve, nerve bundle and / or nerve connections. Computer-implemented interactive surgical system

[00316] Referring to Figure 34, a computer-implemented interactive surgical system 100 includes one or more surgical systems 102 and a cloud-based system (e.g., cloud 104 which may include a remote server 113 coupled to a storage device 105). Each surgical system 102 includes at least one central surgical controller 106 in communication with the cloud 104 which can include a remote server 113. In one example, as illustrated in Figure 34, surgical system 102 includes a visualization system 108, a robotic system 110 and a smart handheld surgical instrument 112, which are configured to communicate with each other and / or with the central controller

106. In some respects, a surgical system 102 may include a number of M 106 central controllers, an N number of visualization systems 108, an O number of robotic systems 110, and a P number of smart, hand-held surgical instruments 112, where M, N, O, and P are whole numbers greater than or equal to one.

[00317] Figure 36 represents an example of a surgical system 102 being used to perform a surgical procedure on a patient who is lying on an operating table 114 in a surgical operating room 116. A robotic system 110 is used in the surgical procedure as a part of surgical system 102. Robotic system 110 includes a surgeon console 118, a patient car 120 (surgical robot), and a robotic central surgical controller

122. Patient carriage 120 can manipulate at least one removably attached surgical tool 117 through a minimally invasive incision in the patient's body while the surgeon views the surgical site through the surgeon's console 118. An image of the surgical site can be obtained by a medical imaging device 124, which can be manipulated by patient car 120 to guide imaging device 124. The robotic central surgical controller 122 can be used to process images of the surgical site for subsequent display to the surgeon through the surgeon console

118.

[00318] Other types of robotic systems can readily be adapted for use with the surgical system 102. Various examples of robotic systems and surgical instruments that are suitable for use with the present description are described in provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,339, entitled ROBOT ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on December 28, 2017, whose description is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00319] Several examples of cloud-based analysis that are performed by the cloud 104, and are suitable for use with the present description, are described in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611.340, entitled CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS , filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference, in its entirety.

[00320] In several aspects, the imaging device 124 includes at least one image sensor and one or more optical components. Suitable image sensors include, but are not limited to, charge-coupled device ("CCD") sensors and complementary metal oxide semiconductor sensors ("CMOS" - Complementary Metal-Oxide

Semiconductor).

[00321] The optical components of the imaging device 124 may include one or more light sources and / or one or more lenses. One or more light sources can be directed to illuminate portions of the surgical field. The one or more image sensors can receive reflected or refracted light from the surgical field, including reflected or refracted light from tissue and / or surgical instruments.

[00322] The one or more light sources can be configured to radiate electromagnetic energy in the visible spectrum, as well as in the invisible spectrum. The visible spectrum, sometimes called the optical spectrum or light spectrum, is that portion of the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to (that is, can be detected by) the human eye and can be called visible light or simply light. A typical human eye will respond to wavelengths in the air that are from about 380 nm to about 750 nm.

[00323] The invisible spectrum (that is, the non-luminous spectrum) is that portion of the electromagnetic spectrum located below and above the visible spectrum (that is, wavelengths below about 380 nm and above about 750 nm). The invisible spectrum is not detectable by the human eye. Wavelengths greater than about 750 nm are longer than the visible red spectrum, and they become invisible infrared (IR), microwaves, radio and electromagnetic radiation. Wavelengths shorter than about 380 nm are shorter than the ultraviolet spectrum, and they become invisible ultraviolet, x-ray, and electromagnetic gamma-ray radiation.

[00324] In several aspects, the imaging device 124 is configured for use in a minimally invasive procedure.

Examples of imaging devices suitable for use with the present description include, but are not limited to, an arthroscope, angioscope, bronchoscope, choledocoscope, colonoscope, cytoscope, duodenoscope, enteroscope, esophagus-duodenoscope (gastroscope), endoscope, laryngoscope, nasopharyngoscope neproscope, sigmoidoscope, thoracoscope and ureteroscope.

[00325] In one aspect, the imaging device uses multi-spectrum monitoring to discriminate topography and underlying structures. A multispectral image is one that captures image data within wavelength bands across the electromagnetic spectrum. Wavelengths can be separated by filters or using instruments that are sensitive to specific wavelengths, including light from frequencies beyond the visible light range, for example, IR and ultraviolet light. Spectral images can allow the extraction of additional information that the human eye cannot capture with its receivers for the colors red, green and blue. The use of multispectral imaging is described in more detail under the heading "Advanced Imaging Acquisition Module" in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is here incorporated as a reference in its entirety. Multispectral monitoring can be a useful tool for relocating a surgical field after a surgical task is completed to perform one or more of the tests previously described on the treated tissue.

[00326] It is axiomatic that strict sterilization of the operating room and surgical equipment is necessary during any surgery. The strict hygiene and sterilization conditions required in an "operating room", that is, an operating or treatment room, justify the highest possible sterilization of all medical devices and equipment. Part of this sterilization process is the need to sterilize anything that comes into contact with the patient or enters the sterile field, including imaging device 124 and its connectors and components. It will be understood that the sterile field can be considered a specified area, such as inside a tray or on a sterile towel, which is considered free of microorganisms, or the sterile field can be considered an area, immediately around a patient, who was prepared to perform a surgical procedure. The sterile field may include members of the brushing team, who are properly dressed, and all furniture and accessories in the area.

[00327] In various aspects, the visualization system 108 includes one or more imaging sensors, one or more image processing units, one or more storage arrays and one or more screens that are strategically arranged in relation to the sterile area, as illustrated in Figure 35. In one aspect, the display system 108 includes an interface for HL7, PACS and EMR. Various components of the 108 display system are described under the heading "Advanced Imaging Acquisition Module" in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein as a reference in its entirety.

[00328] As shown in Figure 35, a primary screen 119 is positioned in the sterile field to be visible to an operator on the operating table 114. In addition, a viewing tower 111 is positioned outside the sterile field. The display tower 111 includes a first non-sterile screen 107 and a second non-sterile screen 109, which are opposite each other. The visualization system 108, guided by the central controller 106, is configured to use screens 107, 109, and 119 to coordinate the flow of information to operators inside and outside the sterile field. For example, the central controller 106 can have the visualization system 108 display a snapshot of a surgical site, as recorded by an imaging device 124, on a non-sterile screen 107 or 109, while maintaining a live transmission of the surgical site on main screen 119. Snapshot on non-sterile screen 107 or 109 can allow a non-sterile operator to perform a diagnostic step relevant to the surgical procedure, for example.

[00329] In one aspect, central controller 106 is also configured to route a diagnostic input or feedback by a non-sterile operator in the display tower 111 to the primary screen 119 within the sterile field, where it can be seen by a sterile operator on the operating table. In one example, the entry may be in the form of a modification of the snapshot displayed on the non-sterile screen 107 or 109, which can be routed to the main screen 119 by the central controller 106.

[00330] Referring to Figure 35, a surgical instrument 112 is being used in the surgical procedure as part of the surgical system 102. The central controller 106 is also configured to coordinate the flow of information to a screen of the surgical instrument 112. For example, in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. An entry or diagnostic feedback inserted by a non-sterile operator in the viewing tower 111 can be routed by the central controller 106 to the screen of the surgical instrument 115 in the sterile field, where it can be seen by the operator of the surgical instrument 112.

Exemplary surgical instruments that are suitable for use with surgical system 102 are described under the heading "Surgical Instrument Hardware" and in provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611.341, entitled INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM, filed on December 28, 2017, whose description is hereby incorporated by way of reference in its entirety, for example.

[00331] Now with reference to Figure 36, a central controller 106 is shown in communication with a visualization system 108, a robotic system 110 and a smart handheld surgical instrument 112. Central controller 106 includes a central controller screen 135, an imaging module 138, a generator module 140, a communication module 130, a processor module 132 and a storage matrix 134. In certain respects, as shown in Figure 36, central controller 106 additionally includes a smoke evacuation module 126 and / or a suction / irrigation module 128.

[00332] During a surgical procedure, the application of energy to the tissue, for sealing and / or cutting, is generally associated with the evacuation of smoke, suction of excess fluid and / or irrigation of the tissue. Fluid, power, and / or data lines from different sources are often intertwined during the surgical procedure. Valuable time can be wasted in addressing this issue during a surgical procedure. To untangle the lines, it may be necessary to disconnect the lines from their respective modules, which may require a restart of the modules. The modular housing of the central controller 136 offers a unified environment for managing power, data and fluid lines, which reduces the frequency of entanglement between such lines.

[00333] Aspects of the present description feature a central surgical controller for use in a surgical procedure that involves applying energy to tissue at a surgical site. The central surgical controller includes a central controller housing and a combination generator module received slidably at a central controller housing docking station. The docking station includes data and power contacts. The combined generator module includes two or more of an ultrasonic energy generating component, a bipolar RF energy generating component, and a monopolar RF energy generating component which are housed in a single unit. In one aspect, the combined generator module also includes a smoke evacuation component, at least one power application cable to connect the combined generator module to a surgical instrument, at least one smoke evacuation component configured to evacuate smoke, fluid , and / or particulates generated by applying therapeutic energy to the tissue, and a fluid line that extends from the remote surgical site to the smoke evacuation component.

[00334] In one aspect, the fluid line is a first fluid line and a second fluid line extends from the remote surgical site to a suction and irrigation module received slidingly in the central controller housing. In one aspect, the central controller housing comprises a fluid interface.

[00335] Certain surgical procedures may require the application of more than one type of energy to the tissue. One type of energy may be more beneficial for cutting the fabric, while another type of energy may be more beneficial for sealing the fabric. For example, a bipolar generator can be used to seal the tissue while an ultrasonic generator can be used to cut the sealed tissue. Aspects of the present description present a solution in which a modular housing of central controller 136 is configured to accommodate different generators and facilitate interactive communication between them. One of the advantages of the modular housing of the central controller 136 is that it allows the quick removal and / or replacement of several modules.

[00336] Aspects of the present description feature a modular surgical wrap for use in a surgical procedure that involves applying energy to the tissue. The modular surgical enclosure includes a first energy generator module, configured to generate a first energy for application to the tissue, and a first docking station that comprises a first docking port that includes first power and data contacts, the first module being The power generator is slidingly movable in an electric coupling with power and data contacts and the first power generator module is slidingly movable out of the electric coupling with the first power and data contacts.

[00337] In addition to the above, the modular surgical enclosure also includes a second energy generator module configured to generate a second energy, different from the first energy, for application to the tissue, and a second docking station comprising a second docking port which includes second data and power contacts, the second power generating module being slidably movable in an electrical coupling with the power and data contacts, and the second power generating module being slidingly movable outwards electrical coupling with the second power and data contacts.

[00338] In addition, the modular surgical enclosure also includes a communication bus between the first coupling port and the second coupling port, configured to facilitate communication between the first power generating module and the second power generating module.

[00339] With reference to Figures 3 to 7, aspects of the present description are presented for a modular housing of the central controller 136 that allows the modular integration of a generator module 140, a smoke evacuation module 126, and a suction module / irrigation 128. The modular housing of the central controller 136 further facilitates interactive communication between modules 140, 126,

128. As shown in Figure 38, generator module 140 can be a generator module with integrated monopolar, bipolar and ultrasonic components, supported in a single enclosure unit 139 slidably inserted into the modular housing of central controller 136. As shown in Figure 38, generator module 140 can be configured to connect to a monopolar device 146, a bipolar device 147 and an ultrasonic device

148. Alternatively, generator module 140 may comprise a series of monopolar, bipolar and / or ultrasonic generator modules that interact through the modular housing of central controller 136. The modular housing of central controller 136 can be configured to facilitate the insertion of multiple generators and interactive communication between the generators coupled to the modular housing of the central controller 136 so that the generators would act as a single generator.

[00340] In one aspect, the modular housing of the central controller 136 comprises a rear panel of communication and modular power 149 with external and wireless communication heads to allow removable fixing of modules 140, 126, 128 and interactive communication between them .

[00341] In one aspect, the modular housing of central controller 136 includes docking stations, or drawers, 151, here also called drawers, which are configured to receive slidingly modules 140, 126, 128. Figure 37 illustrates a partial perspective view of a central surgical controller housing 136 and a combined generator module 145 received slidably at a docking station 151 of the central surgical controller housing 136. A docking port 152 with power and data contacts in one The rear side of the combined generator module 145 is configured to engage a corresponding docking port 150 with the power and data contacts of a corresponding docking station 151 of the modular housing of the central controller 136 as the combined generator module 145 is slid into position at corresponding docking station 151 of the modular housing of the central controller 136. In one aspect, the comb generator module inado 145 includes a bipolar, ultrasonic and monopolar module and a smoke evacuation module integrated in a single cabinet unit 139, as shown in Figure 38.

[00342] In several respects, the smoke evacuation module 126 includes a fluid line 154 that carries captured / collected fluid smoke away from a surgical site and to, for example, the smoke evacuation module 126. Suction a vacuum that originates from the smoke evacuation module 126 can pull the smoke into an opening of a utility conduit at the surgical site. The utility conduit, coupled to the fluid line, can be in the form of a flexible tube that ends in the smoke evacuation module 126. The utility conduit and the fluid line define a fluid path that extends towards the smoke evacuation module 126 which is received in the central controller housing 136.

[00343] In several aspects, the suction / irrigation module 128 is coupled to a surgical tool comprising a fluid suction line and a fluid suction line. In one example,

the suction and suction fluid lines are in the form of flexible tubes that extend from the surgical site towards the suction / irrigation module 128. One or more drive systems can be configured to make the irrigation and aspiration of fluids to and from the surgical site.

[00344] In one aspect, the surgical tool includes a drive shaft that has an end actuator at a distal end thereof and at least an energy treatment associated with the end actuator, a suction tube, and a suction tube. irrigation. The suction tube can have an inlet port at a distal end of it and the suction tube extends through the drive shaft. Similarly, an irrigation pipe can extend through the drive shaft and may have an entrance port close to the power application implement. The power application implement is configured to deliver ultrasonic and / or RF energy to the surgical site and is coupled to the generator module 140 by a cable that initially extends through the drive shaft.

[00345] The irrigation tube can be in fluid communication with a fluid source, and the suction tube can be in fluid communication with a vacuum source. The fluid source and / or the vacuum source can be housed in the suction / irrigation module 128. In one example, the fluid source and / or the vacuum source can be housed in the central controller housing 136 separately from the control module. suction / irrigation 128. In such an example, a fluid interface can be configured to connect the suction / irrigation module 128 to the fluid source and / or the vacuum source.

[00346] In one aspect, modules 140, 126, 128 and / or their corresponding docking stations in the modular housing of central controller 136 may include alignment features that are configured to align the docking ports of the modules in engagement with their counterparts at the docking stations of the central enclosure of the central controller 136. For example, as shown in Figure 37, the combined generator module 145 includes side supports 155 which are configured to slide the corresponding supports 156 of the corresponding docking station 151 of the enclosure. module of the central controller 136. The brackets cooperate to guide the coupling port contacts of the combined generator module 145 in an electrical coupling with the coupling port contacts of the modular housing of the central controller 136.

[00347] In some respects, the drawers 151 of the modular housing of the central controller 136 are the same, or substantially the same size, and the modules are adjusted in size to be received in the drawers 151. For example, the side supports 155 and / or 156 can be larger or smaller depending on the size of the module. In other respects, drawers 151 have different sizes and are each designed to accommodate a specific module.

[00348] In addition, the contacts of a specific module can be switched to engage with the contacts of a specific drawer to avoid inserting a module in a drawer with unpaired contacts.

[00349] As shown in Figure 37, the coupling port 150 of a drawer 151 can be coupled to the coupling port 150 of another drawer 151 via a communication link 157 to facilitate interactive communication between the modules housed in the modular housing of the central controller 136. The coupling ports 150 of the modular housing of the central controller 136 can, alternatively or additionally, facilitate interactive wireless communication between the modules housed in the modular housing of the central controller 136. Any suitable wireless communication can be used, such as Air Titan Bluetooth.

[00350] Figure 39 illustrates individual power bus connectors for a plurality of side coupling ports of a side modular cabinet 160 configured to receive a plurality of modules from a central surgical controller 206. Side modular cabinet 160 is configured to receive and laterally interconnect modules 161. Modules 161 are slidably inserted into docking stations 162 of side modular cabinet 160, which includes a rear panel for interconnecting modules 161. As shown in Figure 39, modules 161 are arranged laterally in the side modular cabinet

160. Alternatively, modules 161 can be arranged vertically in a side modular cabinet.

[00351] Figure 40 illustrates a vertical modular cabinet 164 configured to receive a plurality of modules 165 from the central surgical controller 106. The modules 165 are slidably inserted into docking stations, or drawers, 167 of the vertical modular cabinet 164, the which includes a rear panel for interconnecting modules 165. Although the drawers 167 of the vertical modular cabinet 164 are arranged vertically, in certain cases, a vertical modular cabinet 164 may include drawers that are arranged laterally. In addition, modules 165 can interact with each other through the coupling ports of the vertical modular cabinet 164. In the example in Figure 31, a screen 177 is provided to display data relevant to the operation of modules 165. In addition, the vertical modular cabinet 164 includes a master module 178 that houses a plurality of submodules that are received slidingly in the master module 178.

[00352] In several aspects, the imaging module 138 comprises an integrated video processor and a modular light source and is adapted for use with various imaging devices. In one aspect, the imaging device is comprised of a modular cabinet that can be mounted with a light source module and a camera module. The case can be a disposable case. In at least one example, the disposable case is removably coupled to a reusable controller, a light source module, and a camera module. The light source module and / or the camera module can be selected selectively depending on the type of surgical procedure. In one aspect, the camera module comprises a CCD sensor. In another aspect, the camera module comprises a CMOS sensor. In another aspect, the camera module is configured for imaging the scanned beam. Similarly, the light source module can be configured to provide a white light or a different light, depending on the surgical procedure.

[00353] During a surgical procedure, removing a surgical device from the surgical field and replacing it with another surgical device that includes a different camera or other light source may be inefficient. Temporarily losing sight of the surgical field can lead to undesirable consequences. The imaging device module of the present description is configured to allow the replacement of a light source module or a "midstream" camera module during a surgical procedure, without the need to remove the imaging device from the surgical field.

[00354] In one aspect, the imaging device comprises a tubular cabinet that includes a plurality of channels. A first channel is configured to slide the camera module, which can be configured for a snap-fit fit (pressure fit) with the first channel. A second channel is configured to receive the camera module in a sliding way, which can be configured for a snap-fit type (snap fit) with the first channel. In another example, the camera module and / or the light source module can be rotated to an end position within their respective channels. A threaded coupling can be used instead of a pressure fitting.

[00355] In several examples, multiple imaging devices are placed in different positions in the surgical field to provide multiple views. Imaging module 138 can be configured to switch between imaging devices to provide an ideal view. In several respects, imaging module 138 can be configured to integrate images from different imaging devices.

[00356] Various image processors and imaging devices suitable for use with the present description are described in US patent No. 7,995,045 entitled COMBINED SBI AND CONVENTIONAL IMAGE PROCESSOR, granted on August 9, 2011 which is incorporated herein as reference in its entirety. In addition, US patent No. 7,982,776, entitled SBI MOTION ARTIFACT REMOVAL APPARATUS AND METHOD, issued on July 19, 2011, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, describes various systems for removing motion artifacts from image data. Such systems can be integrated with imaging module 138. In addition to these, the publication of US patent application No. 2011/0306840, entitled CONTROLLABLE MAGNETIC SOURCE TO FIXTURE INTRACORPOREAL APPARATUS, published on December 15, 2011, and the publication of the application US Patent No. 2014/0243597,

entitled SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING A MINIMALLY INVASIVE SURGICAL PROCEDURE, published on August 28, 2014, which are each incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

[00357] Figure 41 illustrates a surgical data network 201 comprising a central modular communication controller 203 configured to connect modular devices located in one or more operating rooms of a healthcare facility, or any environment in a healthcare facility. healthcare services specially equipped for surgical operations, to a cloud-based system (for example, cloud 204 which may include a remote server 213 coupled to a storage device 205). In one aspect, the modular central communication controller 203 comprises a central network controller 207 and / or a network switch 209 in communication with a network router. The modular communication central controller 203 can also be coupled to a local computer system 210 to provide local computer processing and data manipulation. The surgical data network 201 can be configured as a passive, intelligent, or switching network. A passive surgical data network serves as a conduit for the data, allowing the data to be transmitted from one device (or segment) to another and to cloud computing resources. An intelligent surgical data network includes features to allow traffic to pass through the surgical data network to be monitored and to configure each port on the central network controller 207 or network switch 209. An intelligent surgical data network can be called a a central controller or controllable key. A central switching controller reads the destination address of each packet and then forwards the packet to the correct port.

[00358] Modular devices 1a to 1n located in the operating room can be coupled to the central controller of modular communication 203. The central network controller 207 and / or the network switch 209 can be coupled to a network router 211 to connect devices 1a to 1n to the cloud 204 or to the local computer system 210. The data associated with devices 1a to 1n can be transferred to cloud-based computers via the router for remote data processing and manipulation. The data associated with devices 1a to 1n can also be transferred to the local computer system 210 for processing and manipulation of the local data. Modular devices 2a to 2 m located in the same operating room can also be coupled to a network switch 209. The network switch 209 can be coupled to the central network controller 207 and / or to the network router 211 to connect the devices 2a to 2 m to cloud 204. Data associated with devices 2a to 2n can be transferred to cloud 204 via network router 211 for data processing and manipulation. The data associated with devices 2a to 2 m can also be transferred to the local computer system 210 for processing and manipulation of the local data.

[00359] It will be understood that the surgical data network 201 can be expanded by interconnecting multiple central network controllers 207 and / or multiple network switches 209 with multiple network routers 211. The central controller of modular communication 203 may be contained in a modular control tower configured to receive multiple devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. The local computer system 210 may also be contained in a modular control tower. The modular communication central controller 203 is connected to a screen 212 to display the images obtained by some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, for example, during surgical procedures. In several respects, devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m may include, for example, various modules such as an imaging module 138 coupled to an endoscope, a generator module 140 coupled to an energy-based surgical device, an evacuation module smoke 126, a suction / irrigation module 128, a communication module 130, a processor module 132, a storage matrix 134, a surgical device attached to a screen, and / or a non-contact sensor module, among other devices modular modules that can be connected to the central communication controller 203 of the surgical data network 201.

[00360] In one aspect, the surgical data network 201 may comprise a combination of central network controllers, network switches, and network routers that connect devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m to the cloud. Any or all of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m coupled to the central network controller or network switch can collect data in real time and transfer the data to cloud computers for data processing and manipulation. It will be understood that cloud computing depends on sharing computing resources instead of having local servers or personal devices to handle software applications. The word "cloud" can be used as a metaphor for "the Internet", although the term is not limited as such. Consequently, the term "cloud computing" can be used here to refer to "a type of Internet-based computing", in which different services - such as servers, storage, and applications - are applied to the modular communication central controller 203 and / or the computer system 210 located in the operating room (for example, a fixed, mobile, temporary, or operating room or operating space) and devices connected to the modular central communication controller 203 and / or the computer system 210 through the Internet. The cloud infrastructure can be maintained by a cloud service provider. In this context, the cloud service provider may be the entity that coordinates the use and control of devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m located in one or more operating rooms. Cloud computing services can perform a large number of calculations based on data collected by smart surgical instruments, robots, and other computerized devices located in the operating room. The central controller hardware allows multiple devices or connections to be connected to a computer that communicates with cloud computing and storage resources.

[00361] The application of cloud computer data processing techniques in the data collected by devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, the surgical data network provides better surgical results, reduced costs, and better patient satisfaction. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m can be used to view tissue status to assess leakage or perfusion of sealed tissue after a tissue sealing and cutting procedure. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m can be used to identify the pathology, such as the effects of disease, with the use of cloud-based computing to examine data including images of body tissue samples for diagnostic purposes. This includes confirmation of the location and margin of the tissue and phenotypes. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m can be used to identify anatomical structures of the body using a variety of sensors integrated with imaging devices and techniques such as overlaying images captured by multiple imaging devices. The data collected by devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, including the image data, can be transferred to the cloud 204 or the local computer system 210 or both for data processing and manipulation including image processing and manipulation. The data can be analyzed to improve the results of the surgical procedure by determining whether additional treatment, such as application of endoscopic intervention, emerging technologies, targeted radiation, targeted intervention, accurate robotics at specific tissue sites and conditions, can be followed. This data analysis can additionally use analytical processing of the results, and with the use of standardized approaches they can provide beneficial standardized feedback both to confirm surgical treatments and the surgeon's behavior or to suggest changes to surgical treatments and the surgeon's behavior.

[00362] In an implementation, devices in the operating room 1a to 1n can be connected to the central modular communication controller 203 via a wired channel or a wireless channel depending on the configuration of devices 1a to 1n in a central controller of network. The central network controller 207 can be implemented, in one aspect, as a local network transmission device that acts on the physical layer of the open system interconnection model ("OSI" - open system interconnection). The central network controller provides connectivity to devices 1a to 1n located on the same network as the operating room. The central network controller 207 collects data in the form of packets and sends it to the router in "half duplex" mode. The central network controller 207 does not store any media access control / internet protocol (MAC / IP) to transfer data from the device. Only one of the devices 1a to 1n at a time can send data via the central network controller 207. The central network controller 207 has no routing tables or intelligence about where to send information and transmits all network data through each connection. and to a remote server 213 (Figure 42) via the cloud 204. The central network controller 207 can detect basic network errors, such as collisions, but having all the information transmitted to multiple input ports can be a security risk and cause bottlenecks.

[00363] In another implementation, operating room devices 2a to 2 m can be connected to a network switch 209 via a wired or wireless channel. The network switch 209 works on the data connection layer of the OSI model. The network switch 209 is a multicast device for connecting devices 2a to 2m located in the same operation center to the network. The network switch 209 sends data in frame form to the network router 211 and works in full duplex mode. Multiple devices 2a to 2m can send data at the same time via network switch 209. Network switch 209 stores and uses MAC addresses of devices 2a to 2m to transfer data.

[00364] The central network controller 207 and / or the network switch 209 are coupled to network router 211 for a connection to the cloud 204. Network router 211 works on the network layer of the OSI model. Network router 211 creates a route for transmitting data packets received from central network controller 207 and / or network switch 211 to a computer with cloud resources for future processing and manipulation of data collected by any of all or all devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. The network router 211 can be used to connect two or more different networks located in different locations, such as different operating rooms in the same health care facility or different networks located in different operating rooms of different service facilities of health. Network router 211 sends data in packet form to cloud 204 and works in full duplex mode. Multiple devices can send data at the same time. The network router 211 uses IP addresses to transfer data.

[00365] In one example, the central network controller 207 can be implemented as a central USB controller, which allows multiple USB devices to be connected to a host computer. The central USB controller can expand a single USB port on several levels so that more ports are available to connect the devices to the system's host computer. The central network controller 207 can include wired or wireless capabilities to receive information about a wired channel or a wireless channel. In one aspect, a wireless wireless, broadband and short-range wireless USB communication protocol can be used for communication between devices 1a to 1n and devices 2a to 2m located in the operating room.

[00366] In other examples, devices in the operating room 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can communicate with the central modular communication controller 203 via the Bluetooth wireless technology standard for exchanging data over short distances ( with the use of short wavelength UHF radio waves in the 2.4 to 2.485 GHz ISM band received from fixed and mobile devices, and build personal area networks ("PANs"). In other respects, operating room devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m can communicate with the central modular communication controller 203 via various wireless and wired communication standards or protocols, including, but not limited to, Wi-Fi (IEEE 802.11 family), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16 family), IEEE 802.20, long-term evolution ("LTE" - long-term evolution), and Ev-DO, HSPA +, HSDPA +, HSUPA +, EDGE, GSM, GPRS , CDMA, TDMA, DECT, and Ethernet derivatives thereof, as well as any other wireless and wired protocols that are designated as 3G, 4G, 5G, and beyond. The computing module can include a plurality of communication modules. For example, a first communication module can be dedicated to short-range wireless communications like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, and a second communication module can be dedicated to longer-range wireless communications like GPS, EDGE, GPRS, CDMA , WiMAX, LTE, Ev-DO, and others.

[00367] The modular communication central controller 203 can serve as a central connection for one or all operating room devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m and handles a data type known as frames. The tables carry the data generated by the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. When a frame is received by the modular central communication controller 203, it is amplified and transmitted to the network router 211, which transfers data to cloud computing resources using a series of wireless communication standards or protocols or wired, as described in the present invention.

[00368] The modular communication central controller 203 can be used as a standalone device or be connected to compatible central network controllers and network switches to form a larger network. The 203 modular communication central controller is, in general, easy to install, configure and maintain, making it a good option for the network of devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m from the operating room.

[00369] Figure 42 illustrates an interactive surgical system implemented by computer 200. The interactive surgical system implemented by computer 200 is similar in many respects to the interactive surgical system, implemented by computer 100. For example, the interactive surgical system implemented by computer 200 includes one or more surgical systems 202, which are similar in many respects to surgical systems 102. Each surgical system 202 includes at least one central surgical controller 206 in communication with a cloud 204 which may include a remote server 213. In one aspect , the computer-implemented interactive surgical system 200 comprises a modular control tower 236 connected to multiple operating room devices such as, for example, smart surgical instruments, robots and other computerized devices located in the operating room.

As shown in Figure 43, the modular control tower 236 comprises a central modular communication controller 203 coupled to a computer system 210. As illustrated in the example in Figure 42, the modular control tower 236 is coupled to an imaging module 238 which is coupled to an endoscope 239, a generator module 240 which is coupled to a power device 241, a smoke evacuation module 226, a suction / irrigation module 228, a communication module 230, a processor module 232, a storage array 234, an intelligent device / instrument 235 optionally attached to a screen 237 and a non-contact sensor module 242. The devices in the operating room are coupled with cloud computing resources and data storage through the tower. modular control 236. The robotic central controller 222 can also be connected to the modular control tower 236 and cloud computing resources.

The devices / Instruments 235, visualization systems 208, among others, can be coupled to the modular control tower 236 by means of wired or wireless communication standards or protocols, as described in the present invention. The modular control tower 236 can be coupled to a central controller screen 215 (for example, monitor, screen) to display and overlay images received from the imaging module, device / instrument screen and / or other display systems 208. A The central controller screen can also display the data received from the devices connected to the modular control tower together with images and overlapping images.

[00370] Figure 43 illustrates a central surgical controller 206 that comprises a plurality of modules coupled to the modular control tower 236. The modular control tower 236 comprises a central controller for modular communication 203, for example, a network connectivity device , and a computer system 210 for providing local processing, visualization, and imaging, for example. As shown in Figure 43, the modular communication central controller 203 can be connected in a layered configuration to expand the number of modules (for example, devices) that can be connected to the modular communication central controller 203 and transfer data associated with the modules computer system 210, cloud computing resources, or both. As shown in Figure 43, each of the central controllers / network switches in the modular central communication controller 203 includes three downstream ports and one upstream port. The central controller / network switch upstream is connected to a processor to provide a communication connection to the cloud computing resources and a local display 217. Communication with the cloud 204 can be done via a wired communication channel or wireless.

[00371] The central surgical controller 206 uses a non-contact sensor module 242 to measure the dimensions of the operating room and generate a map of the operating room using non-contact measuring devices such as laser or ultrasonic. An ultrasound-based non-contact sensor module scans the operating room by transmitting an ultrasound burst and receiving the echo when it bounces off the perimeter of the operating room walls, as described under the heading "Surgical Hub Spatial Awareness Within an Operating Room "in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled" INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM ", filed on December 28, 2017, whose description is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, in which the module sensor is configured to determine the size of the operating room and adjust the distance limits for Bluetooth pairing. A laser-based non-contact sensor module scans the operating room by transmitting pulses of laser light, receiving pulses of laser light that bounce off the perimeter walls of the operating room, and comparing the phase of the transmitted pulse to the received pulse to determine the size of the operating room and to adjust the Bluetooth pairing distance limits, for example.

[00372] Computer system 210 comprises a processor 244 and a network interface 245. Processor 244 is coupled to a communication module 247, storage 248, memory 249, non-volatile memory 250, and an input / output interface 251 through of a system bus. The system bus can be any of several types of bus structures, including the memory bus or memory controller, a peripheral bus or external bus, and / or a local bus that uses any variety of available bus architectures including, but not limited to, not limited to, 9-bit bus, industry standard architecture (ISA), Micro-Charmel Architecture (MSA), extended ISA (EISA), smart drive electronic circuits (IDE), VESA local bus (VLB), network interconnection peripheral components (PCI), USB, advanced graphics port (AGP), PCMCIA bus (International Personal Computer Memory Card Association, "Personal Computer Memory Card International Association"), small computer systems interface (SCSI), or any another proprietary bus.

[00373] Processor 244 can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex available from Texas Instruments. In one respect, the processor may be a Core Cortex-M4F LM4F230H5QR ARM processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises an integrated 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz , a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, memory only programmable, electrically erasable (EEPROM) reading of 2 KB, one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more analogs of quadrature encoder (QEI) inputs, one or more analog to digital converters (ADC) 12-bit with 12 channels of analog input, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[00374] In one aspect, processor 244 may comprise a safety controller comprising two controller-based families, such as TMS570 and RM4x, known under the tradename Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. The safety controller can be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[00375] System memory includes volatile and non-volatile memory. The basic input / output system (BIOS), containing the basic routines for transferring information between elements within the computer system, such as during startup, is stored in non-volatile memory. For example, non-volatile memory can include ROM, programmable ROM (PROM), electrically programmable ROM (EPROM), EEPROM or flash memory. Volatile memory includes random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache memory. In addition, RAM is available in many forms such as SRAM, dynamic RAM (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), Synchlink DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct RAM Rambus RAM (DRRAM).

[00376] Computer system 210 also includes removable / non-removable, volatile / non-volatile computer storage media, for example disk storage. Disk storage includes, but is not limited to, devices such as a magnetic disk drive, floppy disk drive, tape drive, Jaz driver, Zip driver, LS-60 driver, flash memory card or memory stick (pen -drive). In addition, the storage disc may include storage media separately or in combination with other storage media including, but not limited to, an optical disc drive such as a compact disc ROM (CD-ROM) device recordable (CD-R Drive), rewritable compact disc drive (CD-RW drive), or a versatile digital ROM drive (DVD-ROM). To facilitate the connection of disk storage devices to the system bus, a removable or non-removable interface can be used.

[00377] It is to be understood that computer system 210 includes software that acts as an intermediary between users and basic computer resources described in an appropriate operating environment. Such software includes an operating system. The operating system, which can be stored on disk storage, acts to control and allocate computer system resources. System applications benefit from the management capabilities of the operating system through program modules and program data stored in system memory or on the storage disk. It is to be understood that the various components described in the present invention can be implemented with various operating systems or combinations of operating systems.

[00378] A user enters commands or information into the computer system 210 through the input device (s) coupled to the I / O interface 251. Input devices include, but are not limited to, a device pointer such as a mouse, trackball, stylus, touchpad, keyboard, microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite card, scanner, TV tuner card, digital camera, digital video camera, web camera, and the like. These and other input devices connect to the processor via the system bus via the interface port (s). Interface ports include, for example, a serial port, a parallel port, a game port and a USB. Output devices use some of the same types of ports as input devices. In this way, for example, a USB port can be used to provide input to the computer system and to provide information from the computer system to an output device. An output adapter is provided to illustrate that there are some output devices such as monitors, screens, speakers, and printers, among other output devices, that need special adapters. Output adapters include, by way of illustration and not limitation, video and sound cards that provide a means of connection between the output device and the system bus. It should be noted that other devices and / or device systems, such as remote computers, provide input and output capabilities.

[00379] Computer system 210 can operate in a networked environment using logical connections to one or more remote computers, such as cloud computers, or local computers. Remote cloud computers can be a personal computer, server, router, personal network computer, workstation, microprocessor-based device, peer device, or other common network node, and the like, and typically include many or all elements described in relation to the computer system. For the sake of brevity, only one memory storage device is illustrated with the remote computer. Remote computers are logically connected to the computer system via a network interface and then physically connected via a communication connection. The network interface covers communication networks such as local area networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs). LAN technologies include fiber distributed data interface (FDDI), copper distributed data interface (CDDI), Ethernet / IEEE 802.3, Token ring / IEEE 802.5 and the like. WAN technologies include, but are not limited to, point-to-point links, circuit switching networks such as digital integrated service networks (ISDN) and variations in them, packet switching networks and digital subscriber lines (DSL).

[00380] In several respects, the computer system 210 of the

Figure 43, imaging module 238 and / or display system 208, and / or processor module 232 of Figures 9 to 10 can comprise an image processor, image processing engine, media processor or any signal processor specialized digital (DSP) used for the processing of digital images. The image processor can employ parallel computing with single multi-data instruction (SIMD) or multiple multi-data instruction (MIMD) technologies to increase speed and efficiency. The digital image processing engine can perform a number of tasks. The image processor can be an integrated circuit system with a multi-core processor architecture.

[00381] Communication connections refer to the hardware / software used to connect the network interface to the bus. Although the communication connection is shown for illustrative clarity within the computer system, it can also be external to computer system 210. The hardware / software required for connection to the network interface includes, for illustrative purposes only, internal and external technologies such as modems, including regular telephone serial modems, cable modems and DSL modems, ISDN adapters, and Ethernet cards.

[00382] Figure 44 illustrates a functional block diagram of an aspect of a USB 300 central network controller, in accordance with an aspect of the present description. In the illustrated aspect, the USB 300 central network controller device uses a TUSB2036 integrated circuit central controller available from Texas Instruments. The USB 300 core network controller is a CMOS device that provides one USB transceiver port 302 and up to three USB transceiver ports downstream 304, 306, 308 in accordance with the USB 2.0 specification. Upstream USB transceiver port 302 is a differential data root port comprising a "minus" (DM0) differential data input paired with a "plus" (DP0) differential data input. The three ports of the downstream USB transceiver 304, 306, 308 are differential data ports, with each port including "more" differential data outputs (DP1-DP3) paired with "less" differential data outputs (DM1-DM3) .

[00383] The USB 300 central network controller device is implemented with a digital state machine instead of a microcontroller, and no firmware programming is required. Fully compatible USB transceivers are integrated into the circuit for the upstream USB transceiver port 302 and all downstream USB transceiver ports 304, 306, 308. The downstream USB transceiver ports 304, 306, 308 support both full speed as low speed automatically configuring the scan rate according to the speed of the device attached to the doors. The USB 300 central network controller device can be configured in bus powered or self powered mode and includes 312 central power logic to manage power.

[00384] The USB 300 central network controller device includes a 310 serial interface engine (SIE). The SIE 310 is the hardware front end of the USB 300 central network controller and handles most of the protocol described in chapter 8 of the USB specification. SIE 310 typically comprises signaling down to the transaction level. The functions it handles could include: packet recognition, transaction sequencing, SOP, EOP, RESET, and RESUME signal detection / generation, clock / data separation, data encoding / decoding non-inverted zero

(NRZI), generation and verification of CRC (token and data), generation and verification / decoding of packet ID (PID), and / or series-parallel / parallel-series conversion. The 310 receives a clock input 314 and is coupled with a suspend / resume logic circuit and frame timer 316 and a central circuit repeat loop 318 to control communication between the upstream USB transceiver port 302 and the transceiver ports Downstream USB 304, 306, 308 through the logic circuits of ports 320, 322, 324. The SIE 310 is coupled to a command decoder 326 through the logic interface to control the commands of a serial EEPROM via an EEPROM interface in series 330.

[00385] In several aspects, the USB 300 central network controller can connect 127 functions configured in up to six logical layers (levels) to a single computer. In addition, the USB 300 central network controller can connect all peripherals using a standardized four-wire cable that provides both communication and power distribution. The power settings are bus-powered and self-powered modes. The USB 300 central network controller can be configured to support four power management modes: a central bus-powered controller with individual port power management or grouped port power management, and the self-powered central controller with power management. individual port power or grouped port power management. In one aspect, using a USB cable, the USB 300 central network controller, the USB transceiver port 302 is plugged into a USB host controller, and the USB transceiver ports downstream 304, 306, 308 are exposed to connect compatible USB devices, and so on. Surgical instrument hardware

[00386] Figure 45 illustrates a logic diagram of a 470 control system for a surgical instrument or tool, according to one or more aspects of the present description. The 470 system comprises a control circuit. The control circuit includes a microcontroller 461 comprising a processor 462 and a memory 468. One or more of the sensors 472, 474, 476, for example, provide real-time feedback to processor 462. A motor 482, driven by a driver of motor 492, operationally couples a longitudinally movable displacement member to drive the beam element with I-shaped beam. A tracking system 480 is configured to determine the position of the longitudinally movable displacement member. Position information is provided to the 462 processor, which can be programmed or configured to determine the position of the longitudinally movable drive member, as well as the position of a firing member, firing bar and an I-beam beam cutting element. Additional motors can be provided at the instrument driver interface to control the firing of the beam with an i-profile, the displacement of the closing tube, the rotation of the drive shaft and the articulation. A 473 screen shows a variety of instrument operating conditions and may include touchscreen functionality for data entry. The information displayed on screen 473 can be overlaid with images captured using endoscopic imaging modules.

[00387] In one aspect, the 461 microcontroller can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex available from Texas Instruments. In one respect, the main microcontroller 461 can be an LM4F230H5QR ARM Cortex-M4F processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises an integrated 256 KB single cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, memory programmable and electrically erasable read-only (EEPROM) of 2 KB, one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more analogs of quadrature encoder (QEI) inputs, and / or one or more analog converters for 12 bit digital (ADC) with 12 channels of analog input, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[00388] In one aspect, the 461 microcontroller may comprise a safety controller that comprises two families based on controllers, such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also available from Texas Instruments. The safety controller can be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[00389] The 461 microcontroller can be programmed to perform various functions, such as precise control of the speed and position of the joint and knife systems. In one aspect, the microcontroller 461 includes a processor 462 and a memory 468. The electric motor 482 can be a brushed direct current (DC) motor with a gearbox and mechanical connections with an articulation or scalpel system. In one aspect, a motor drive 492 can be an A3941 available from Allegro Microsystems, Inc. Other motor drives can be readily replaced for use in tracking system 480 which comprises an absolute positioning system. A detailed description of an absolute positioning system is given in US patent application publication 2017/0296213, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR

CONTROLLING A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT, published on October 19, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00390] The 461 microcontroller can be programmed to provide precise control of the speed and position of the displacement members and articulation systems. The 461 microcontroller can be configured to compute a response in the 461 microcontroller software. The computed response is compared to a measured response from the real system to obtain an "observed" response, which is used for actual feedback-based decisions. The observed response is a favorable and adjusted value, which balances the uniform and continuous nature of the simulated response with the measured response, which can detect external influences in the system.

[00391] In one aspect, motor 482 can be controlled by motor driver 492 and can be used by the instrument's trigger system or surgical tool. In many ways, the 482 motor can be a brushed direct current (DC) drive motor, with a maximum speed of approximately 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, the 482 motor may include a brushless motor, a wireless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor or any other suitable type of electric motor. Motor starter 492 may comprise an H bridge starter comprising field effect transistors (FETs), for example. The 482 motor can be powered by a feed assembly releasably mounted on the handle assembly or tool cabinet to provide control power for the instrument or surgical tool. The power package may comprise a battery that may include several battery cells connected in series, which can be used as the power source to energize the instrument or surgical tool. In certain circumstances, the battery cells in the power pack may be replaceable and / or rechargeable. In at least one example, the battery cells can be lithium-ion batteries that can be coupled and separable from the power package.

[00392] The 492 motor driver can be an A3941, available from Allegro Microsystems, Inc. The A3941 492 driver is an entire bridge controller for use with external power semiconductor metal oxide field (MOSFET) transistors. , of N channel, specifically designed for inductive loads, such as brushed DC motors. The 492 actuator comprises a single charge pump regulator that provides full door drive (> 10 V) for batteries with voltage up to 7 V and allows the A3941 to operate with a reduced door drive, up to 5.5 V. A capacitor input control can be used to supply the voltage surpassing that supplied by the battery required for the N channel MOSFETs. An internal charge pump for the upper side drive allows operation in direct current (100% duty cycle). The entire bridge can be triggered in fast or slow drop modes using diodes or synchronized rectification. In the slow drop mode, the current can be recirculated by means of FET from the top or from the bottom. The energy FETs are protected from the shoot-through effect through programmable dead-time resistors. Integrated diagnostics provide indication of undervoltage, overtemperature and faults in the power bridge, and can be configured to protect power MOSFETs in most short-circuit conditions. Other motor drives can be readily replaced for use in the tracking system 480 comprising an absolute positioning system.

[00393] The tracking system 480 comprises a controlled motor drive circuit arrangement comprising a position sensor 472 in accordance with an aspect of the present description. The position sensor 472 for an absolute positioning system provides a unique position signal that corresponds to the location of a displacement member. In one aspect, the displacement member represents a longitudinally movable drive member comprising a rack of drive teeth for engagement with a corresponding drive gear of a gear reduction assembly. In other respects, the displacement member represents the firing member, which can be adapted and configured to include a rack of drive teeth. In yet another aspect, the displacement member represents a firing bar or the I-shaped beam, each of which can be adapted and configured to include a rack of driving teeth. Consequently, as used in the present invention, the term displacement member is used generically to refer to any movable member of the surgical instrument or tool, such as the driving member, the firing member, the firing bar, the beam with profile in I or any element that can be moved. In one aspect, the longitudinally movable driving member is coupled to the firing member, the firing bar and the beam with an I-profile. Consequently, the absolute positioning system can, in effect, track the linear displacement of the beam with a profile in I by tracking the linear displacement of the longitudinally movable drive member. In several other respects, the displacement member can be coupled to any position sensor 472 suitable for measuring linear displacement. In this way, the longitudinally movable drive member, the firing member, the firing bar or the I-beam, or combinations thereof, can be coupled to any suitable displacement sensor. Linear displacement sensors can include contact or non-contact displacement sensors. Linear displacement sensors can comprise variable differential linear transformers (LVDT), variable reluctance differential transducers (DVRT), a sliding potentiometer, a magnetic detection system comprising a moving magnet and a series of linearly arranged Hall effect sensors, a system magnetic detection system comprising a fixed magnet and a series of linearly arranged mobile Hall effect sensors, an optical detection system comprising a mobile light source and a series of linearly arranged photodiodes or photodetectors, an optical detection system comprising a fixed light source and a series of linearly arranged mobile photodiodes or photodetectors, or any combination thereof.

[00394] The 482 electric motor may include a rotary drive shaft, which interfaces operationally with a gear set, which is mounted on a coupling coupling with a set or rack of drive teeth on the drive member. A sensor element can be operationally coupled to a gear assembly so that a single revolution of the position sensor element 472 corresponds to some linear longitudinal translation of the displacement member. An array of gears and sensors can be connected to the linear actuator by means of a rack and pinion arrangement, or by a rotary actuator, by means of a sprocket or other connection. A power supply supplies power to the absolute positioning system and an output indicator can show the output from the absolute positioning system. The drive member represents the longitudinally movable drive member comprising a rack of drive teeth formed thereon for engagement with a corresponding drive gear of the gear reducer assembly. The displacement member represents the longitudinally movable firing member, the firing bar, the I-beam or combinations thereof.

[00395] A single revolution of the sensor element associated with the position sensor 472 is equivalent to a longitudinal linear displacement d1 of the displacement member, where d1 represents the longitudinal linear distance by which the displacement member moves from point "a" to point "b" after a single revolution of the sensor element coupled to the displacement member. The sensor arrangement can be connected by means of a gear reduction which results in the position sensor 472 completing one or more revolutions for the complete travel of the displacement member. The 472 position sensor can complete multiple revolutions for the full travel of the displacement member.

[00396] A series of keys, where n is an integer greater than one, can be used alone or in combination with a gear reduction to provide a single position signal for more than one revolution of the 472 position sensor. of the switches is transmitted back to microcontroller 461 which applies logic to determine a single position signal corresponding to the longitudinal linear displacement d1 + d2 +… dn of the displacement member. The output of the position sensor 472 is supplied to the microcontroller 461. In several embodiments, the position sensor 472 of the sensor arrangement may comprise a magnetic sensor, an analog rotary sensor, such as a potentiometer, or a series of analog Hall effect elements. , which emit a unique combination of position of signs or values.

[00397] The position sensor 472 can comprise any number of magnetic detection elements, such as, for example, magnetic sensors classified according to whether they measure the total magnetic field or the vector components of the magnetic field. The techniques used to produce both types of magnetic sensors cover many aspects of physics and electronics. Technologies used for magnetic field detection include flow meter, saturated flow, optical pumping, nuclear precession, SQUID, Hall effect, anisotropic magnetoresistance, giant magnetoresistance, magnetic tunnel junctions, giant magnetoimpedance, magnetostrictive / piesoelectric compounds, magnetodiode, magnetic transistor, fiber optics, magneto-optics and magnetic sensors based on microelectromechanical systems, among others.

[00398] In one aspect, the position sensor 472 for the tracking system 480 comprising an absolute positioning system comprises a magnetic rotating absolute positioning system. The 472 position sensor can be implemented as a rotary, magnetic, single-circuit, AS5055EQFT position sensor, available from Austria Microsystems, AG. The position sensor 472 interfaces with the 461 microcontroller to provide an absolute positioning system. The 472 position sensor is a low voltage, low power component and includes four effect elements in an area of the 472 position sensor located above a magnet. A high-resolution ADC and an intelligent power management controller are also provided on the integrated circuit. A CORDIC (digital computer for coordinate rotation) processor, also known as the digit-for-digit method and Volder algorithm, is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions that require only addition, subtraction, displacement operations bits and lookup table. The angle position, alarm bits and magnetic field information are transmitted via a standard serial communication interface, such as a serial peripheral interface (SPI), to the 461 microcontroller. The 472 position sensor provides 12 or 14 bits of resolution. The position sensor 472 can be an AS5055 integrated circuit supplied in a small 16-pin QFN package whose measurement corresponds to 4x4x0.85 mm.

[00399] The tracking system 480 comprising an absolute positioning system can comprise and / or be programmed to implement a feedback controller, such as a PID, state feedback, and adaptive controller. A power supply converts the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input to the system, in this case the voltage. Other examples include a voltage, current and force PWM. Other sensors can be provided in order to measure the parameters of the physical system in addition to the position measured by the position sensor 472. In some respects, the other sensors may include sensor arrangements as described in US patent No. 9,345,481 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, granted on May 24, 2016, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety in this document; publication of US patent application serial number 2014/0263552, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, published on September 18, 2014, is incorporated by reference in its entirety in this document; and US patent application serial number 15 / 628,175, entitled

TECHNIQUES FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF MOTOR VELOCITY OF A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT, submitted on June 20, 2017, is incorporated by reference in its entirety into this document. In a digital signal processing system, an absolute positioning system is coupled to a digital data capture system where the output of the absolute positioning system will have a finite resolution and sampling frequency. The absolute positioning system can comprise a comparison and combination circuit to combine a computed response with a measured response through the use of algorithms, such as a weighted average and a theoretical control loop, that trigger the calculated response towards the measured response. The computed response of the physical system considers properties, such as mass, inertia, viscous friction, resistance to inductance, etc., to predict what the states and exits of the physical system will be, knowing the input.

[00400] The absolute positioning system provides an absolute positioning of the displaced member on the activation of the instrument without having to retract or advance the longitudinally movable driving member to the restart position (zero or initial), as may be required by the encoders conventional rotating machines that merely count the number of progressive or regressive steps that the 482 motor has traveled to infer the position of a device actuator, actuation bar, scalpel, and the like.

[00401] A 474 sensor, such as an effort meter or a micro force meter, is configured to measure one or more parameters of the end actuator, such as, for example, the amplitude of the effort exerted on the anvil during a gripping operation, which may be indicative of tissue compression. The measured effort is converted into a digital signal and fed to the 462 processor. Alternatively, or in addition to the 474 sensor, a 476 sensor, such as a load sensor, can measure the closing force applied by the drive system. anvil closure. The 476 sensor, for example a load sensor, can measure the firing force applied to a beam with an I-profile in a firing stroke of the tool or surgical instrument. The i-profile beam is configured to engage a wedge slider, which is configured to move the clamp actuators upward to force the clamps to deform in contact with an anvil. The i-profile beam includes a sharp cutting edge that can be used to separate fabric, as the i-profile beam is advanced distally by the firing bar. Alternatively, a current sensor 478 can be used to measure the current drained by the 482 motor. The force required to advance the trigger member can correspond to the current drained by the 482 motor, for example. The measured force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor.

[00402] In one form, a 474 strain gauge sensor can be used to measure the force applied to the tissue by the end actuator. A strain gauge can be attached to the end actuator to measure the force applied to the tissue being treated by the end actuator. A system for measuring forces applied to the tissue attached by the end actuator comprises a 474 strain gauge sensor, such as, for example, a microstrain gauge, which is configured to measure one or more parameters of the end actuator, for example. In one aspect, the 474 strain gauge sensor can measure the amplitude or magnitude of the mechanical stress exerted on a claw member of an end actuator during a gripping operation, which can be indicative of tissue compression. The measured effort is converted into a digital signal and fed to the 462 processor of a 461 microcontroller. A 476 load sensor can measure the force used to operate the knife element, for example, to cut the tissue captured between the anvil and the cartridge of staples. A magnetic field sensor can be used to measure the thickness of the captured tissue. The measurement of the magnetic field sensor can also be converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor.

[00403] Measurements of tissue compression, tissue thickness and / or force required to close the end actuator on the tissue, as measured by sensors 474, 476, can be used by microcontroller 461 to characterize the selected position of the trigger member and / or the corresponding trigger member speed value. In one case, a 468 memory can store a technique, an equation and / or a look-up table that can be used by the 461 microcontroller in the evaluation.

[00404] The control system 470 of the instrument or surgical tool can also comprise wired or wireless communication circuits for communication with the central modular communication controller shown in Figures 8 to 11.

[00405] Figure 46 illustrates a control circuit 500 configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool according to an aspect of the present description. The control circuit 500 can be configured to implement various processes described herein. The control circuit 500 may comprise a microcontroller comprising one or more processors 502 (for example, microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to at least one memory circuit 504. The memory circuit 504 stores instructions executable on a machine that, when executed by the processor 502, cause the 502 processor to execute machine instructions to implement several of the processes described here. The 502 processor can be any one of a number of single-core or multi-core processors known in the art. The memory circuit 504 may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media. The processor 502 can include an instruction processing unit 506 and an arithmetic unit 508. The instruction processing unit can be configured to receive instructions from the memory circuit 504 of this description.

[00406] Figure 47 illustrates a combinational logic circuit 510 configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool according to an aspect of the present description. The combinational logic circuit 510 can be configured to implement various processes described herein. The combinational logic circuit 510 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a combinational logic 512 configured to receive data associated with the instrument or surgical tool at an input 514, process the data by combinational logic 512 and provide an output 516.

[00407] Figure 48 illustrates a sequential logic circuit 520 configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool according to an aspect of the present description. Sequential logic circuit 520 or combinational logic 522 can be configured to implement the process described herein. Sequential logic circuit 520 may comprise a finite state machine. Sequential logic circuit 520 may comprise combinational logic 522, at least one memory circuit 524, a clock 529 and, for example. The at least one memory circuit 524 can store a current state of the finite state machine. In certain cases, the sequential logic circuit 520 may be synchronous or asynchronous. Combinational logic 522 is configured to receive data associated with the surgical instrument or tool from an input 526, process the data by combinational logic 522, and provide an output 528. In other respects, the circuit may comprise a combination of a processor (for example , processor 502, Figure 46) and a finite state machine for implementing various processes of the present invention. In other respects, the finite state machine may comprise a combination of a combinational logic circuit (for example, a combinational logic circuit 510, Figure 47) and the sequential logic circuit 520.

[00408] Figure 49 illustrates an instrument or surgical tool that comprises a plurality of motors that can be activated to perform various functions. In certain cases, a first engine can be activated to perform a first function, a second engine can be activated to perform a second function, a third engine can be activated to perform a third function, a fourth engine can be activated to perform a fourth function, and so on. In certain cases, the plurality of motors of the robotic surgical instrument 600 can be individually activated to cause firing, closing, and / or articulation movements in the end actuator. The firing, closing and / or articulation movements can be transmitted to the end actuator through a drive shaft assembly, for example.

[00409] In certain cases, the instrument or surgical tool system may include a 602 firing motor. The 602 firing motor can be operationally coupled to a 604 firing motor drive assembly, which can be configured to transmit movements triggers generated by the 602 motor to the end actuator, particularly to move the I-beam beam element. In certain cases, the triggering movements generated by the 602 motor can cause the clamps to be positioned from the clamp cartridge in the fabric captured by the end actuator and / or the cutting edge of the I-beam beam element to be advanced in order to cut the captured fabric, for example. The I-beam member can be retracted by reversing the direction of the 602 motor.

[00410] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include a closing motor 603. The closing motor 603 can be operationally coupled to a drive assembly of the closing motor 605 that can be configured to transmit closing movements generated by the motor 603 to the end actuator, particularly to move a closing tube to close the anvil and compress the fabric between the anvil and the staple cartridge. Closing movements can cause the end actuator to transition from an open configuration to an approximate configuration to capture tissue, for example. The end actuator can be moved to an open position by reversing the direction of the 603 motor.

[00411] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include one or more articulation motors 606a, 606b, for example. The motors 606a, 606b can be operationally coupled to the drive assemblies of the articulation motor 608a, 608b, which can be configured to transmit articulation movements generated by the motors 606a, 606b to the end actuator. In certain cases, the articulation movements can cause the end actuator to be articulated in relation to the drive shaft assembly, for example.

[00412] As described above, the surgical instrument or tool can include a plurality of motors that can be configured to perform various independent functions. In certain cases, the plurality of motors of the instrument or surgical tool can be activated individually or separately to perform one or more functions, while other motors remain inactive. For example, the articulation motors 606a, 606b can be activated to cause the end actuator to be articulated, while the firing motor 602 remains inactive. Alternatively, the firing motor 602 can be activated to fire the plurality of clamps, and / or advance the cutting edge, while the hinge motor 606 remains inactive. In addition, the closing motor 603 can be activated simultaneously with the firing motor 602 to cause the closing tube and the I-beam beam element to move distally, as described in more detail later in this document.

[00413] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include a common control module 610 that can be used with a plurality of the instrument's instruments or surgical tool. In certain cases, the common control module 610 can accommodate one of the plurality of motors at a time. For example, the common control module 610 can be coupled to and separable from the plurality of motors of the robotic surgical instrument individually. In certain cases, a plurality of surgical instrument or tool motors may share one or more common control modules, such as the common control module 610. In certain cases, a plurality of surgical instrument or tool motors may be individually and selectively engaged to the common control module 610. In certain cases, the common control module 610 can be selectively switched between interfacing with one of a plurality of instrument motors or surgical tool to interface with another among the plurality of instrument motors or surgical tool.

[00414] In at least one example, the common control module 610 can be selectively switched between the operational coupling with the articulation motors 606a, 606B, and the operational coupling with the firing motor 602 or the closing motor 603. In at least one example, as shown in Figure 49, a key 614 can be moved or transitioned between a plurality of positions and / or states. In the first position 616, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the trip motor 602; in a second position 617, the switch 614 can electrically couple the control module 610 to the closing motor 603; in a third position 618a, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the first articulation motor 606a; and in a fourth position 618b, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the second articulation motor 606b, for example. In certain cases, separate common control modules 610 can be electrically coupled to the firing motor 602, closing motor 603, and hinge motors 606a, 606b at the same time. In certain cases, key 614 can be a mechanical key, an electromechanical key, a solid state key, or any suitable switching mechanism.

[00415] Each of the 602, 603, 606a, 606b motors can comprise a torque sensor to measure the output torque on the motor drive shaft. The force on an end actuator can be detected in any conventional manner, such as by means of force sensors on the outer sides of the jaws or by a motor torque sensor that drives the jaws.

[00416] In several cases, as illustrated in Figure 49, the common control module 610 may comprise a motor starter 626 which may comprise one or more H bridge FETs. The motor starter 626 may modulate the energy transmitted from a power supply 628 to a motor coupled to the common control module 610, based on an input from a microcontroller 620 (the "controller"), for example. In certain cases, the microcontroller 620 can be used to determine the current drawn by the motor, for example, while the motor is coupled to the common control module 610, as described above.

[00417] In certain examples, the microcontroller 620 may include a microprocessor 622 (the "processor") and one or more non-transitory computer-readable media or 624 memory units (the "memory"). In certain cases, memory 624 can store various program instructions which, when executed, can cause processor 622 to perform a plurality of functions and / or calculations described herein. In certain cases, one or more of the memory units 624 can be coupled to the processor 622, for example.

[00418] In certain cases, the power supply 628 can be used to supply power to the microcontroller 620, for example. In certain cases, the power source 628 may comprise a battery (or "battery pack" or "battery"), such as a Li ion battery, for example. In certain cases, the battery pack can be configured to be releasably mounted to the handle to supply power to the surgical instrument 600. Several battery cells connected in series can be used as the 628 power source. In certain cases, the power source 628 power supply can be replaceable and / or rechargeable, for example.

[00419] In several cases, the 622 processor can control the motor drive 626 to control the position, direction of rotation and / or speed of a motor that is coupled to the common control module 610. In certain cases, the processor 622 can signal the motor driver 626 to stop and / or disable a motor that is coupled to the common control module 610. It should be understood that the term "processor", as used here, includes any microprocessor, microcontroller or other control device. adequate basic computing that incorporates the functions of a central computer processing unit (CPU) in an integrated circuit or, at most, some integrated circuits. The processor is a programmable multipurpose device that accepts digital data as input, processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as output. This is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. Processors operate on numbers and symbols represented in the binary numeral system.

[00420] In one example, the 622 processor can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known by the Texas Instruments ARM Cortex trade name. In certain cases, the 620 microcontroller may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example. In at least one example, the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F processor core that comprises a 256 KB single cycle flash integrated memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, an early seek buffer for optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle SRAM, an internal ROM loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB EEPROM, one or more PWM modules, one or more QEI analogs, one or more ADCs 12-bit with 12 channels of analog input, among other features that are readily available for the product data sheet. Other microcontrollers can be readily replaced for use with the 4410 module. Consequently, the present description should not be limited in this context.

[00421] In certain cases, memory 624 may include program instructions for controlling each of the motors of the surgical instrument 600 that are attachable to common control module 610. For example, memory 624 may include program instructions for controlling the motor trigger 602, closing motor 603 and hinge motors 606a, 606b. Such program instructions can cause the 622 processor to control the trigger, close, and link functions according to inputs from the instrument or surgical tool control algorithms or programs.

[00422] In certain cases, one or more mechanisms and / or sensors, such as 630 sensors, can be used to alert the 622 processor about the program instructions that need to be used in a specific configuration. For example, sensors 630 can alert the 622 processor to use the program instructions associated with triggering, closing, and pivoting the end actuator. In certain cases, sensors 630 may comprise position sensors that can be used to detect the position of switch 614, for example. Consequently, the processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with the firing of the I-beam of the end actuator by detecting, through sensors 630, for example, that the switch 614 is in the first position 616; the processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with closing the anvil upon detection through sensors 630, for example, that switch 614 is in second position 617; and processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with the articulation of the end actuator upon detection through sensors 630, for example, that switch 614 is in the third or fourth position 618a, 618b.

[00423] Figure 50 is a schematic diagram of a robotic surgical instrument 700 configured to operate a surgical tool described herein, in accordance with an aspect of this description. The robotic surgical instrument 700 can be programmed or configured to control the distal / proximal translation of a displacement member, the distal / proximal displacement of a closing tube, the rotation of the drive shaft, and articulation, either with a single type or multiple articulation drive links. In one aspect, the surgical instrument 700 can be programmed or configured to individually control a firing member, a closing member, a driving shaft member and / or one or more hinge members. The surgical instrument 700 comprises a control circuit 710 configured to control motor-driven firing members, closing members, driving shaft members and / or one or more hinge members.

[00424] In one aspect, the robotic surgical instrument 700 comprises a control circuit 710 configured to control an anvil 716 and a beam portion with I-profile 714 (including a sharp cutting edge) of an end actuator 702, a cartridge of removable clamps 718, a drive shaft 740 and one or more hinge members 742a, 742b through a plurality of motors 704a to 704e. A position sensor 734 can be configured to provide position feedback on the I-profile beam 714 to control circuit 710. Other sensors 738 can be configured to provide feedback to control circuit 710. A timer / counter 731 provides timing and counting to control circuit 710. A power source 712 can be provided to operate motors 704a to 704e and a current sensor 736 provides motor current feedback to control circuit 710. Motors 704a to 704e can be operated individually by control circuit 710 in an open loop or closed loop feedback control.

[00425] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other processors suitable for executing instructions that cause the processor or processors to perform one or more tasks. In one aspect, a timer / counter circuit 731 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to control circuit 710 to correlate beam position with I-profile 714, as determined by position sensor 734, with the timer / counter output 731 so that the control circuit 710 can determine the position of the I-beam beam 714 at a specific time (t) in relation to an initial position or time (t) when the beam with profile in I 714 it is in a specific position in relation to an initial position. Timer / counter 731 can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or time external events.

[00426] In one aspect, control circuit 710 can be programmed to control functions of end actuator 702 based on one or more tissue conditions. Control circuit 710 can be programmed to directly or indirectly detect tissue conditions, such as thickness, as described here. Control circuit 710 can be programmed to select a trigger control program or closing control program based on tissue conditions. A trigger control program can describe the distal movement of the displacement member. Different trigger control programs can be selected to better treat different tissue conditions. For example, when thicker tissue is present, control circuit 710 can be programmed to translate the displacement member at a lower speed and / or with a lower power. When a thinner fabric is present, the control circuit 710 can be programmed to move the displacement member at a higher speed and / or with greater power. A closing control program can control the closing force applied to the tissue by the anvil 716. Other control programs control the rotation of the drive shaft 740 and the hinge members 742a, 742b.

[00427] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 can generate motor setpoint signals. Motor setpoint signals can be provided for various motor controllers 708a through 708e. Motor controllers 708a to 708e can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide motor drive signals for motors 704a to 704e in order to drive motors 704a to 704e, as described here. In some instances, motors 704a to 704e may be brushed DC motors. For example, the speed of motors 704a to 704e can be proportional to the respective motor start signals. In some examples, motors 704a to 704e may be brushless DC electric motors, and the respective motor drive signals may comprise a PWM signal provided for one or more stator windings of motors 704a to 704e. In addition, in some instances, motor controllers 708a through 708e can be omitted and control circuit 710 can directly generate motor drive signals.

[00428] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 can initially operate each of the motors 704a to 704e in an open circuit configuration for a first open circuit portion of the travel of the displacement member. Based on the response of the robotic surgical instrument 700 during the open circuit portion of the stroke, control circuit 710 can select a trigger control program in a closed circuit configuration. The instrument response may include a translation of the distance of the displacement member during the open circuit portion, a time elapsed during the open circuit portion, the energy supplied to one of the motors 704a to 704e during the open circuit portion, a sum pulse widths of a motor start signal, etc. After the open circuit portion, control circuit 710 can implement the selected trigger control program for a second portion of the travel member travel. For example, during a portion of the closed loop course, control circuit 710 can modulate one of the motors 704a to 704e based on the translation of data describing a position of the closed displacement member to translate the displacement member to a constant speed.

[00429] In one aspect, motors 704a to 704e can receive power from a power source 712. Power source 712 can be a DC power source powered by an alternating main power supply, a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. Motors 704a to 704e can be mechanically coupled to individual moving mechanical elements such as the I-profile beam 714, the anvil 716, the drive shaft 740, the joint 742a and the joint 742b, through the respective transmissions 706a to 706e. Transmissions 706a through 706e may include one or more gears or other connecting components for coupling motors 704a to 704e to moving mechanical elements. A position sensor 734 can detect a position of the beam with an I-profile 714. The position sensor 734 can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicate a position of the beam with an I-profile 714 In some examples, the position sensor 734 may include an encoder configured to provide a series of pulses to the control circuit 710 as the I-beam beam 714 is moved distally and proximally. Control circuit 710 can track pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 714. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the I-profiled beam 714. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 734 may be omitted. When any of the motors 704a to 704e is a stepper motor, control circuit 710 can track the position of the I-profile beam 714 by aggregating the number and direction of the steps that the 704 motor has been instructed to perform. Position sensor 734 can be located on end actuator 702 or any other portion of the instrument. The outputs of each of the engines 704a to 704e include a torque sensor 744a to 744e to detect force and have an encoder to detect the rotation of the drive shaft.

[00430] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to drive a firing member as the portion of the I-profile beam 714 of end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint for a motor control 708a, which provides a drive signal for motor 704a. The output shaft of the motor 704a is coupled to a torque sensor 744a. The torque sensor 744a is coupled to a transmission 706a which is coupled to the I-profile beam 714. The transmission 706a comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotating elements, and a firing member to control the movement of the beam beam distally and proximally. in I 714 along a longitudinal geometric axis of end actuator 702. In one aspect, motor 704a can be coupled to the knife gear assembly, which includes a knife gear reduction assembly that includes a first drive gear and a second knife drive gear. A torque sensor 744a provides a trigger force feedback signal to control circuit 710. The trigger force signal represents the force required to fire or move the I-profile beam 714. A 734 position sensor can be configured to provide the position of the I-beam beam 714 along the firing stroke or the firing member position as a feedback signal to control circuit 710. End actuator 702 may include additional sensors 738 configured to provide signals feedback to control circuit 710. When ready for use, control circuit 710 can provide a trip signal to the 708a motor control. In response to the trigger signal, motor 704a can drive the trigger member distally along the longitudinal geometry axis of end actuator 702 from an initial proximal position of the stroke to an end distal position of the stroke relative to the initial position of course. As the displacement member moves distally, an I-profile beam 714 with a cutting element positioned at a distal end, advances distally to cut the fabric between the staple cartridge 718 and the anvil 716.

[00431] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to drive a closing member, such as anvil portion 716 of end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint for motor control 708b, which provides a drive signal for motor 704b. The output shaft of the motor 704b is coupled to a torque sensor 744b. The torque sensor 744b is coupled to a transmission 706b which is coupled to the anvil 716. The transmission 706b comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotating elements and a closing member, to control the movement of the anvil 716 between the open and closed positions. In one aspect, the 704b motor is coupled to a closing gear assembly, which includes a closing reduction gear assembly that is supported in gear engaged with the closing sprocket. The torque sensor 744b provides a closing force feedback signal for control circuit 710. The closing force feedback signal represents the closing force applied to the anvil 716. The position sensor 734 can be configured to provide the position of the closing member as a feedback signal for control circuit 710. Additional sensors 738 on end actuator 702 can provide the feedback signal for closing force to control circuit 710. A pivoting anvil 716 is positioned opposite the staple cartridge 718. When ready for use, control circuit 710 can provide a closing signal to motor control 708b. In response to the closing signal, motor 704b advances a closing member to secure the fabric between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718.

[00432] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to rotate a drive shaft member, such as drive shaft 740, to rotate end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint for a 708c engine control, which provides a drive signal for the 704c engine. The output shaft of the motor 704c is coupled to a torque sensor 744c. The torque sensor 744c is coupled to a transmission 706c which is coupled to the shaft 740. The transmission 706c comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotary elements, to control the rotation of the drive shaft 740 clockwise or counterclockwise until and above 360 °. In one aspect, the 704c engine is coupled to the rotary drive assembly, which includes a pipe gear segment that is formed over (or attached to) the proximal end of the proximal closing tube for operable engagement by a rotational gear assembly that is supported operationally on the tool mounting plate. The torque sensor 744c provides a rotation force feedback signal for control circuit 710. The rotation force feedback signal represents the rotation force applied to the drive shaft 740. The position sensor 734 can be configured to provide the position of the closing member as a feedback signal to the control circuit 710. Additional sensors 738, such as a drive shaft encoder, can provide the rotational position of the drive shaft 740 to the control circuit

710.

[00433] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to articulate end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint for a 708d motor control, which provides a drive signal for the motor 704d. The output shaft of the 704d motor is coupled to a 744d torque sensor. The torque sensor 744d is coupled to a transmission 706d which is coupled to a pivot member 742a. The 706d transmission comprises moving mechanical elements, such as pivoting elements, to control the articulation of the 702 ± 65 ° end actuator. In one aspect, the 704d motor is coupled to a pivot nut, which is rotatably seated on the proximal end portion of the distal column portion and is pivotally driven thereon by a pivot gear assembly. The 744d torque sensor provides a feedback signal from the hinge force to the control circuit

710. The hinge force feedback signal represents the hinge force applied to the end actuator 702. The 738 sensors, like a hinge encoder, can provide the hinge position of the end actuator 702 to the control circuit 710.

[00434] In another aspect, the articulation function of the robotic surgical system 700 may comprise two articulation members, or connections, 742a, 742b. These hinge members 742a, 742b are driven by separate disks at the robot interface (the rack), which are driven by the two motors 708d, 708e. When the separate firing motor 704a is provided, each hinge link 742a, 742b can be antagonistically driven with respect to the other link to provide a resistive holding movement and a load to the head when it is not moving and to provide a movement of articulation when the head is articulated. The hinge members 742a, 742b attach to the head in a fixed radius when the head is rotated. Consequently, the mechanical advantage of the push and pull link changes when the head is rotated. This change in mechanical advantage can be more pronounced with other drive systems for the articulation connection.

[00435] In one aspect, the one or more motors 704a to 704e may comprise a brushed DC motor with a gearbox and mechanical connections to a firing member, closing member or articulation member. Another example includes electric motors 704a to 704e that operate the moving mechanical elements such as the displacement member, the articulation connections, the closing tube and the drive shaft. An external influence is an excessive and unpredictable influence on things like tissue, surrounding bodies, and friction in the physical system. This external influence can be called drag, which acts in opposition to one of the electric motors 704a to 704e. External influence, such as drag, can cause the functioning of the physical system to deviate from a desired operation of the physical system.

[00436] In one aspect, the position sensor 734 can be implemented as an absolute positioning system. In one aspect, the 734 position sensor can comprise an absolute rotary magnetic positioning system implemented as a single integrated circuit rotary magnetic position sensor, AS5055EQFT, available from Austria Microsystems, AG. The position sensor 734 can interface with the control circuit 710 to provide an absolute positioning system. The position can include multiple Hall effect elements located above a magnet and coupled to a CORDIC processor, also known as the digit by digit method and Volder's algorithm, which is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions which only require addition, subtraction, bit shift and table search operations.

[00437] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 can be in communication with one or more sensors 738. The sensors 738 can be positioned on the end actuator 702 and adapted to work with the robotic surgical instrument 700 to measure various derived parameters such as span distance in relation to time, compression of the tissue in relation to time, and deformation of the anvil in relation to time. The 738 sensors can comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a strain gauge, a load cell, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, a torque sensor, an inductive sensor such as an eddy current sensor, a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, an optical sensor and / or any other sensor suitable for measuring one or more parameters of end actuator 702. Sensors 738 may include one or more sensors. Sensors 738 may be located on the staple cartridge platform 718 to determine the location of the tissue using segmented electrodes. The torque sensors 744a to 744e can be configured to detect force such as firing force, closing force, and / or articulation force, among others. Consequently, the control circuit 710 can detect (1) the closing load experienced by the distal closing tube and its position, (2) the trigger member on the rack and its position, (3) which portion of the cartridge blade 718 has tissue in it and (4) the load and position on both articulation rods.

[00438] In one aspect, the one or more sensors 738 may comprise a stress meter such as, for example, a microstrain meter, configured to measure the magnitude of the stress on the anvil 716 during a pinched condition. The voltage meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the voltage. Sensors 738 can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718. Sensors 738 can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of tissue located between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[00439] In one aspect, the 738 sensors can be implemented as one or more limit switches, electromechanical devices, solid state switches, Hall effect devices, magneto-resistive devices (MR) giant magneto-resistive devices (GMR), magnetometers, among others. In other implementations, the 738 sensors can be implemented as solid state switches that operate under the influence of light, such as optical sensors, infrared sensors, ultraviolet sensors, among others. In addition, the switches can be solid state devices such as transistors (for example, FET, junction FET, MOSFET, bipolar and the like). In other implementations, the 738 sensors can include driverless electric switches, ultrasonic switches, accelerometers and inertia sensors, among others.

[00440] In one aspect, sensors 738 can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 716 by the closing drive system. For example, one or more sensors 738 may be at a point of interaction between the closing tube and the anvil 716 to detect the closing forces applied by the closing tube to the anvil 716. The forces exerted on the anvil 716 may be representative of the tissue compression experienced by the tissue section captured between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718. The one or more sensors 738 can be positioned at various points of interaction throughout the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied to the anvil 716 by the closing drive system. The one or more sensors 738 can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by the processor of the control circuit 710. The control circuit 710 receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze information based on time and evaluate, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 716.

[00441] In one aspect, a current sensor 736 can be used to measure the current drawn by each of the 704a to 704e motors. The force required to advance any of the moving mechanical elements such as the I-beam profile 714 corresponds to the current drained by one of the motors 704a to 704e. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to control circuit 710. Control circuit 710 can be configured to simulate the response of the instrument's actual system in the controller software. A displacement member can be actuated to move an I-beam beam 714 on end actuator 702 at or near a desired speed. The robotic surgical instrument 700 may include a feedback controller, which may be one or any of the feedback controllers, including, but not limited to, a PID controller, state feedback, linear quadratic (LQR) and / or an adaptive controller , for example. The robotic surgical instrument 700 can include a power source to convert the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input such as case voltage, PWM voltage, frequency modulated voltage, current, torque and / or force, for example. Additional details are described in US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 636,829, entitled CLOSED LOOP VELOCITY CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR ROBOTIC SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed on June 29, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00442] Figure 51 illustrates a block diagram of a surgical instrument 750 programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member according to an aspect of the present description. In one aspect, the surgical instrument 750 is programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member, such as the I-profile beam 764. The surgical instrument 750 comprises an end actuator 752 that can comprise an anvil 766, a beam with I-shaped profile 764 (including a sharp cutting edge) and a removable staple cartridge 768.

[00443] The position, movement, displacement and / or translation of a linear displacement member, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 764, can be measured by an absolute positioning system, sensor arrangement and a position sensor 784. As the beam with I 764 profile is coupled to a longitudinally movable driving member, the position of the beam with I 764 profile can be determined by measuring the position of the longitudinally mobile driving member using the 784 position sensor. , in the following description, the position, displacement and / or translation of the I-profile beam 764 can be obtained by the position sensor 784, as described in the present invention. A control circuit 760 can be programmed to control the translation of the displacement member, such as the I-profile beam 764. The control circuit 760, in some examples, may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other suitable processors the instructions that cause the processor or processors to control the displacement member, for example, the I 764 profile beam, as described. In one aspect, a timer / counter 781 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to the control circuit 760 to correlate the beam position with I-shaped profile 764, as determined by the position sensor 784 with the timer / counter output 781, so that the control circuit 760 can determine the position of the I-profile beam 764 at a specific time (t) in relation to an initial position. The 781 timer / counter can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or measure external events.

[00444] Control circuit 760 can generate a 772 motor setpoint signal. The 772 motor setpoint signal can be supplied to a 758 motor controller. The 758 motor controller can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide a motor 774 drive signal to motor 754 to drive motor 754, as described in the present invention. In some instances, the 754 motor may be a DC motor with a brushed DC electric motor. For example, the speed of motor 754 can be proportional to the drive signal of motor 774. In some instances, motor 754 can be a brushless DC electric motor and the motor drive signal 774 can comprise a PWM signal provided for a or more motor stator windings

754. In addition, in some instances, motor controller 758 can be omitted, and control circuit 760 can generate motor drive signal 774 directly.

[00445] The 754 motor can receive power from an energy source

762. The 762 power source can be or include a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. The 754 motor can be mechanically coupled to the I-profile beam 764 by means of a 756 transmission. The 756 transmission can include one or more gears or other connecting components to couple the 754 motor to the I-profile beam 764. A sensor of position 784 can detect a position of the beam with I-profile 764. The position sensor 784 can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicate a position of the beam with I-profile 764. In In some examples, the position sensor 784 may include an encoder configured to supply a series of pulses to the control circuit 760 as the I-beam beam 764 is moved distally and proximally. The control circuit 760 can track pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 764. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the I-profile beam

764. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 784 may be omitted. When the motor 754 is a stepper motor, the control circuit 760 can track the position of the I-profile beam 764 by aggregating the number and orientation of the steps that the motor 754 has been instructed to perform. The position sensor 784 can be located on end actuator 752 or any other portion of the instrument.

[00446] The control circuit 760 can be in communication with one or more sensors 788. The sensors 788 can be positioned on the end actuator 752 and adapted to work with the surgical instrument 750 to measure the various derived parameters, such as span distance versus time, tissue compression versus time and anvil effort versus time. The 788 sensors can comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a stress meter, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, an inductive sensor, such as a eddy current sensor, a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, a optical sensor and / or any other sensors suitable for measuring one or more parameters of the 752 end actuator. The 788 sensors may include one or more sensors.

[00447] The one or more sensors 788 may comprise a stress meter, such as a microstrain meter, configured to measure the magnitude of the stress on the anvil 766 during a clamping condition. The voltage meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the voltage. The 788 sensors can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The 788 sensors can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of tissue located between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[00448] The 788 sensors can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 766 by a closing drive system. For example, one or more sensors 788 may be at a point of interaction between the closing tube and the anvil 766 to detect the closing forces applied by a closing tube to the anvil 766. The forces exerted on the anvil 766 may be representative. of the tissue compression experienced by the tissue section captured between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The one or more sensors 788 can be positioned at various points of interaction throughout the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied anvil 766 by the closing drive system. The one or more 788 sensors can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by a processor from the 760 control circuit. The 760 control circuit receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze time-based information and evaluate, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 766.

[00449] A current sensor 786 can be used to measure the current drained by the motor 754. The force required to advance the beam with I-shaped profile 764 corresponds to the current drained by the motor

754. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the control circuit 760.

[00450] The control circuit 760 can be configured to simulate the response of the real system of the instrument in the controller software. A displacement member can be actuated to move a beam with I-profile 764 on end actuator 752 at or near a desired speed. The surgical instrument 750 may include a feedback controller, which can be one of any feedback feedback controllers, including, but not limited to, a PID controller, state feedback, LQR, and / or an adaptive controller, for example. The surgical instrument 750 can include a power source to convert the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input such as housing voltage, PWM voltage, frequency modulated voltage, current,

torque and / or force, for example.

[00451] The actual drive system of the surgical instrument 750 is configured to drive the displacement member, the cutting member or the beam with I-764 profile, by a brushed DC motor with gearbox and mechanical connections to a control system. joint and / or a knife. Another example is the 754 electric motor that operates the displacement member and the articulation drive, for example, from an interchangeable drive shaft assembly. An external influence is an unmeasured and unpredictable influence on things like tissue, surrounding bodies, and friction in the physical system. This external influence can be called drag, which acts in opposition to the electric motor

754. External influence, such as drag, can cause the functioning of the physical system to deviate from a desired operation of the physical system.

[00452] Several exemplifying aspects are directed to a 750 surgical instrument that comprises a 752 end actuator with motor-driven surgical stapling and cutting implements. For example, a motor 754 can drive a displacement member distally and proximally along a longitudinal geometric axis of end actuator 752. End actuator 752 may comprise a pivot anvil 766 and, when configured for use, a staples 768 positioned on the opposite side of anvil 766. A doctor can hold the tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768, as described in the present invention. When ready to use the 750 instrument, the physician can provide a trigger signal, for example, by pressing a trigger on the 750 instrument. In response to the trigger signal, motor 754 can drive the displacement member distally along the longitudinal geometric axis of the end actuator 752 from a proximal start position to an end position distal from the start position. As the displacement member moves distally, an I 764 profile beam with a cutting element positioned at a distal end can cut the fabric between the staple cartridge 768 and the anvil

766.

[00453] In several examples, the surgical instrument 750 may comprise a control circuit 760 programmed to control the distal translation of the displacement member, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 764, for example, based on one or more tissue conditions . The control circuit 760 can be programmed to directly or indirectly detect tissue conditions, such as thickness, as described here. Control circuit 760 can be programmed to select a trigger control program based on tissue conditions. A trigger control program can describe the distal movement of the displacement member. Different trigger control programs can be selected to better treat different tissue conditions. For example, when thicker tissue is present, control circuit 760 can be programmed to translate the displacement member at a lower speed and / or with a lower power. When a thinner fabric is present, the control circuit 760 can be programmed to move the displacement member at a higher speed and / or with greater power.

[00454] In some examples, control circuit 760 may initially operate motor 754 in an open circuit configuration for a first open circuit portion of a travel of the displacement member. Based on an instrument response 750 during the open circuit portion of the course, control circuit 760 can select a trip control program. The response of the instrument may include a travel distance of the displacement member during the open circuit portion, a time elapsed during the open circuit portion, the power supplied to the motor 754 during the open circuit portion, a sum of pulse widths a motor start signal, etc. After the open circuit portion, control circuit 760 can implement the selected trigger control program for a second portion of the travel member travel. For example, during the closed loop portion of the stroke, control circuit 760 can modulate motor 754 based on translation data that describes a position of the displacement member in a closed circuit manner to translate the displacement member into a constant speed. Additional details are described in US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 720,852, entitled SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A DISPLAY OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed on September 29, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00455] Figure 52 is a schematic diagram of a 790 surgical instrument configured to control various functions in accordance with an aspect of the present description. In one aspect, the 790 surgical instrument is programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member, such as the I-profile beam

764. The surgical instrument 790 comprises an end actuator 792 which can comprise an anvil 766, an I-beam beam 764 and a removable staple cartridge 768 which can be interchanged with an RF cartridge 796 (shown in dashed line).

[00456] In one aspect, the 788 sensors can be implemented as a limit switch, electromechanical device, solid state switches, Hall effect devices, MRI devices, GMR devices, magnetometers, among others. In other implementations, the sensors

638 can be solid state switches that operate under the influence of light, such as optical sensors, infrared sensors, ultraviolet sensors, among others. In addition, the switches can be solid state devices such as transistors (for example, FET, junction FET, MOSFET, bipolar and the like). In other implementations, 788 sensors can include driverless electric switches, ultrasonic switches, accelerometers and inertia sensors, among others.

[00457] In one aspect, the position sensor 784 can be implemented as an absolute positioning system, comprising an absolute rotary magnetic positioning system implemented as a single integrated circuit rotary magnetic position sensor AS5055EQFT, available from Austria Microsystems , AG. The position sensor 784 can interface with the control circuit 760 to provide an absolute positioning system. The position can include multiple Hall effect elements located above a magnet and coupled to a CORDIC processor, also known as the digit by digit method and Volder's algorithm, which is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions which only require addition, subtraction, bit shift and table search operations.

[00458] In one aspect, the beam with I-764 profile can be implemented as a knife member comprising a knife body which operationally supports a fabric cutting blade therein and may also include anvil hinges or flaps. and channel hitch or base features. In one aspect, the staple cartridge 768 can be implemented as a standard (mechanical) surgical clamp cartridge. In one aspect, the RF cartridge 796 can be implemented as an RF cartridge. These and other sensor provisions are described in Commonly Owned US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 628,175, entitled TECHNIQUES

FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF MOTOR VELOCITY OF A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT, filed on June 20, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00459] The position, movement, displacement and / or translation of a linear displacement member, such as the beam with I-764 profile, can be measured by an absolute positioning system, sensor arrangement and position sensor represented as the position sensor 784. Since the I-beam beam 764 is coupled to the longitudinally movable drive member, the position of the I-beam beam 764 can be determined by measuring the position of the longitudinally mobile drive member using the position 784. Consequently, in the description below, the position, displacement and / or translation of the I-profile beam 764 can be obtained by the position sensor 784, as described in the present invention. A control circuit 760 can be programmed to control the translation of the displacement member, such as the I-profile beam 764, as described here. The control circuit 760, in some examples, may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other suitable processors to execute the instructions that cause the processor or processors to control the displacement member, for example, the I-shaped beam 764 , as described. In one aspect, a timer / counter 781 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to the control circuit 760 to correlate the beam position with I-shaped profile 764, as determined by the position sensor 784 with the timer / counter output 781, so that the control circuit 760 can determine the position of the I-profile beam 764 at a specific time (t) in relation to an initial position. The 781 timer / counter can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or measure external events.

[00460] Control circuit 760 can generate a 772 motor setpoint signal. The 772 motor setpoint signal can be supplied to a 758 motor controller. The 758 motor controller can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide a motor 774 drive signal to motor 754 to drive motor 754, as described in the present invention. In some instances, the 754 motor may be a DC motor with a brushed DC electric motor. For example, the speed of motor 754 can be proportional to the drive signal of motor 774. In some instances, motor 754 can be a brushless DC electric motor and the motor drive signal 774 can comprise a PWM signal provided for a or more motor stator windings

754. In addition, in some instances, motor controller 758 can be omitted, and control circuit 760 can generate motor drive signal 774 directly.

[00461] The 754 motor can receive power from a power source

762. The 762 power source can be or include a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. The 754 motor can be mechanically coupled to the I-profile beam 764 by means of a 756 transmission. The 756 transmission can include one or more gears or other connecting components to couple the 754 motor to the I-profile beam 764. A sensor of position 784 can detect a position of the beam with I-profile 764. The position sensor 784 can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicate a position of the beam with I-profile 764. In In some examples, the position sensor 784 may include an encoder configured to supply a series of pulses to the control circuit 760 as the I-beam beam 764 is moved distally and proximally. The control circuit 760 can track pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 764. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the I-profile beam

764. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 784 may be omitted. When motor 754 is a stepper motor, control circuit 760 can track the position of the I-profile beam 764 by aggregating the number and orientation of the steps the motor has been instructed to perform. Position sensor 784 can be located on end actuator 792 or any other portion of the instrument.

[00462] The control circuit 760 can be in communication with one or more sensors 788. The sensors 788 can be positioned on the end actuator 792 and adapted to work with the surgical instrument 790 to measure the various derived parameters, such as span distance versus time, tissue compression versus time and anvil effort versus time. The 788 sensors can comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a stress meter, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, an inductive sensor such as a eddy current sensor, a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, a sensor optical and / or any other sensors suitable for measuring one or more parameters of the end actuator 792. The 788 sensors may include one or more sensors.

[00463] The one or more sensors 788 may comprise an effort meter, such as a microstrain meter, configured to measure the magnitude of the stress on the anvil 766 during a clamping condition. The voltage meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the voltage. The 788 sensors can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The 788 sensors can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of tissue located between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[00464] The 788 sensors can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 766 by the closing drive system. For example, one or more sensors 788 may be at a point of interaction between the closing tube and the anvil 766 to detect the closing forces applied by a closing tube to the anvil 766. The forces exerted on the anvil 766 may be representative. of the tissue compression experienced by the tissue section captured between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The one or more sensors 788 can be positioned at various points of interaction throughout the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied anvil 766 by the closing drive system. The one or more sensors 788 can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by a processor portion of the control circuit 760. The control circuit 760 receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze information based on time and evaluate, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 766.

[00465] A current sensor 786 can be used to measure the current drained by the 754 motor. The force required to advance the beam with I-shaped profile 764 corresponds to the current drained by the motor

754. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the control circuit 760.

[00466] An RF power source 794 is coupled to the end actuator 792 and is applied to the RF 796 cartridge when the RF 796 cartridge is loaded on the end actuator 792 in place of the staple cartridge 768. The control circuit 760 controls the supply of RF energy to the 796 RF cartridge.

[00467] Additional details are described in US patent application serial number 15 / 636,096, entitled SURGICAL SYSTEM COUPLABLE

WITH STAPLE CARTRIDGE AND RADIO FREQUENCY CARTRIDGE, AND METHOD OF USING SAME, deposited on June 28, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Generator hardware

[00468] Figure 53 is a simplified block diagram of a generator 800 configured to provide adjustment without inductor, among other benefits. Additional details of generator 800 are described in US Patent No. 9,060,775, entitled SURGICAL GENERATOR FOR ULTRASONIC AND ELECTROSURGICAL DEVICES, granted on June 23, 2015 and which is incorporated herein by reference, in its entirety. The generator 800 can comprise a patient isolated stage 802 in communication with a non-isolated stage 804 via a power transformer 806. A secondary winding 808 of the power transformer 806 is contained in the isolated stage 802 and can comprise a bypass configuration. (for example, a central bypass or non-central bypass configuration) to define the trigger signal outputs 810a, 810b, 810c, in order to deliver trigger signals to different surgical instruments, such as an ultrasonic surgical instrument, an electrosurgical instrument RF and a multifunctional surgical instrument that includes ultrasonic and RF energy modes that can be released alone or simultaneously. In particular, trigger signal emissions

810a, 810c can provide an ultrasonic trigger signal (for example, a 420 V medium square [RMS] trigger signal) to an ultrasonic surgical instrument, and trigger signal emissions 810b and 810c can provide an electrosurgical RF drive (for example, a 100 V RMS drive signal) to an RF electrosurgical instrument, the output of the drive signal 810b corresponding to the central tap of the 806 power transformer.

[00469] In certain forms, ultrasonic and electrosurgical trigger signals can be supplied simultaneously to different surgical instruments and / or to a single surgical instrument with the ability to supply both ultrasonic and electrosurgical energy to the tissue. It will be noted that the electrosurgical signal provided by both the dedicated electrosurgical instrument and the multifunctional electrosurgical / ultrasonic combined instrument can be both a therapeutic and subtherapeutic signal, where the subtherapeutic signal can be used, for example, to monitor tissue or condition of the instruments and provide feedback to the generator. For example, RF and ultrasonic signals can be provided separately or simultaneously from a generator with a single output port in order to provide the desired output signal to the surgical instrument, as will be discussed in more detail below. Consequently, the generator can combine the RF and ultrasonic electrosurgical energies and supply the combined energies to the multifunctional electrosurgical / ultrasonic instrument. Bipolar electrodes can be placed on one or both claws of the end actuator. A claw can be triggered by ultrasonic energy in addition to RF electrosurgical energy, working simultaneously. Ultrasonic energy can be used to dissect tissue while RF electrosurgical energy can be used to cauterize vessels.

[00470] The non-isolated stage 804 may comprise a power amplifier 812 having an output connected to a primary winding 814 of the power transformer 806. In certain forms the power amplifier 812 may comprise a push and pull amplifier. For example, the non-isolated stage 804 may also contain a logic device 816 to provide a digital output to a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 818 circuit, which in turn provides a signal analog corresponding to a power amplifier input

812. In certain forms, the 816 logic device may comprise a programmable gate array (PGA), an FPGA, a programmable logic device (PLD, programmable logic device), and other logic circuits , for example. The logic device 816, because it controls the input of the power amplifier 812 through the DAC circuit 818, can therefore control any of several parameters (for example, frequency, waveform, amplitude of the waveform) of drive appearing at drive signal outputs 810a, 810b and 810c. In certain ways and as discussed below, logic device 816, in conjunction with a processor (for example, a PSD discussed below), can implement various PSD-based control algorithms and / or other control algorithms to control parameters of the signal signals. triggered by generator 800.

[00471] Power can be supplied to a power rail of the power amplifier 812 by a key mode regulator 820, such as, for example, a power converter. In certain forms, the key mode regulator 820 may comprise an adjustable antagonistic regulator, for example. The non-isolated stage 804 can further comprise a first processor 822 which, in one form, can comprise a PSD processor as an analog device ADSP-21469 SHARC PSD, available from Analog Devices, Norwood, MA, USA, for example , although in various forms, any suitable processor can be used. In certain ways, the PSD 822 processor can control the operation of the key mode regulator 820 responsive to voltage feedback data from the power amplifier 812 by the PSD 822 processor via an analog to digital converter circuit (converter AD) 824. In one form, for example, the PSD 822 processor can receive as input, through the AD 824 converter circuit, the waveform envelope of a signal (for example, an RF signal) is amplified by the power amplifier 812. The PSD processor 822 can then control the key mode regulator 820 (for example, via a pulse-width modulated PWM output) so that the voltage track provided to the power amplifier 812 follow the waveform envelope of the amplified signal Dynamically modulating the rail voltage of the power amplifier 812 based on the waveform envelope, the efficiency of the power amplifier 812 can be significantly improved over amplifier schemes with fixed rail voltage.

[00472] In certain forms, the logical device 816, in conjunction with the PSD 822 processor, can implement a digital synthesis circuit as a control scheme with direct digital synthesizer to control the waveform, frequency and / or the amplitude of the trigger signals emitted by the generator 800. In one way, for example, the logic device 816 can implement a control algorithm of

DDS by retrieving waveform samples stored in a dynamically updated lookup table (LUT), such as a RAM LUT that can be integrated into an FPGA.

This control algorithm is particularly useful for ultrasonic applications in which an ultrasonic transducer, such as an ultrasonic transducer, can be driven by a clean sinusoidal current at its resonant frequency.

Since other frequencies can excite parasitic resonances, minimizing or reducing the total distortion of the branching current can correspondingly minimize or reduce the undesirable effects of the resonance.

As the waveform of a drive signal output by generator 800 is impacted by various sources of distortion present in the output drive circuit (for example, power transformer 806, power amplifier 812), feedback data of voltage and current based on the trigger signal can be provided to an algorithm, such as an algorithm for error control implemented by the PSD 822 processor, which compensates for the distortion through adequate pre-distortion or modification of the stored waveform samples in the LUT in a dynamic and continuous way (for example, in real time). In one way, the amount or degree of pre-distortion applied to the LUT samples can be based on the error between a current from the computerized motion branch and a desired current waveform, the error being determined on a basis of sample by sample.

In this way, pre-distorted LUT samples, when processed through the drive circuit, can result in a motion branch drive signal that has the desired waveform (for example, sinusoidal) to optimally drive the transducer ultrasonic.

In such forms, the LUT waveform samples will therefore not represent the desired waveform of the trigger signal, but rather the waveform that is needed to ultimately produce the desired waveform of the trigger signal of the movement branch, when the distortion effects are taken into account.

[00473] The non-isolated stage 804 can also comprise a first converter circuit AD 826 and a second converter circuit A-D 828 coupled to the output of the power transformer 806 by means of the respective isolation transformers 830 and 832, to respectively sample the voltage and the current of drive signals emitted by the generator 800. In certain ways, the AD 826 and 828 converter circuits can be configured for high-speed sampling (for example, 80 mega samples per second [MSPS]) to allow over-sampling of the signals drive. In one way, for example, the sampling speed of the A-D converter circuits 826 and 828 can allow an oversampling of approximately 200x (depending on the frequency) of the drive signals. In certain ways, the sampling operations of the A-D converter circuit 826 and 828 can be performed by a single A-D converter circuit receiving voltage and current input signals via a bidirectional multiplexer. The use of high-speed sampling in the forms of generator 800 can allow, among other things, the calculation of the complex current flowing through the branch of motion (which can be used in certain ways to implement DDS-based waveform control described above), accurate digital filtering of the sampled signals and the calculation of actual energy consumption with a high degree of accuracy. The feedback data about voltage and current emitted by the AD 826 and 828 converter circuits can be received and processed (for example, first-input-first-output [FIFO], multiplexer) by the logic device 816 and stored in memory data for subsequent retrieval, for example, by the PSD 822 processor. As noted above, voltage and current feedback data can be used as input to an algorithm for pre-distortion or modification of waveform samples in the LUT, dynamically and continuously. In certain ways, this may require that each stored voltage and current feedback data pair be indexed based on, or otherwise associated with, a sample of the corresponding LUT that was provided by logic device 816 when the data pair of feedback on voltage and current was captured. The synchronization of the LUT samples with the feedback data about voltage and current in this way contributes to the correct timing and stability of the pre-distortion algorithm.

[00474] In certain forms, voltage and current feedback data can be used to control the frequency and / or amplitude (for example, current amplitude) of the trigger signals. In one way, for example, feedback data about voltage and current can be used to determine the impedance phase. The frequency of the trigger signal can then be controlled to minimize or reduce the difference between the determined impedance phase and an impedance phase setpoint (eg 0 °), thereby minimizing or reducing the effects of harmonic distortion. and, correspondingly, accentuating the accuracy of the impedance phase measurement. The determination of the phase impedance and a frequency control signal can be implemented in the PSD 822 processor, for example, with the frequency control signal being supplied as input to a DDS control algorithm implemented by the logic device 816.

[00475] In another form, for example, the current feedback data can be monitored in order to maintain the current amplitude of the drive signal at a current amplitude setpoint. The current amplitude set point can be specified directly or indirectly determined based on the specified set points for voltage and power amplitude. In certain ways, current amplitude control can be implemented by the control algorithm, for example, a proportional-integral-derivative control algorithm (PID), in the PSD processor

822. Variables controlled by the control algorithm to properly control the current amplitude of the trigger signal may include, for example, the scaling of the LUT waveform samples stored in logic device 816 and / or the output voltage full scale of the DAC circuit 818 (which provides input to the power amplifier 812) through a DAC circuit 834.

[00476] The non-isolated stage 804 may further comprise a second processor 836 to provide, among other things, the functionality of the user interface (UI). In one form, the UI 836 processor can comprise an Atmel AT91SAM9263 processor with an ARM 926EJ-S core, available from Atmel Corporation, of San Jose, CA, USA, for example. Examples of UI functionality supported by the UI 836 processor may include audible and visual feedback from the user, communication with peripheral devices (for example, via a USB interface), communication with the foot switch, communication with an input device ( for example, a touchscreen) and communication with an output device (for example, a speaker). The UI processor 836 can communicate with the PSD processor 822 and the logical device 816 (for example, via SPI buses). Although the UI 836 processor can primarily support UI functionality, it can also coordinate with the PSD 822 processor to implement risk mitigation in certain ways. For example, the UI 836 processor can be programmed to monitor various aspects of user inputs and / or other inputs (for example, touchscreen inputs, foot switch inputs, temperature sensor inputs) and can disable the drive output of generator 800 when an error condition is detected.

[00477] In certain ways, both the PSD 822 processor and the UI 836 processor can, for example, determine and monitor the operational state of generator 800. For the PSD 822 processor, the operational state of generator 800 can determine, for example, which control and / or diagnostic processes are implemented by the PSD 822 processor. For the UI 836 processor, the operational state of generator 800 can determine, for example, which elements of a UI (for example, display screens , sounds) are presented to a user. The respective UI and PSD processors 836, 822 can independently maintain the current operational state of generator 800, as well as recognize and evaluate possible transitions out of the current operational state. The PSD 822 processor can act as the master in this relationship, and can determine when transitions between operational states should occur. The UI 836 processor can be aware of valid transitions between operational states, and can confirm that a particular transition is adequate. For example, when the PSD 822 processor instructs the UI 836 processor to transition to a specific state, the UI 836 processor can verify that the requested transition is valid. If a requested transition between states is determined to be invalid by the UI 836 processor, the UI 836 processor can cause generator 800 to enter a fault mode.

[00478] The non-isolated platform 804 may further comprise a controller 838 for monitoring input devices (for example, a capacitive touch sensor used to turn generator 800 on and off, a capacitive touch screen). In certain ways, controller 838 may comprise at least one processor and / or other controller device in communication with the UI processor 836. In one form, for example, controller 838 may comprise a processor (for example, a Meg168 controller of 8 bits available from Atmel) configured to monitor user inputs via one or more capacitive touch sensors. In one way, the 838 controller can comprise a touchscreen controller (for example, a QT5480 touchscreen controller available from Atmel) to control and manage the capture of touch data from a capacitive touchscreen to the touch.

[00479] In certain ways, when generator 800 is in an "off" state, controller 838 can continue to receive operational power (for example, through a line from a generator 800 power source, such as the power source 854 discussed below). In this way, controller 838 can continue to monitor an input device (for example, a capacitive touch sensor located on a front panel of generator 800) to turn generator 800 on and off. When generator 800 is in the off state, the controller 838 can wake up the power source (for example, make it possible for one or more 856 DC / DC voltage converters to run from the 854 power source) if a user activates the "on / off" input device . Controller 838 can therefore initiate a sequence to transition the generator 800 to an "on" state. On the other hand, controller 838 can initiate a sequence to transition the generator 800 to the off state if activation of the "on / off" input device is detected, when the generator 800 is in the on state. In certain ways, for example, controller 838 may report the activation of the "on / off" input device to processor 836 which, in turn, implements the process sequence necessary to transition generator 800 to the off state. In such forms, controller 838 may not have any independent capacity to cause the removal of power from generator 800 after its on state has been established.

[00480] In certain forms, controller 838 may cause generator 800 to provide audible feedback or other sensory feedback to alert the user that an on or off sequence has been initiated. This type of alert can be provided at the beginning of an on or off sequence, and before the start of other processes associated with the sequence.

[00481] In certain forms, the isolated stage 802 may comprise an instrument interface circuit 840 to, for example, provide a communication interface between a control circuit of a surgical instrument (for example, a control circuit comprising switches handle) and non-isolated stage components 804, such as logic device 816, PSD processor 822 and / or UI processor 836. Instrument interface circuit 840 can exchange information with non-stage components isolated 804 by means of a communication link that maintains an adequate degree of electrical isolation between the isolated and non-isolated stages 802 and 804 such as, for example, an infrared (IR) communication link. Power can be supplied to the instrument interface circuit 840 using, for example, a low-drop voltage regulator powered by an isolation transformer driven from the non-isolated stage 804.

[00482] In one form, the instrument interface circuit 840 can comprise a logic circuit 842 (for example, a logic circuit, a programmable logic circuit, PGA, FPGA, PLD) in communication with a signal conditioning circuit 844. Signal conditioning circuit 844 can be configured to receive a periodic signal from logic circuit 842 (e.g., a 2 kHz square wave) to generate a bipolar interrogation signal that has an identical frequency. The question mark can be generated, for example, using a bipolar current source powered by a differential amplifier. The question mark can be communicated to a surgical instrument control circuit (for example, using a conductive pair on a cable that connects the generator 800 to the surgical instrument) and monitored to determine a state or configuration of the control circuit . The control circuit can comprise numerous switches, resistors and / or diodes to modify one or more characteristics (for example, amplitude, rectification) of the question mark so that a state or configuration of the control circuit is unambiguously discernible, based on that one or more characteristics. In one form, for example, signal conditioning circuit 844 may comprise an A-D converter circuit for generating samples of a voltage signal appearing between inputs of the control circuit, resulting from the passage of the interrogation signal through it. Logic circuit 842 (or a non-isolated stage component 804) can then determine the status or configuration of the control circuit based on samples from A-D converter circuits.

[00483] In one form, the instrument interface circuit 840 may comprise a first data circuit interface 846 to enable the exchange of information between logic circuit 842 (or another element of the instrument interface circuit 840) and a first data circuit disposed in a surgical instrument or otherwise associated with it. In certain forms, for example, a first data circuit may be arranged on a cable integrally attached to a handle of the surgical instrument or on an adapter to interface between a specific type or model of surgical instrument and the generator 800. The first The data circuit can be deployed in any suitable manner and can communicate with the generator in accordance with any suitable protocol, including, for example, as described here with respect to the first data circuit. In certain forms, the first data circuit may comprise a non-volatile storage device, such as an EEPROM device. In certain ways, the first data circuit interface 846 can be implemented separately from logic circuit 842 and comprises a suitable circuitry (for example, separate logic devices, a processor) to allow communication between logic circuit 842 and the first data circuit. In other forms, the first data circuit interface 846 can be integral with logic circuit 842.

[00484] In certain forms, the first data circuit can store information related to the specific surgical instrument with which it is associated. This information may include, for example, a model number, a serial number, a number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used, and / or any other types of information. This information can be read by the instrument interface circuit 840 (for example, logic circuit 842), transferred to a component of the non-isolated stage 804 (for example, to logic device 816, PSD processor 822 and / or processor UI 836) for presentation to a user by means of an output device and / or to control a function or operation of the generator 800. In addition, any type of information can be communicated to the first data circuit for storage in the same through the first data circuit interface 846 (for example, using logic circuit 842). This information may include, for example, an updated number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used and / or the dates and / or times of its use.

[00485] As previously discussed, a surgical instrument can be removable from a handle (for example, the multifunctional surgical instrument can be removable from the handle) to promote interchangeability and / or disposability of the instrument. In such cases, conventional generators may be limited in their ability to recognize specific instrument configurations being used, as well as to optimize the control and diagnostic processes as needed. The addition of readable data circuits to surgical instruments to address this issue is problematic from a compatibility point of view, however. For example, designing a surgical instrument so that it remains backward compatible with generators that lack the indispensable data reading functionality may be impractical due, for example, to different signaling schemes, design complexity and cost. The forms of instruments discussed here address these concerns through the use of data circuits that can be implemented in existing surgical instruments, economically and with minimal design changes to preserve the compatibility of surgical instruments with current generator platforms.

[00486] In addition, the shapes of the generator 800 may allow communication with instrument-based data circuits. For example, generator 800 can be configured to communicate with a second data circuit contained in an instrument (for example, the multifunctional surgical instrument). In some ways, the second data circuit can be implemented in a manner similar to that of the first data circuit described here. The instrument interface circuit 840 may comprise a second data circuit interface 848 to enable such communication. In one form, the second data circuit interface 848 can comprise a three-state digital interface, although other interfaces can also be used. In certain ways, the second data circuit can generally be any circuit for transmitting and / or receiving data. In one form, for example, the second data circuit can store information related to the specific surgical instrument with which it is associated. This information may include, for example, a model number, a serial number, a number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used, and / or any other types of information.

[00487] In some ways, the second data circuit can store information about the ultrasonic and / or electronic properties of an associated ultrasonic transducer, end actuator or ultrasonic drive system. For example, the first data circuit can indicate an initialization frequency slope, as described here. In addition or alternatively, any type of information can be communicated to the second data circuit for storage in it via the second data circuit interface 848 (for example, using logic circuit 842). This information may include, for example, an updated number of operations in which the instrument was used and / or the dates and / or times of its use. In certain ways, the second data circuit can transmit data captured by one or more sensors (for example, an instrument-based temperature sensor). In certain ways, the second data circuit can receive data from generator 800 and provide an indication to a user (for example, a light-emitting indication or other visible indication) based on the received data.

[00488] In certain ways, the second data circuit and the second data circuit interface 848 can be configured so that communication between logic circuit 842 and the second data circuit can be made without the need to provide additional conductors for this purpose (for example, dedicated conductors of a cable that connects a handle to the generator 800). In one way, for example, information can be communicated to or from the second data circuit using a wire bus communication scheme, implemented in the existing wiring, as one of the conductors used to transmit signal signals. interrogation from signal conditioning circuit 844 to a control circuit on a handle. In this way, changes or modifications to the design of the surgical device that may otherwise be necessary are minimized or reduced. In addition, due to the fact that different types of communications implemented on a common physical channel can be separated based on frequency, the presence of a second data circuit can be "invisible" to generators that do not have the essential functionality of reading data, which, therefore, allows the backward compatibility of the surgical instrument.

[00489] In certain forms, the isolated stage 802 may comprise at least one blocking capacitor 850-1 connected to the output of the trigger signal 810b to prevent the passage of direct current to a patient. A single blocking capacitor may be required to comply with medical regulations and standards, for example. Although failures in single-capacitor designs are relatively uncommon, such failures can still have negative consequences. In one form, a second blocking capacitor 850-2 can be placed in series with the blocking capacitor 850-1, with current dispersion of one point between the blocking capacitors 850-1 and 850-2 being monitored, for example , by an AD 852 converter circuit for sampling a voltage induced by current leakage. Samples can be received, for example, via logic circuit 842. Changes based on current leakage (as indicated by the voltage samples), generator 800 can determine when at least one of the blocking capacitors 850-1, 850- 2 has failed, thus offering a benefit over single capacitor designs that have a single point of failure.

[00490] In certain embodiments, the non-isolated stage 804 may comprise a power source 854 to deliver DC power with adequate voltage and current. The power source may comprise, for example, a 400 W power supply to deliver a system voltage of 48 VDC. The power source 854 can further comprise one or more DC / DC voltage converters 856 to receive the output from the power source to generate DC outputs at the voltages and currents required by the various components of the generator

800. As discussed above in relation to the 838 controller, one or more of the 856 DC / DC voltage converters can receive an input from the 838 controller when the activation of the "on / off" input device by a user is detected by the 838 controller , to enable the operation or awakening of the 856 DC / DC voltage converters.

[00491] Figure 54 illustrates an example of generator 900, which is a form of generator 800 (Figure 53). The 900 generator is configured to supply multiple types of energy to a surgical instrument. The 900 generator provides ultrasonic and RF signals to power a surgical instrument, independently or simultaneously. Ultrasonic and RF signals can be provided alone or in combination and can be provided simultaneously. As indicated above, at least one generator output can provide multiple types of energy (for example, ultrasonic, bipolar or monopolar RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation, and / or microwave energy, among others) through a single port, and these signals can be supplied separately or simultaneously to the end actuator to treat tissue.

[00492] Generator 900 comprises a processor 902 coupled to a waveform generator 904. Processor 902 and waveform generator 904 are configured to generate various signal waveforms based on information stored in a coupled memory to processor 902, not shown for clarity of description. The digital information associated with a waveform is provided to the waveform generator 904 that includes one or more DAC circuits to convert the digital input to an analog output. The analog output is powered by an amplifier 1106 for signal conditioning and amplification. The conditioned and amplified output of amplifier 906 is coupled to a power transformer 908. The signals are coupled by the power transformer 908 to the secondary side, which is on the patient isolation side. A first signal of a first energy modality is supplied to the surgical instrument between the terminals identified as ENERGY1 and RETURN. A second signal of a second energy modality is coupled by a 910 capacitor and is supplied to the surgical instrument between the terminals identified as ENERGY2 and RETURN. It will be recognized that more than two types of energy can be issued and, therefore, the subscript "n" can be used to designate that up to n ENERGY terminals can be provided, where n is a positive integer greater than 1. It will also be acknowledged that up to "n" return paths, RETURN can be provided without departing from the scope of this description.

[00493] A second voltage detection circuit 912 is coupled through the terminals identified as ENERGY1 and the RETURN path to measure the output voltage between them. A second voltage detection circuit 924 is coupled through the terminals identified as ENERGY2 and the RETURN path to measure the output voltage between them. A current detection circuit 914 is arranged in series with the RETURN leg on the secondary side of the power transformer 908 as shown to measure the output current for any energy modality. If different return paths are provided for each energy modality, then a separate current detection circuit would be provided on each return leg. The outputs of the first and second voltage detection circuits 912, 924 are supplied to the respective isolation transformers 916, 922 and the output of the current detection circuit 914 is supplied to another isolation transformer 918. The outputs of the isolation transformers 916 , 928, 922 on the primary side of the power transformer 908 (non-isolated side of the patient) are supplied to one or more ADC 926 circuits. The digitized output from the ADC 926 circuit is provided to processor 902 for further processing and computation. The output voltages and the output current feedback information can be used to adjust the output voltage and the current supplied to the surgical instrument, and to compute the output impedance, among other parameters. Input / output communications between the 902 processor and the patient's isolated circuits are provided via a 920 interface circuit. The sensors may also be in electrical communication with the 902 processor via the 920 interface circuit.

[00494] In one aspect, impedance can be determined by processor 902 by dividing the output of the first voltage detection circuit 912 coupled over the terminals identified as ENERGY1 / RETURN or the second voltage detection circuit 924 connected over the terminals identified as ENERGY2 / RETURN, by the output of the current detection circuit 914 arranged in series with the RETURN leg on the secondary side of the power transformer 908. The outputs of the first and second voltage detection circuits 912, 924 are provided to separate transformer isolations 916, 922 and current detection circuit 914 output is provided to another isolation transformer 916. Digitized current and voltage detection measurements from ADC circuit 926 are provided to processor 902 to compute impedance. As an example, the first ENERGIA1 energy modality can be ultrasonic energy and the second ENERGIA2 energy modality can be RF energy. However, in addition to the ultrasonic and bipolar or monopolar RF energy modalities, other energy modalities include irreversible and / or reversible electroporation and / or microwave energy, among others. In addition, while the example shown in Figure 54 shows a single RETURN return path that can be provided for two or more energy modes, in other respects, multiple RETURN return paths can be provided for each ENERGY energy mode. Thus, as described herein, the impedance of the ultrasonic transducer can be measured by dividing the output of the first voltage detection circuit 912 by the current detection circuit 914 and the fabric impedance can be measured by dividing the output of the second voltage detection circuit 924 through current detection circuit 914.

[00495] As shown in Figure 54, generator 900, which comprises at least one output port, can include a power transformer 908 with a single output and multiple taps to provide power in the form of one or more energy modalities , such as ultrasonic, bipolar or monopolar RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation and / or microwave energy, among others, for example, to the end actuator depending on the type of tissue treatment being performed. For example, the 900 generator can supply higher voltage and lower current power to drive an ultrasonic transducer, lower voltage and higher current to drive RF electrodes to seal the tissue or with a coagulation waveform for point clotting using electrosurgical electrodes monopolar or bipolar RF. The output waveform of generator 900 can be oriented, switched or filtered to provide frequency to the end actuator of the surgical instrument. The connection of an ultrasonic transducer to the output of generator 900 would preferably be located between the output labeled ENERGY1 and RETURN as shown in Figure 54. In one example, a connection of bipolar RF electrodes to the output of generator 900 would preferably be located between the output identified as ENERGY2 and the RETURN. In the case of a monopolar output, the preferred connections would be an active electrode (for example, light beam or other probe) for the ENERGIA2 output and a suitable return block connected to the RETURN output.

[00496] Additional details are described in US patent application publication No. 2017/0086914 entitled TECHNIQUES FOR

OPERATING GENERATOR FOR DIGITALLY GENERATING ELECTRICAL SIGNAL WAVEFORMS AND SURGICAL

INSTRUMENTS, which was published on March 30, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[00497] As used throughout this description, the term "wireless" and its derivatives can be used to describe circuits, devices, systems, methods, techniques, communication channels etc., which can communicate data through the use of electromagnetic radiation modulated using a non-solid medium. The term does not imply that the associated devices do not contain any wires, although in some ways they may not. The communication module can implement any of a number of wireless and wired communication standards or protocols, including, but not limited to, Wi-Fi (IEEE 802.11 family), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16 family), IEEE 802.20, evolution long-term evolution (LTE), Ev-DO, HSPA +, HSDPA +, HSUPA +, EDGE, GSM, GPRS, CDMA, TDMA, DECT, Bluetooth, Ethernet derivatives thereof, as well as any other protocols without wired and wired which are designated as 3G, 4G, 5G, and beyond. The computing module can include a plurality of communication modules. For example, a first communication module can be dedicated to short-range wireless communications like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, and a second communication module can be dedicated to longer-range wireless communications like GPS, EDGE, GPRS, CDMA , WiMAX, LTE, Ev-DO, and others.

[00498] As used in the present invention, a processor or processing unit is an electronic circuit that performs operations on some external data source, usually memory or some other data flow. The term is used in the present invention to refer to the central processor (central processing unit) in a computer system or systems (specifically systems on a chip (SoCs)) that combine several

specialized "processors".

[00499] As used here, a system on a chip or system on the chip (SoC or SOC) is an integrated circuit (also known as an "IC" or "chip") that integrates all components of a computer or other electronic systems . It can contain digital, analog, mixed and often radio frequency functions - all on a single substrate. A SoC integrates a microcontroller (or microprocessor) with advanced peripherals such as a graphics processing unit (GPU), i-Fi module, or coprocessor. An SoC may or may not contain internal memory.

[00500] As used here, a microcontroller or controller is a system that integrates a microprocessor with peripheral circuits and memory. A microcontroller (or MCU for microcontroller unit) can be implemented as a small computer on a single integrated circuit. It can be similar to a SoC; a SoC can include a microcontroller as one of its components. A microcontroller can contain one or more core processing units (CPUs) along with memory and programmable input / output peripherals. Program memory in the form of ferroelectric RAM, NOR flash or OTP ROM is also often included on the chip, as well as a small amount of RAM. Microcontrollers can be used for integrated applications, in contrast to microprocessors used in personal computers or other general purpose applications that consist of several separate integrated circuits.

[00501] As used in the present invention, the term controller or microcontroller can be an independent chip or IC (integrated circuit) device that interfaces with a peripheral device. This can be a connection between two parts of a computer or a controller on an external device that manages the operation of (and connection to) that device.

[00502] Any of the processors or microcontrollers in the present invention can be any implemented by any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the trade name of ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. In one respect, the processor may be a Core Cortex-M4F LM4F230H5QR ARM processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises an integrated 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz , a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, memory only programmable, electrically erasable (EEPROM) reading of 2 KB, one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more analogs of quadrature encoder (QEI) inputs, one or more analog to digital converters (ADC) 12-bit with 12 channels of analog input, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[00503] In one aspect, the processor may comprise a safety controller that comprises two controller-based families, such as TMS570 and RM4x, known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. The safety controller can be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[00504] The modular devices include the modules (as described in connection with Figures 3 and 9, for example) that are receivable within a central surgical controller and the devices or surgical instruments that can be connected to the various modules in order to connect or pair with the corresponding central surgical controller. Modular devices include, for example, smart surgical instruments, medical imaging devices, suction / irrigation devices, smoke evacuators, power generators, fans, insufflators and displays. The modular devices described here can be controlled by control algorithms. The control algorithms can be executed on the modular device itself, on the central surgical controller to which the specific modular device is paired, or on both the modular device and the central surgical controller (for example, surgical (for example, through a distributed computing.) In some examples, the control algorithms of the modular devices control the devices based on the data detected by the modular device itself (ie, by sensors on, over or connected to the modular device). These data can be related to the patient being operated (for example, tissue properties or inflation pressure) or the modular device itself (for example, the rate at which a knife is being advanced, the motor current, or energy levels). control algorithm for a surgical stapling and cutting instrument can control the rate at which the instrument's motor drives its knife until through the fabric according to the resistance encountered by the knife as it progresses. Situational recognition

[00505] Situational recognition is the ability of some aspects of a surgical system to determine or infer information related to a surgical procedure from data received from databases and / or instruments. The information may include the type of procedure being performed, the type of tissue being operated on, or the body cavity that is the subject of the procedure. By providing contextual information related to the surgical procedure, the surgical system can, for example, improve the way in which it controls the modular devices (for example a robotic arm and / or a robotic surgical instrument) connected to it, and provide the surgeon with information contextualized or suggestions during the course of the surgical procedure.

[00506] With reference to Figure 55, a time line 5200 is shown representing the situational recognition of a central controller, such as the central surgical controller 106 or 206, for example. Timeline 5200 is an illustrative surgical procedure and the contextual information that the central surgical controller 106, 206 can derive from data received from data sources at each stage in the surgical procedure. Timeline 5200 represents the typical steps that would be taken by nurses, surgeons, and other medical personnel during the course of a pulmonary segmentectomy procedure, starting with the setup of the operating room and ending with the transfer of the patient to an operating room. postoperative recovery.

[00507] The central surgical controller with situational recognition 106, 206 receives data from data sources throughout the course of the surgical procedure, including the data generated each time medical personnel use a modular device that is paired with the central surgical controller 106 , 206. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can receive this data from paired modular devices and other data sources and continuously derive inferences (ie, contextual information) about the ongoing procedure as new data is received, such as which stage of the procedure. procedure is being performed at any given time. The situational recognition system of the central surgical controller 106, 206 is capable of, for example, recording data related to the procedure to generate reports, checking the steps being taken by medical personnel, providing data or warnings (for example, through a display) that may be relevant to the specific step of the procedure, adjust the modular devices based on the context (for example, activate monitors, adjust the field of view (FOV) of the medical imaging device, or change the energy level of a ultrasonic surgical instrument or RF electrosurgical instrument), and take any other action described above.

[00508] In the first step 5202, in this illustrative procedure, members of the hospital team retrieve the electronic patient record (PEP) from the hospital's PEP database. Based on patient selection data in the PEP, the central surgical controller 106, 206 determines that the procedure to be performed is a thoracic procedure.

[00509] In the second step 5204, the team members scan the entry of medical supplies for the procedure. Central surgical controller 106, 206 cross-references the scanned supplies with a list of supplies that are used in various types of procedures and confirms that the supply mix corresponds to a thoracic procedure. In addition, the central surgical controller 106, 206 is also able to determine that the procedure is not a wedge procedure (because the inlet supplies have an absence of certain supplies that are necessary for a thoracic wedge procedure or, otherwise, that inlet supplies do not correspond to a thoracic wedge procedure).

[00510] In the third step 5206, medical personnel scan the patient's band with a scanner that is communicatively connected to the central surgical controller 106, 206. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can then confirm the patient's identity based on the scanned data.

[00511] In the fourth step 5208, the medical staff turns on the auxiliary equipment. The auxiliary equipment being used may vary according to the type of surgical procedure and the techniques to be used by the surgeon, but in this illustrative case they include a smoke evacuator, an insufflator and a medical imaging device. When activated, auxiliary equipment that is modular devices can automatically pair with the central surgical controller 106, 206 which is located within a specific neighborhood of modular devices as part of their initialization process. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can then derive contextual information about the surgical procedure by detecting the types of modular devices that correspond with it during that preoperative or initialization phase. In this particular example, the central surgical controller 106, 206 determines that the surgical procedure is a VATS (video-assisted thoracic surgery) procedure based on this specific combination of paired modular devices. Based on the combination of data from the electronic patient record (PEP), the list of medical supplies to be used in the procedure, and the type of modular devices that connect to the central controller, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can, in general , infer the specific procedure that the surgical team will perform. After the central surgical controller 106, 206 recognizes which specific procedure is being performed, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can then retrieve the steps of that process from a memory or from the cloud and then cross the data it subsequently receives from the connected data sources (for example, modular devices and patient monitoring devices) to infer which stage of the surgical procedure the surgical team is performing.

[00512] In the fifth step 5210, the team members fix the electrocardiogram (ECG) electrodes and other patient monitoring devices on the patient. ECG electrodes and other patient monitoring devices are able to pair with central surgical controller 106, 206. As central surgical controller 106, 206 begins to receive data from patient monitoring devices, central surgical controller 106, 206 thus confirming that the patient is in the operating room.

[00513] In the sixth step 5212, the medical personnel induced anesthesia in the patient. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the patient is under anesthesia based on data from modular devices and / or patient monitoring devices, including ECG data, blood pressure data, ventilator data, or combinations of themselves, for example. After the completion of the sixth step 5212, the preoperative portion of the lung segmentectomy procedure is completed and the operative portion begins.

[00514] In the seventh step 5214, the lung of the patient being operated on is retracted (while ventilation is switched to the contralateral lung). The central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer from the ventilator data that the patient's lung has been retracted, for example. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the operative portion of the procedure started when it can compare the detection of the patient's lung collapse at the expected stages of the procedure (which can be accessed or retrieved earlier) and thus determine that the retraction of the patient lung is the first operative step in this specific procedure.

[00515] In the eighth stage 5216, the medical imaging device

(for example, a display device) is inserted and the video from the medical imaging device is started.

Central surgical controller 106, 206 receives data from the medical imaging device (i.e., video or image data) through its connection to the medical imaging device.

Upon receipt of data from the medical imaging device, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can determine that the portion of the laparoscopic surgical procedure has started.

In addition, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can determine that the specific procedure being performed is a segmentectomy, rather than a lobectomy (note that a wedge procedure has already been discarded by the central surgical controller 106, 206 based on data received at second step 5204 of the procedure). The data received from the medical imaging device 124 (Figure 33) can be used to determine contextual information about the type of procedure being performed in several different ways, including determining the angle at which the medical imaging device is oriented in relation to the visualization of the patient's anatomy, monitor the number or medical imaging devices being used (ie, which are activated and paired with the central surgical controller 106, 206) and monitor the types of visualization devices used.

For example, a technique for performing a VATS lobectomy places the camera in the lower anterior corner of the patient's chest cavity above the diaphragm, while a technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy places the camera in an anterior intercostal position in relation to the segment fissure.

With the use of standard recognition or machine learning techniques, for example, the situational recognition system can be trained to recognize the positioning of the medical imaging device according to the visualization of the patient's anatomy. As another example, a technique for performing a VATS lobectomy uses a single medical imaging device, while another technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy uses multiple cameras. As yet another example, a technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy uses an infrared light source (which can be communicatively coupled to the central surgical controller as part of the visualization system) to visualize the segment crack, which is not used in a VATS lobectomy. By tracking any or all of these data from the medical imaging device, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can thus determine the specific type of surgical procedure being performed and / or the technique being used for a specific type of procedure surgical.

[00516] In the ninth step 5218 of the procedure, the surgical team starts the dissection step. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is in the process of dissecting to mobilize the patient's lung because he receives data from the RF or ultrasonic generator that indicate that an energy instrument is being fired. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can cross-check the received data with the steps retrieved from the surgical procedure to determine that an energy instrument being fired at that point in the process (that is, after completion of the previously discussed steps of the procedure) corresponds to the step of dissection. In certain cases, the energy instrument may be a power tool mounted on a robotic arm in a robotic surgical system.

[00517] In the tenth step 5220 of the procedure, the surgical team continues until the connection step. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is ligating the arteries and veins because he receives data from the surgical stapling and cutting instrument indicating that the instrument is being fired. Similar to the previous step, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can derive this inference by crossing the reception data of the stapling and surgical cutting instrument with the steps recovered in the process. In certain cases, the surgical instrument can be a surgical tool mounted on a robotic arm of a robotic surgical system.

[00518] In the eleventh step 5222, the segmentectomy portion of the procedure is performed. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is transecting the parenchyma based on data from the surgical stapling and cutting instrument, including data from its cartridge. The cartridge data can correspond to the size or type of clamp being triggered by the instrument, for example. As different types of staples are used for different types of fabrics, the cartridge data can thus indicate the type of fabric being stapled and / or transected. In this case, the type of clamp that is fired is used for the parenchyma (or other similar types of tissue), which allows the central surgical controller 106, 206 to infer which segmentectomy portion of the procedure is being performed.

[00519] In the twelfth step 5224, the node dissection step is then performed. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the surgical team is dissecting the node and performing a leak test based on the data received from the generator that indicates which ultrasonic or RF instrument is being fired. For this specific procedure, an RF or ultrasonic instrument being used after the parenchyma has been transected corresponds to the node dissection step, which allows the central surgical controller 106, 206 to make this inference. It should be noted that surgeons regularly switch between surgical stapling / cutting instruments and surgical energy instruments (that is, RF or ultrasonic) depending on the specific step in the procedure because different instruments are better adapted for specific tasks. Therefore, the specific sequence in which cutting / stapling instruments and surgical energy instruments are used can indicate which step of the procedure the surgeon is performing. In addition, in certain cases, robotic tools can be used for one or more steps in a surgical procedure and / or hand-held surgical instruments can be used for one or more steps in the surgical procedure. The surgeon can switch between robotic tools and hand-held surgical instruments and / or can use the devices simultaneously, for example. After the completion of the twelfth stage 5224, the incisions are closed and the post-operative portion of the process begins.

[00520] In the thirteenth stage 5226, the patient's anesthesia is reversed. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can infer that the patient is emerging from anesthesia based on ventilator data (i.e., the patient's respiratory rate begins to increase), for example.

[00521] Finally, in the fourteenth step 5228 is that medical personnel remove the various patient monitoring devices from the patient. Central surgical controller 106, 206 can thus infer that the patient is being transferred to a recovery room when the central controller loses ECG, blood pressure and other data from patient monitoring devices. As can be seen from the description of this illustrative procedure, the central surgical controller 106, 206 can determine or infer when each step of a given surgical procedure is taking place according to the data received from the various data sources that are communicatively coupled with the central surgical controller 106, 206.

[00522] Situational recognition is further described in US provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety . In certain cases, the operation of a robotic surgical system, including the various robotic surgical systems described here, for example, can be controlled by the central controller 106, 206 based on its situational recognition and / or feedback from its components and / or based on information from cloud 104. Examples

[00523] Various aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00524] Example 1: A method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site is described. The method comprises communicatively connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises a housing of the central surgical controller, and in which the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the central surgical controller casing. The method further comprises removing a particulate from the surgical site and transferring it to the particulate evacuation module, analyzing the removed particulate and modifying an operation of the particulate evacuation module based on the analysis of the removed particulate.

[00525] Example 2: The method, according to Example 1, further comprising attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing.

[00526] Example 3: The method of Example 2, also comprising connecting, in a communicative way, the generator module and the particulate evacuation module.

[00527] Example 4: The method, according to any of Examples 2 and 3, further comprising connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device.

[00528] Example 5: The method, according to any of Examples 2 to 4, further comprising modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the removed particulate.

[00529] Example 6: The method, according to any of Examples 2 to 5, in which the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules for allow the sub-generator modules to act as a single generator module.

[00530] Example 7: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 6, in which the particulate evacuation module comprises a fluid line, and in which one end of the fluid line ends within the surgical controller housing central.

[00531] Example 8: A method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site is described. The method comprises connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, where the central surgical controller comprises a central surgical controller housing, and where the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the surgical controller housing. central. The method also comprises activating a surgical instrument within the surgical site, draining a particulate from the surgical site and transferring it to the particulate evacuation module, analyzing the particulate and modifying an operational parameter of the particulate evacuation module based on the analysis of the particulate. particulate.

[00532] Example 9: The method, according to Example 8, in which the surgical instrument comprises at least one among a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device.

[00533] Example 10: The method, according to any of Examples 8 and 9, further comprising attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing.

[00534] Example 11: The method, according to Example 10, also comprising connecting, in a communicative way, the generator module and the smoke evacuation module.

[00535] Example 12: The method, according to any of Examples 10 and 11, further comprising connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device.

[00536] Example 13: The method, according to any of Examples 10 to 12, further comprising modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the particulate.

[00537] Example 14: The method, according to any of Examples 10 to 13, in which the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules for allow the sub-generator modules to act as a single generator module.

[00538] Example 15: A method for evacuating smoke from a surgical site is described. The method comprises connecting a smoke evacuation module and a central surgical controller, where the central surgical controller comprises a central surgical controller enclosure, and where the smoke evacuation module is configured to be received within the surgical controller enclosure. central. The method also comprises inserting a component of the smoke evacuation module into the surgical site, removing smoke from the surgical site, analyzing the removed smoke and modifying a smoke evacuation module operation based on the analysis of the removed smoke.

[00539] Example 16: The method, according to Example 15, further comprising attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing.

[00540] Example 17: The method, according to Example 16, also comprising connecting the generator module and the smoke evacuation module.

[00541] Example 18: The method, according to any of Examples 16 and 17, further comprising connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device.

[00542] Example 19: The method, according to any of Examples 16 to 18, further comprising modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the removed smoke.

[00543] Example 20: The method, according to any of Examples 16 to 19, in which the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules for allow the sub-generator modules to act as a single generator module.

[00544] Several additional aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00545] Example 1: A method which comprises: capturing, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of a parameter; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and a central surgical controller; process, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the parameter value; determine, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust the operation of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00546] Example 2: The method, according to Example 1, in which the parameter is detected by an internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system.

[00547] Example 3: The method, according to Example 2, in which the parameter is at least one among a particulate concentration, a percentage of aerosol or a chemical analysis and any combination thereof.

[00548] Example 4: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 3, in which the internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system is at least one among a fluid sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter or a pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00549] Example 5: The method, according to Examples 1 to 4, in which the parameter is an operational parameter.

[00550] Example 6: The method, according to Example 5, in which the operational parameter is at least one among an air flow, a pressure differential or an air quality and any combination thereof.

[00551] Example 7: The method, according to Examples 1 to 6, in which the operational parameter is detected by at least one of a particle and air quality sensor or an ambient pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00552] Example 8: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 7, which further comprises: transmitting the parameter value from the central surgical controller to the cloud computing network.

[00553] Example 9: The method, according to Example 8, in which the parameter value is manipulated by the central surgical controller before the transmission of the parameter value to the cloud computing network.

[00554] Example 10: The method, according to Examples 1 to 9, in which the parameter value is transmitted from the central surgical controller to the cloud computing network through a network router.

[00555] Example 11: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 10, which further comprises: sending the instruction to adjust the operation of the cloud computing network to the central surgical controller.

[00556] Example 12: The method, according to Example 11, in which the central surgical controller sends the instruction to adjust the operation to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00557] Example 13: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 12, in which the surgical evacuation system captures values of at least two parameters.

[00558] Example 14: The method, according to any of the

Examples 1 to 13, wherein the modular device is at least one of a display circuit; a robotic circuit; an intelligent communication circuit; an imaging circuit; a generator; a suction / irrigation circuit; a communicator; a processor; a storage array; and an operating room mapping circuit.

[00559] Example 15: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 14, at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller is in bidirectional communication with at least one of the evacuation system surgical and modular device.

[00560] Example 16: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 15, in which the cloud computing network is in bidirectional communication with the central surgical controller.

[00561] Example 17: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 16, in which at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller includes algorithms contained in a memory to determine the impact of the value of the parameter on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00562] Example 18: The method, according to any of Examples 1 to 17, in which at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller includes learning software contained in a memory to determine the impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00563] Example 19: A computer-implemented surgical system comprising: a central surgical controller, wherein the central surgical controller includes a processor and a memory; a smoke evacuation module in communication with the central surgical controller, the smoke evacuation module being configured to: capture a parameter value; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and the central surgical controller; at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller is configured to: process the parameter value; determining an impact of the parameter value on at least one of the smoke evacuation module and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust an operation of at least one of the smoke evacuation module and the modular device; at least one of the smoke evacuation module and the modular device is configured to: adjust the operation based on the instruction.

[00564] Example 20: A computer-readable non-transitory medium, characterized by storing computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to capture, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a parameter value; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and a central surgical controller; process, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the parameter value; determine, through at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the impact of the parameter value on at least one surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust an operation from at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00565] Example 21: A method that comprises capturing, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of a parameter; transmit, through a network router, the parameter value to a cloud computing network; process, through the cloud computing network, the parameter value; determine, through the cloud computing network, an impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send, through the network router, an instruction to adjust the operation of the cloud computing network to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00566] Example 22: The method, according to Example 21, in which the parameter is detected by an internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system.

[00567] Example 23: The method, according to any of Examples 21 and 22, in which the parameter is at least one among a particulate concentration, a percentage of aerosol or a chemical analysis and any combination thereof.

[00568] Example 24: The method, according to any of Examples 21 to 23, in which the internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system is at least one among a fluid sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter or a pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00569] Example 25: The method, according to any of Examples 21 to 24, in which the parameter is an operational parameter.

[00570] Example 26: The method, according to Example 25, in which the operational parameter is at least one of an air flow, a pressure differential or an air quality and any combination thereof.

[00571] Example 27: The method, according to any of Examples 25 and 26, in which the operational parameter is detected by at least one of a particle and air quality sensor or an ambient pressure sensor and any combination of themselves.

[00572] Example 28: A method that comprises capturing, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of a parameter; transmit the parameter value to a central surgical controller; transmit, through a network router, the parameter value of the central surgical controller to a cloud computing network; process, through the cloud computing network, the parameter value; determine, through the cloud computing network, an impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send, through the network router, an instruction to adjust the operation of the cloud computing network to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00573] Example 29: The method, according to Example 28, in which the parameter is detected by an internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system.

[00574] Example 30: The method, according to Example 29, in which the internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system is at least one among a fluid sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter or a pressure and any combination thereof.

[00575] Example 31: The method, according to any of Examples 28 to 30, in which the parameter is at least one among a particulate concentration, an aerosol percentage or a chemical analysis and any combination thereof.

[00576] Example 32: The method, according to any of Examples 28 to 31, in which the parameter is an operational parameter.

[00577] Example 33: The method, according to Example 32, in which the operational parameter is at least one among an air flow, a pressure differential or an air quality and any combination of these.

[00578] Example 34: The method, according to Examples 32 and 33, in which the operational parameter is detected by at least one among a particle and air quality sensor or an ambient pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00579] Example 35: A method that comprises capturing, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of a parameter; transmit the parameter value to a central surgical controller; process, through the central surgical controller, the parameter value; determine, through the central surgical controller, an impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust the operation of the central surgical controller to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00580] Example 36: The method, according to Example 35, in which the parameter is detected by an internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system.

[00581] Example 37: The method, according to any of Examples 35 and 36, in which the parameter is at least one among a particulate concentration, an aerosol percentage or a chemical analysis and any combination thereof.

[00582] Example 38: The method, according to any of Examples 35 to 37, in which the internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system is at least one among a fluid sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter or a pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00583] Example 39: The method, according to any of Examples 35 to 38, in which the parameter is an operational parameter.

[00584] Example 40: The method, according to any of Examples 35 to 39, in which the operational parameter is at least one among an air flow, a pressure differential or an air quality and any combination thereof.

[00585] Example 41: The method, according to Examples 35 to 40, in which the operational parameter is detected by at least one among a particle and air quality sensor and an ambient pressure sensor.

[00586] Example 42: A computer-implemented surgical system comprising a central surgical controller; a smoke evacuation module located inside the central surgical controller, the smoke evacuation module being configured to detect, through a sensor, a parameter; transmit the parameter to the central surgical controller; the central surgical controller is configured to analyze the parameter; modify the functioning of at least one of the smoke evacuation module and a second module in communication with the central surgical controller based on the parameter analysis.

[00587] Example 43: A central surgical controller comprising a processor and a memory attached to the processor, the memory storing instructions executable by the processor to execute the method as described in any of Examples 21 to 31:

[00588] Example 44: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to execute the method described in any of Examples 21 to 31.

[00589] Example 45: A method that comprises: capturing, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of a parameter; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and a central surgical controller; process, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the parameter value; determine, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust the operation of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00590] Example 46: The method, according to Example 45, in which the parameter is detected by an internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system.

[00591] Example 47: The method, according to any of Examples 45 and 46, in which the parameter is at least one among a particulate concentration, an aerosol percentage or a chemical analysis and any combination thereof.

[00592] Example 48: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 47, in which the internal sensor in the surgical evacuation system is at least one among a fluid sensor, a chemical sensor, a laser particle counter or a pressure sensor and any combination thereof.

[00593] Example 49: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 48, the parameter being an operational parameter.

[00594] Example 50: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 49, in which the operational parameter is at least one among an air flow, a pressure differential or an air quality and any combination thereof.

[00595] Example 51: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 50, in which the operational parameter is detected by at least one of a particle and air quality sensor or an ambient pressure sensor and any combination of themselves.

[00596] Example 52: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 51, which further comprises: transmitting the parameter value from the central surgical controller to the cloud computing network.

[00597] Example 53: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 52, in which the parameter value is manipulated by the central surgical controller before the transmission of the parameter value to the cloud computing network.

[00598] Example 54: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 53, in which the parameter value is transmitted from the central surgical controller to the cloud computing network through a network router.

[00599] Example 55: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 54, which further comprises: sending the instruction to adjust the operation of the cloud computing network to the central surgical controller.

[00600] Example 56: The method, according to any of the

Examples 45 to 55, in which the central surgical controller sends the instruction to adjust the operation to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00601] Example 57: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 56, in which the surgical evacuation system captures values of at least two parameters.

[00602] Example 58: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 57, wherein the modular device is at least one among a visualization circuit; a robotic circuit; an intelligent communication circuit; an imaging circuit; a generator; a suction / irrigation circuit; a communicator; a processor; a storage array; and an operating room mapping circuit.

[00603] Example 59: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 58, in which at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller is in bidirectional communication with at least one of the evacuation system surgical and modular device.

[00604] Example 60: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 59, in which the cloud computing network is in bidirectional communication with the central surgical controller.

[00605] Example 61: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 60, in which at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller includes algorithms contained in a memory to determine the impact of the value of the parameter on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00606] Example 62: The method, according to any of Examples 45 to 61, in which at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller includes learning software contained in a memory to determine the impact of the parameter value on at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device.

[00607] Example 63: A computer-implemented surgical system comprising: a central surgical controller, wherein the central surgical controller includes a processor and a memory; a smoke evacuation module in communication with the central surgical controller, the smoke evacuation module being configured to: capture a parameter value; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and the central surgical controller; at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller is configured to: process the parameter value; determining an impact of the parameter value on at least one of the smoke evacuation module and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust an operation of at least one of the smoke evacuation module and the modular device; at least one of the smoke evacuation module and the modular device is configured to: adjust the operation based on the instruction.

[00608] Example 64: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium, characterized by storing computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to capture, by means of a surgical evacuation system, a value of one parameter; transmit the parameter value to at least one of a cloud computing network and a central surgical controller; process, by means of at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the parameter value; determine, through at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller, the impact of the parameter value on at least one surgical evacuation system and a modular device; send an instruction to adjust an operation from at least one of the cloud computing network and the central surgical controller to at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device; and adjusting the operation by using at least one of the surgical evacuation system and the modular device based on the instruction.

[00609] Several additional aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00610] Example 1: A central surgical controller comprising: a control circuit, wherein the control circuit includes a plurality of segments; wherein the plurality of segments includes a first, a second and a third segment; the first segment includes a main processor and a security processor, the main processor being coupled to a memory, and the memory stores instructions executable by the main processor to energize the first segment before the second and third segments, energizing the second and the third segment after the first segment performs a first function; the second segment includes a detection circuit and a display circuit; and the third segment includes an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00611] Example 2: The central surgical controller, according to Example 1, in which the first function is to check the first, second and third segments to determine if they contain at least one among a short circuit and an error.

[00612] Example 3: The central surgical controller, according to Examples 1 and 2, in which the first function is to perform a safety check on the first, second and third segments.

[00613] Example 4: The central surgical controller, according to Examples 1 to 3, in which the first function is to verify that the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor control circuit and the motor are the correct components.

[00614] Example 5: The central surgical controller, according to any of Examples 1 to 4, in which the control circuit identifies the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the circuit control system and the engine, and shows on a display device a status of the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor control circuit, and the motor.

[00615] Example 6: The central surgical controller, according to Examples 1 to 5, in which the control circuit identifies the first, the second and the third segments, and show on a display device, to a user, a state of the first, second and third segments.

[00616] Example 7: The central surgical controller, according to Examples 1 to 6, which further comprises a pump coupled to the motor.

[00617] Example 8: The central surgical controller, according to any of Examples 1 to 7, in which the engine operates in a first or a second state.

[00618] Example 9: The central surgical controller, according to Examples 1 to 8, in which the first state is activated by a user, and the motor causes the pump to operate at a first speed.

[00619] Example 10: The central surgical controller, according to any of Examples 1 to 9, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a second speed in the second state.

[00620] Example 11: A method of operating a segmented control circuit in a surgical evacuation system, which comprises: activating a first segment, in which the first segment includes a main processor and a safety processor; make the first segment perform a first function; activate a second segment, the second segment including a detection circuit and a display circuit; and activate a third segment, the third segment of which includes an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00621] Example 12: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 11, in which the first function is to check the first, second and third segments to determine whether they contain at least one among a short circuit and an error.

[00622] Example 13: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Examples 11 and 12, in which the first function is to perform a security check on the first, second and third segments.

[00623] Example 14: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 13, in which the first function is to verify that the detection circuit, the display circuit, the control circuit engine control and the engine are the correct components.

[00624] Example 15: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 14, which further comprises: identifying, through the control circuit, the central processor, the security processor, the detection circuit, display circuit, motor control circuit and motor are the correct components; and showing on a display device a status of the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor and motor control circuit.

[00625] Example 16: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 15, which further comprises: identifying, through the control circuit, the first segment, the second segment, and the third segment; and showing on a display device a state of the first, second and third segments.

[00626] Example 17: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 16, which further comprises: operating the motor in a first state or a second state.

[00627] Example 18: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 17, in which the first state is activated by a user, in which the motor causes the pump to operate in a first speed.

[00628] Example 19: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 11 to 18, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a second speed in the second state.

[00629] Example 20: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to: activate a first segment, where the first segment includes a main processor and a security processor; make the first segment perform a first function; activate a second segment, the second segment including a detection circuit and a display circuit; and activate a third segment, the third segment including an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00630] Example 21: A surgical evacuation system comprising a control circuit, in which the control circuit includes a plurality of segments; wherein the plurality of segments includes a first, a second and a third segment; the first segment includes a main processor and a security processor, the main processor being coupled to a memory, and the memory stores instructions executable by the main processor to energize the first segment before the second and third segments, energizing the second and the third segment after the first segment performs a first function; the second segment includes a detection circuit and a display circuit; and the third segment includes an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00631] Example 22: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 21, in which the first function is to check the first, second and third segments to determine whether they contain at least one among a short circuit it is a mistake.

[00632] Example 23: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 and 22, in which the first function is to perform a security check on the first, second and third segments.

[00633] Example 24: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 to 23, in which the first function is to verify that the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor control circuit and the engine is the correct components.

[00634] Example 25: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 to 24, in which the control circuit identifies the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the control circuit of the motor and the motor, and shows in a display device a state of the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor and motor control circuit.

[00635] Example 26: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 to 25, in which the control circuit identifies the first, second and third segments, and shows on a display device, to a user, a state of the first, second and third segments.

[00636] Example 27: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 to 26, which further comprises a pump coupled to the engine.

[00637] Example 28: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 21 to 27, in which the engine operates in a first or a second state.

[00638] Example 29: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 28, in which the first state is activated by a user, and the motor causes the pump to operate at a high speed.

[00639] Example 30: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 28 and 29, in which the second state is a slow state, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a lower speed.

[00640] Example 31: A method of operating a segmented control circuit in a surgical evacuation system, which comprises activating a first segment, in which the first segment includes a main processor and a safety processor; make the first segment perform a first function; activating a second segment, wherein the second segment includes a detection circuit and a display circuit; and activating a third segment, where the third segment includes an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00641] Example 32: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 31, in which the first function is to check the first, second and third segments to determine whether they contain at least one among a short circuit and an error.

[00642] Example 33: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 31 to 32, in which the first function is to perform a security check on the first, second and third segments.

[00643] Example 34: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 31 to 33, in which the first function is to verify that the detection circuit, the display circuit, the control circuit engine control and the engine are the correct components.

[00644] Example 35: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 31 to 34, which further comprises: identifying, through the control circuit, the central processor, the security processor, the circuit detection, the display circuit, the motor control circuit and the motor; and showing on a display device a status of the main processor, the safety processor, the detection circuit, the display circuit, the motor and motor control circuit.

[00645] Example 36: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 31 to 35, which further comprises identifying, through the control circuit, the first segment, the second segment and the third segment; and showing on a display device a state of the first, second and third segments.

[00646] Example 37: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 31 to 36, in which a pump is coupled to the motor.

[00647] Example 38: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 37, which further comprises operating the motor in a first state or a second state.

[00648] Example 39: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 38, in which the first state is activated by a user, the motor causing the pump to operate at a fast speed.

[00649] Example 40: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to any of Examples 38 and 39, in which the second state is a slow state, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a speed slower.

[00650] Example 41: A central surgical controller comprising a processor and a memory coupled to the processor, wherein the memory stores instructions executable by the processor to execute the method as described in any of Examples 31 to 40.

[00651] Example 42: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to execute the method described in any of Examples 31 to 40.

[00652] Example 43: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 38, in which the first state is activated by a user, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a first speed.

[00653] Example 44: The method of operation of the segmented control circuit, according to Example 38, in which the motor causes the pump to operate at a second speed in the second state.

[00654] Example 45: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that,

when executed, they cause a machine to: activate a first segment, where the first segment includes a main processor and a security processor; make the first segment perform a first function; activating a second segment, wherein the second segment includes a detection circuit and a display circuit; and activate a third segment, the third segment including an engine control circuit and an engine.

[00655] Several additional aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00656] Example 1: A surgical evacuation system comprising a smoke evacuation device that includes a pump; and a motor operationally coupled to the pump; a communication circuit; and a filtration device in communication with the smoke evacuation device via the communication circuit, wherein the filtration device comprises a plurality of filtration components which include a plurality of filter elements comprising at least one of a fluid filter , a particulate filter and a charcoal filter; and a plurality of filter sensors, wherein the communication circuit is configured to authenticate the plurality of filtration components; checking the remaining service life of at least one of the plurality of filtration components; update output parameters of the plurality of filtration components; and recording errors generated by the plurality of filtration components.

[00657] Example 2: The surgical evacuation system, according to example 1, in which the communication circuit is further configured to limit a number or type of a filtration component that can be identified by the communication circuit.

[00658] Example 3: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of examples 1 and 2, in which the communication circuit is further configured to enable or disable the plurality of filtration components based on an authentication result.

[00659] Example 4: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of examples 1 to 3, in which the communication circuit authenticates the plurality of filtration components using information about filtration components.

[00660] Example 5: The surgical evacuation system, according to example 4, in which the information on filtration components comprises at least one among a type of product, a product name, a unique device identifier, a brand registered product number, a serial number and a configuration parameter for the plurality of filtration components.

[00661] Example 6: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of examples 1 to 5, in which the filtration device is configured to encrypt the output parameters of the plurality of filtration components before sending the parameters to the circuit of communication.

[00662] Example 7: The surgical evacuation system, according to example 6, in which, when receiving the encrypted parameters, the communication circuit decrypts the encrypted parameters.

[00663] Example 8: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of examples 1 to 7, in which the communication device acts as a master device and the filtration device acts as a slave device, in which the communication between the master device and the slave device are unidirectional from the master device to the slave device during the execution of the authentication process.

[00664] Example 9: A method for communication between a smoke evacuation device and a filtration device via a communication circuit, wherein the method comprises authenticating, through the communication circuit, a plurality of filtration components in the device filtration, wherein the plurality of filtration components includes a plurality of filter elements comprising at least one of a fluid filter, a particulate filter and a charcoal filter; and a plurality of filter sensors; verify, through the communication circuit, the remaining service life of at least one of the plurality of filtration components; update, through the communication circuit, output parameters of the plurality of filtration components; and recording, through the communication circuit, errors generated by the plurality of filtration components, the smoke evacuation device comprising a pump; and a motor operationally coupled to the pump.

[00665] Example 10: The method, according to example 9, which further comprises the step of limiting a number or type of a filtration component that can be identified by the communication circuit.

[00666] Example 11: The method, according to example 9, which further comprises the step of enabling or disabling, through the communication circuit, the plurality of filtering components based on an authentication result.

[00667] Example 12: The method, according to any of examples 9 to 11, in which the communication circuit authenticates the plurality of filtration components using information about filtration components.

[00668] Example 13: The method, according to example 12, in which the information on filtration components comprises at least one of a product type, a product name, a unique device identifier, a product trademark , a serial number and a configuration parameter for the plurality of filtration components.

[00669] Example 14: The method, according to any of examples 9 to 13, which further comprises the step of encrypting, through the filtration device, the output parameters of the plurality of filtration components before sending the parameters to the communication circuit.

[00670] Example 15: The method, according to example 14, which also comprises the step of, when receiving the encrypted parameters, decrypting, through the communication circuit, the encrypted parameters.

[00671] Example 16: The method, according to any of examples 9 to 15, in which the communication device acts as a master device and the filtering device acts as a slave device, with the communication between the master device and the slave device is unidirectional from the master device to the slave device during the execution of the authentication step.

[00672] Example 17: A central surgical controller comprising a processor and a memory attached to the processor, the memory storing instructions executable by the processor to execute the method as described in any of examples 9 to 16.

[00673] Example 18: A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to execute the method described in any of examples 9 to 16.

[00674] Example 19: A central surgical controller comprising a processor and a memory attached to the processor,

wherein the memory stores instructions executable by the processor to authenticate a plurality of filtration components on a filtration device, wherein the plurality of filtration components includes a plurality of filter elements comprising at least one of a fluid filter, a filter particulate matter and a charcoal filter; and a plurality of filter sensors; checking the remaining service life of at least one of the plurality of filtration components; update output parameters of the plurality of filtration components; and recording errors generated by the plurality of filtration components.

[00675] Example 20: The central surgical controller, according to example 19, in which the memory stores additional instructions executable by the processor to limit a number or type of a filtering component that can be identified.

[00676] Example 21: The central surgical controller, according to any of examples 19 and 20, in which the memory stores additional instructions executable by the processor to enable or disable the plurality of filtration components based on an authentication result.

[00677] Example 22: The central surgical controller, according to any of examples 19 to 21, in which the plurality of filtration components is authenticated using information on filtration components that comprise at least one among a type of product, a product name, a unique device identifier, a product trademark, a serial number and a configuration parameter for the plurality of filtration components.

[00678] Several additional aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00679] Example 1: A surgical evacuation system comprising a pump; a motor operationally coupled to the pump; and a flow path fluidly coupled to the pump, wherein the flow path comprises a first fluid filter configured to extract a large droplet of a fluid in motion through the flow path; a second fluid filter configured to extract a small droplet of fluid in motion through the flow path, where the first fluid filter is coupled in series with the second fluid filter, where the first fluid filter is positioned upstream of the second fluid filter, where an outlet port of the second fluid filter is coupled to an inlet port of a non-fluid filter.

[00680] Example 2: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 1, which further comprises a first recirculation channel, in which an entrance port of the first recirculation channel is positioned between the second fluid filter and the filter for non-fluids, where the first recirculation channel is configured to recirculate the fluid outlet from the second fluid filter.

[00681] Example 3: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 2, which further comprises a first recirculation valve configured to close and open the first recirculation channel, in which when the first recirculation valve is opened, the fluid outlet from the second fluid filter is recirculated through the first recirculation channel.

[00682] Example 4: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 3, which further comprises a first sensor positioned close to the first recirculation valve, in which the first sensor is configured to detect a fluid parameter, in which the first recirculation valve opens the first recirculation channel when the parameter detected by the first sensor is equal to or greater than a first predetermined limit value.

[00683] Example 5: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 2 to 4, in which the fluid directed into the first recirculation channel is injected in the fluid path upstream of the second fluid filter.

[00684] Example 6: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 5, in which the fluid directed into the first recirculation channel is injected into the first fluid filter.

[00685] Example 7: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 2 to 6, in which the fluid directed into the first recirculation channel is injected into the second fluid filter.

[00686] Example 8: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 2 to 7, in which the first recirculation channel extends downwards from the entrance door of the first recirculation channel, which allows the large droplet or small drop at the flow outlet of the second fluid filter is directed to the first gravity recirculation channel.

[00687] Example 9: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 2 to 8, which further comprises a second recirculation channel, in which an entrance port of the second recirculation channel is positioned between the first filter for fluids and the second fluid filter, where the second recirculation channel is configured to recirculate the fluid outlet of the first fluid filter.

[00688] Example 10: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 9, which further comprises a second recirculation valve configured to close and open the second recirculation channel, in which when the second recirculation valve is opened,

the fluid outlet of the first fluid filter is recirculated through the second recirculation channel.

[00689] Example 11: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 10, which further comprises a second sensor positioned close to the second recirculation valve, in which the second sensor is configured to detect the fluid parameter, in which the second recirculation valve opens the second recirculation channel when the parameter detected by the second sensor is equal to or greater than a second predetermined limit value.

[00690] Example 12: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 9 to 11, in which the fluid directed into the second recirculation channel is injected in the fluid path upstream of the first fluid filter.

[00691] Example 13: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 9 to 12, in which the fluid directed into the second recirculation channel is injected into a portion upstream of the first fluid filter.

[00692] Example 14: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 9 to 13, in which the second recirculation channel extends downwards from the entrance door of the second recirculation channel, which allows the large droplet or small droplet at the fluid outlet of the first fluid filter is directed to the second gravity recirculation channel.

[00693] Example 15: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 1 to 14, wherein the first fluid filter comprises at least one deflector.

[00694] Example 16: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 1 to 15, wherein the first fluid filter comprises a bypass valve.

[00695] Example 17: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 1 to 16, in which the second fluid filter comprises a filter selected from the group consisting of a membrane filter, a honeycomb filter, a porous structure filter and its combinations.

[00696] Example 18: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 1 to 17, wherein the filter for non-fluids comprises a particulate filter.

[00697] Example 19: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 1 to 17, in which at least one of the first fluid filter and the second fluid filter is disabled when it is determined that the number of processes of recirculation carried out through a recirculation channel is equal to or greater than a third predetermined limit value.

[00698] Example 20: A surgical evacuation system comprising: a pump; a motor operationally coupled to the pump; and a flow path fluidly coupled to the pump, wherein the flow path comprises: a first filter fluid configured to extract a large droplet in a fluid in motion through the flow path, where the first fluid filter comprises at least at least one deflector and a second fluid filter configured to extract a small droplet of the fluid in motion through the flow path, where the second fluid filter comprises a filter selected from the group consisting of a membrane filter, a honeycomb filter and a porous structure filter, and combinations thereof, in which the first fluid filter is coupled in series with the second fluid filter, where the first fluid filter is positioned upstream of the second fluid filter, in which a outlet port of the second fluid filter is coupled to an inlet port of a filter for non-fluids.

[00699] Example 21: The surgical evacuation system, according to Example 20, which further comprises a first recirculation channel, in which an entrance port of the first recirculation channel is positioned between the second fluid filter and the filter for non-fluids, where the first recirculation channel is configured to recirculate the fluid outlet from the second fluid filter.

[00700] Example 22: The surgical evacuation system, according to any of Examples 20 to 21, which further comprises a second recirculation channel, in which an entrance port of the second recirculation channel is positioned between the first filter for fluids and the second fluid filter, where the second recirculation channel is configured to recirculate the fluid outlet of the first fluid filter.

[00701] Several additional aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples presented below.

[00702] Example 1: A return block from an electrosurgical system, in which the return block comprises: a plurality of conductive members configured to receive radiofrequency current applied to a patient; and a plurality of detection devices configured to detect at least one of the following: a nerve control signal applied to the patient; and a movement of an anatomical feature of the patient resulting from the application of the nerve control signal.

[00703] Example 2: The return block, according to Example 1, in which the plurality of conductive members is still configured for capacitive coupling to the patient.

[00704] Example 3: The return block, according to either of Examples 1 or 2, which further comprises a switching device configured to selectively decouple at least one of the plurality of conductive members from one of the plurality of members conductive.

[00705] Example 4: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 3, which further comprises a switching device configured to selectively decouple each of the conductive members from each other.

[00706] Example 5: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 4, further comprising a switching device configured to selectively decouple the plurality of conductive limbs from the patient.

[00707] Example 6: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 5, which further comprises a switching device configured to selectively decouple the plurality of conductive members of a generator.

[00708] Example 7: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 6, which further comprises a switching device configured to selectively couple each of the plurality of conductive members to a generator.

[00709] Example 8: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 7, in which the plurality of detection devices is configured as an array of detection devices.

[00710] Example 9: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 8, in which each of the plurality of detection devices is coupled to a corresponding member among the plurality of conductive members.

[00711] Example 10: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 9, in which each of the plurality of conductive members is coupled to a corresponding device among the plurality of detection devices.

[00712] Example 11: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 10, wherein at least one of the plurality of detection devices comprises one of the following: a pressure sensor; an accelerometer; and a pressure sensor and an accelerometer.

[00713] Example 12: The return block, according to any of Examples 1 to 11, in which each of the plurality of detection devices is further configured to emit a signal indicating the detection.

[00714] Example 13: An electrosurgical system that comprises: a generator configured to supply an alternating current in a radio frequency; an instrument configured to apply alternating current to a patient; a return block capacitively attachable to the patient, wherein the return block comprises: a plurality of conductive members configured to conduct the radio frequency current, wherein the plurality of conductive members is capacitably attachable to a patient and selectively attachable to the generator; a plurality of detection devices configured to detect at least one of the following: a nerve control signal applied to the patient; and a movement of an anatomical feature of the patient resulting from the application of the nerve control signal; and a conductor coupled to the return block and the generator.

[00715] Example 14: The electrosurgical system, according to Example 13, which further comprises a switching device with multiple inputs and single output coupled to each one among the plurality of detection devices.

[00716] Example 15: The electrosurgical system, according to Example 14, which also comprises an analog / digital converter coupled to the multiple input and single output switching device.

[00717] Example 16: The electrosurgical system, according to any of Examples 1 to 15, in which the generator is further configured to: generate alternating current as a high frequency waveform; generate a low frequency waveform that is configured to stimulate a patient's nerve; use the high frequency waveform to modulate the low frequency waveform to form a composite waveform; and supply the composite waveform to the instrument.

[00718] Example 17: The electrosurgical system, according to any of Examples 1 to 16, in which the generator is further configured to modulate the amplitude of the low frequency waveform to form the composite waveform.

[00719] Example 18: A return block from an electrosurgical system, in which the return block comprises: a plurality of electrodes configured for capacitive coupling to a patient; and an array of detection devices configured to detect at least one of the following: a nerve control signal applied to the patient; and a movement of an anatomical feature of the patient resulting from the application of the nerve control signal.

[00720] Example 19: The return block, according to Example 18, in which each detection device of the array of detection devices is configured to emit a signal indicative of detection.

[00721] Example 20: The return block, according to any of Examples 18 or 19, in which each detection device of the detection device matrix is positioned on a corresponding electrode among the plurality of electrodes.

[00722] Although several forms have been illustrated and described,

it is not the applicant's intention to restrict or limit the scope of the claims attached to such detail. Numerous modifications, variations, alterations, substitutions, combinations and equivalents of these forms can be implemented and will occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the scope of the present description. In addition, the structure of each element associated with the shape can alternatively be described as a means of providing the function performed by the element. In addition, where materials for certain components are described, other materials can be used. It should be understood, therefore, that the preceding description and the appended claims are intended to cover all these modifications, combinations and variations that fall within the scope of the modalities presented. The attached claims are intended to cover all such modifications, variations, alterations, substitutions, modifications and equivalents.

[00723] The previous detailed description presented various forms of devices and / or processes through the use of block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples. Although these block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples contain one or more functions and / or operations, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that each function and / or operation within these block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples can be implemented, individually and / or collectively, through a wide range of hardware, software, firmware or virtually any combination thereof. Those skilled in the art will recognize, however, that some aspects of the aspects described here, in whole or in part, can be implemented in an equivalent manner in integrated circuits, such as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (for example, as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (for example, as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or virtually as any combination of them, and that designing the circuitry and / or writing the code for the software and firmware would be within the scope of practice of those skilled in the art, in the light of this description. In addition, those skilled in the art will understand that the mechanisms of the subject described herein can be distributed as one or more program products in a variety of ways and that an illustrative form of the subject described here is applicable regardless of the specific type of transmission medium. signals used to effectively carry out the distribution.

[00724] The instructions used to program the logic to execute various aspects described can be stored in a memory in the system, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM), cache, flash memory or other storage. In addition, instructions can be distributed over a network or through other computer-readable media. Thus, machine-readable media can include any mechanism to store or transmit information in a machine-readable form (for example, a computer), but is not limited to, floppy disks, optical discs, read-only compact disc ( CD-ROMs), and optical discs- dynamo discs, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), cards magnetic or optical, flash memory, or machine-readable tangible storage media used to transmit information over the Internet via an electrical, optical, acoustic cable or other forms of propagation signals (for example, carrier waves, infrared signal, digital signals, etc.).

Consequently, computer-readable non-transitory media includes any type of machine-readable media suitable for storing or transmitting instructions or electronic information in a machine-readable form (for example, a computer).

[00725] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the term "control circuit" can refer to, for example, a set of wired circuits, programmable circuits (for example, a computer processor comprising one or more cores individual instruction processing units, processing unit, processor, microcontroller, microcontroller unit, controller, digital signal processor (DSP), programmable logic device (PLD), programmable logic matrix (PLA), or field programmable port arrangement ( FPGA)), state machine circuits, firmware that stores instructions executed by the programmable circuit, and any combination thereof. The control circuit can, collectively or individually, be incorporated as an electrical circuit that is part of a larger system, for example, an integrated circuit (IC), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an on-chip system (SoC ), desktop computers, laptop computers, tablet computers, servers, smart headsets, etc. Consequently, as used in the present invention, "control circuit" includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuits that have at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuits that have at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuits that have at least one circuit integrated for specific application, electrical circuits that form a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (for example, a general purpose computer configured by a computer program that at least partially executes processes and / or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program that at least partially performs the processes and / or devices described here), electrical circuits that form a memory device (for example, forms of random access memory), and / or electrical circuits that form a communications device (for example, a modem, communication key, or eq optical-electrical equipment). Those skilled in the art will recognize that the subject described here can be implemented in an analog or digital way, or in some combination of these.

[00726] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the term "logical" can refer to an application, software, firmware and / or circuit configured to perform any of the aforementioned operations. The software may be incorporated as a software package, code, instructions, instruction sets and / or data recorded on the computer-readable non-transitory storage media. The firmware can be embedded as code, instructions or instruction sets and / or data that are hard-coded (for example, non-volatile) in memory devices.

[00727] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the terms "component", "system", "module" and the like may refer to a computer-related entity, be it hardware, a combination of hardware and software, software or software running.

[00728] As used here in one aspect of the present invention, an "algorithm" refers to the self-consistent sequence of steps that lead to the desired result, where a "step" refers to the manipulation of physical quantities and / or logical states that can, although they do not necessarily need to, take the form of electrical or magnetic signals that can be stored, transferred, combined, compared and manipulated in any other way. It is common use to call these signs bits, values, elements, symbols, characters,

terms, numbers or the like. These terms and similar terms may be associated with adequate physical quantities and are merely convenient identifications applied to those quantities and / or states.

[00729] A network may include a packet-switched network. Communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using a selected packet switched network communications protocol. An exemplary communications protocol may include an Ethernet communications protocol that may be able to allow communication using a transmission control protocol / Internet protocol (TCP / IP). The Ethernet protocol can conform to or be compatible with the Ethernet standard published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) entitled "IEEE 802.3 Standard", published in December 2008 and / or later versions of this standard. Alternatively or in addition, communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using an X.25 communications protocol. The X.25 communications protocol can conform or be compatible with a standard promulgated by the International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T). Alternatively or further, communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using a frame-relay communications protocol. The frame-relay communications protocol can conform to or be compatible with a standard promulgated by the Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone (CCITT) and / or the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Alternatively or further, transceivers may be able to communicate with each other using an ATM ("asynchronous transfer mode") communication protocol, or asynchronous transfer mode. The ATM communication protocol can conform to or be compatible with an ATM standard published by the ATM forum entitled "ATM-MPLS Network Interworking 2.0" published in August 2001, and / or later versions of that standard. Obviously, different and / or post-developed connection-oriented network communication protocols are also contemplated in the present invention.

[00730] Unless otherwise stated, as is evident from the preceding description, it is understood that, throughout the preceding description, discussions that use terms such as "processing", or "computation", or "calculation", or " determination ", or" display ", or similar, refer to the action and processes of a computer, or similar electronic computing device, that manipulates and transforms the data represented in the form of physical (electronic) quantities in records and memories of the computer in other data represented in a similar way in the form of physical quantities in the memories or records of the computer, or in other similar devices for storing, transmitting or displaying information.

[00731] One or more components in the present invention may be called "configured for", "configurable for", "operable / operational for", "adapted / adaptable for", "capable of", "conformable / conformed for", etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that "configured for" may, in general, cover components in an active state and / or components in an inactive state and / or components in a standby state, except when the context dictates otherwise.

[00732] The terms "proximal" and "distal" are used in the present invention with reference to a physician who handles the handle portion of a surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the portion closest to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the portion located opposite the doctor. It will also be understood that, for the sake of convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "up" and "down" can be used in the present invention with respect to the drawings. However, surgical instruments can be used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and / or absolute.

[00733] Persons skilled in the art will recognize that, in general, the terms used here, and especially in the appended claims (for example, bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as "open" terms (for example, the term "including" should be interpreted as "including, but not limited to", the term "having" should be interpreted as "having, at least", the term "includes" should be interpreted as "includes, but is not limited to ", etc.). It will also be understood by those skilled in the art that, when a specific number of a claim statement entered is intended, that intention will be expressly mentioned in the claim and, in the absence of such mention, no intention will be present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain the use of the introductory phrases "at least one" and "one or more" to introduce claim statements. However, the use of such phrases should not be interpreted as implying that the introduction of a claim statement by the indefinite articles "one, ones" or "one, ones" limits any specific claim containing the mention of the claim entered to claims that contain only such a mention, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases "one or more" or "at least one" and indefinite articles, such as "one, ones" or "one, ones" (for example, "one, ones" and / or "one,

ones "should typically be interpreted to mean" at least one "or" one or more "); the same goes for the use of defined articles used to introduce claims.

[00734] Furthermore, even if a specific number of an introduced claim statement is explicitly mentioned, those skilled in the art will recognize that that statement must typically be interpreted as meaning at least the mentioned number (for example, the mere mention of "two mentions ", without other modifiers, typically means at least two mentions, or two or more mentions). In addition, in cases where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B and C, etc." is used, in general this construction is intended to have the meaning in which the convention would be understood by (for example, "a system that has at least one of A, B and C "would include, but not be limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and / or A, B and C together, etc.). In cases where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B or C, etc." is used, in general this construction is intended to have the meaning in which the convention would be understood by (for example, "a system that have at least one of A, B and C "would include, but not be limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and / or A , B and C together, etc.). It will also be understood by those skilled in the art that typically a disjunctive word and / or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, in the claims or in the drawings, should be understood as contemplating the possibility of including one of the terms, any of the terms or both terms, except where the context dictates something different. For example, the phrase "A or B" will typically be understood to include the possibilities of "A" or "B" or "A and B".

[00735] With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will understand that the operations mentioned in them can, in general, be performed in any order. In addition, although several operational flow diagrams are presented in one or more sequences, it must be understood that the various operations can be performed in other orders than those shown, or can be performed simultaneously. Examples of such alternative orderings may include overlapping, merged, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplementary, simultaneous, inverse or other variant orders, unless the context otherwise requires. In addition, terms such as "responsive to", "related to" or other adjectives participles are not intended in general to exclude these variants, except when the context determines otherwise.

[00736] It is worth noting that any reference to "one (1) aspect", "one aspect", "an exemplification" or "one (1) exemplification", and the like means that a particular resource, structure or characteristic described in connection with the aspect is included in at least one aspect. Thus, the use of expressions such as "in one (1) aspect", "in one aspect", "in an exemplification", "in one (1) exemplification", in several places throughout this specification does not necessarily refer the same aspect. In addition, specific resources, structures or characteristics can be combined in any appropriate way in one or more aspects.

[00737] Any patent application, patent, non-patent publication or other description material mentioned in this specification and / or mentioned in any order data sheet is hereby incorporated by reference, to the extent that the materials incorporated are not inconsistent with that. Accordingly, and to the extent necessary, the description as explicitly presented herein replaces any conflicting material incorporated by reference to the present invention. Any material, or portion thereof, which is incorporated herein by reference, but which conflicts with the definitions, statements, or other description materials contained herein, will be incorporated here only to the extent that there is no conflict between the embedded material and the existing description material.

[00738] In summary, numerous benefits have been described that result from the use of the concepts described in this document. The previously mentioned description of one or more modalities has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. This description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form described. Modifications or variations are possible in light of the above teachings. One or more modalities were chosen and described in order to illustrate the principles and practical application to, thus, allow those skilled in the art to use the various modalities and with various modifications, as they are convenient to the specific use contemplated. It is intended that the claims presented in the annex define the global scope.

Claims (20)

1. Method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site, characterized in that the method comprises: connecting, in a communicative manner, a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises an enclosure of the central surgical controller, and wherein the particulate evacuation module is configured to be received within the central surgical controller enclosure; removing particulate from the surgical site and transferring it to the particulate evacuation module; analyze the removed particulate; and modifying a particulate evacuation module operation based on the analysis of the removed particulate. Method according to claim 1, characterized in that it further comprises attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing. 3. Method, according to claim 2, characterized in that it also comprises, in a communicative way, the generator module and the particulate evacuation module. 4. Method, according to claim 2, characterized in that it also comprises connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device. 5. Method, according to claim 2, characterized in that it also comprises modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the removed particulate. 6. Method according to claim 2, characterized in that the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules to allow the sub-generator modules to act as a module single generator. Method according to claim 1, characterized in that the particulate evacuation module comprises a fluid line, and in which one end of the fluid line ends within the central surgical controller housing. 8. Method for evacuating particulates from a surgical site, characterized in that the method comprises: connecting a particulate evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises an enclosure of the central surgical controller, and in which the particulate evacuation is configured to be received within the central surgical controller enclosure; activate a surgical instrument within the surgical site; drain a particulate from the surgical site and transfer it to the particulate evacuation module; analyze the particulate; and modify an operational parameter of the particulate evacuation module based on the analysis of the particulate. Method according to claim 8, characterized in that the surgical instrument comprises at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device. Method according to claim 8, characterized in that it further comprises attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing. 11. Method, according to claim 10, characterized in that it also comprises, in a communicative way, the generator module and the smoke evacuation module. 12. Method, according to claim 10, characterized in that it further comprises connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device. 13. Method according to claim 10, characterized in that it further comprises modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the particulate. Method according to claim 10, characterized in that the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules to allow the sub-generator modules to act as a module single generator. 15. Method for evacuating smoke from a surgical site, characterized in that the method comprises: connecting a smoke evacuation module and a central surgical controller, in which the central surgical controller comprises a housing of the central surgical controller, and in which the Smoke evacuation is configured to be received within the central surgical controller enclosure; insert a component of the smoke evacuation module into the surgical site; removing smoke from the surgical site; analyze the smoke removed; and modifying a smoke evacuation module operation based on the analysis of the removed smoke. 16. Method according to claim 15, characterized in that it further comprises attaching a generator module to the central surgical controller housing. 17. Method according to claim 16, characterized by also understanding the connection between the generator module and the smoke evacuation module. 18. Method, according to claim 16, characterized in that it also comprises connecting the generator module to at least one of a monopolar device, a bipolar device and an ultrasonic device. 19. Method, according to claim 16, characterized in that it further comprises modifying an operation of the generator module based on the analysis of the removed smoke. 20. Method according to claim 16, characterized in that the generator module comprises a plurality of sub-generator modules, and in which the central surgical controller is configured to facilitate communication between the sub-generator modules to allow the sub-generator modules to act as a module single generator.